Home

ID-4000 for Windows Repair Manual

1. Figure 6 27 TX 2000 DISPLAY Button 6 61 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Loading Paper and Ink Load a new supply of paper and a new ink cartridge as described in the following sections whenever the PAPER or INK lights Figure 6 28 on the front of the TX 1500 printer flash Follow the instructions carefully to avoid paper jams and image defects Warning Always install a new ink cartridge each time you load paper TX 1500 Paper Ink Cartridge Sets The TX 1500 printer uses C1500P paper ink cartridge sets Each set consists of a 50 sheet packet of paper and an ink cartridge Each ink cartridge contains enough ink for the 50 sheets of paper in the set To avoid paper jams and poor image quality do not add print paper from a new paper ink cartridge set without changing the ink cartridge Store paper ink cartridge sets in a cool dry place away from direct sunlight Note that ink cartridges cannot be reused Figure 6 28 Paper and Ink Lights A on TX 1500 Printer 6 62 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Loading Paper 1 Open the paper cassette door and swing out the paper cassette Figure 6 29 2 Tilt down the front edge of the paper cassette and make sure the partition in the cassette is in the vertical position Figure 6 30 Note If more than 500 sheets have been printed sin
2. 7 Reepartitionin the Gard Drive corir inea a TA 8 Restoring the Current ID 4000 Files eeccceeseceeeeeeeeees 9 ReStOrmo troma Tape Dri 6 reinaan e E cea alee siete all 9 Restoring from an External Hard Drive c cc eecccccseeeeeeeneees 11 Testin othe Curren C oy ONE 250202 a TS 11 Installing the Ver 1 03 Software ce ccecccccssecccceeseceseeeeeeaeeees 12 Calibiraiine and Testini sagan ace escent eae 17 pera dine tO DOS G22 peices etn teenie saa dea tietealas 17 PRUNE EXE Syna epiese ie e soon tea niaeeduane 18 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Version 1 03 Upgrade Upgrade Overview General Upgrade Procedure Upgrading an ID 4000 system to version 1 03 from an earlier version requires the following general steps 1 Prepare for the site visit Copy the system files Document and back up the current system Repartition the hard drives Restore the current ID 4000 files 2 3 4 5 6 Test the current system 7 Install the Ver 1 03 software 8 Reinstall system files 9 Run prune utility 10 Calibrate and test 11 Upgrade to DOS 6 2 if required Detailed descriptions of each step are provided later in this supplement In general you must rework the following items when performing an upgrade e Badges fonts object positions logos bitmaps e Security levels e Diecut tool position
3. Factory defaults sNull modem cable 4800 0 7 1 High Energy Only Numeric data 9 Verification 0 removes verification button from the screen Capability 020 F1lLength 40 Port Com2 Baud 4800 Setting o 7 1 Verification 1 IATSER RS Factory defaults Pass thru serial cable 9600 n 8 1 High Low Energy Selectable IATA ABA or THRIFT on any track SS Verification 0 removes verification button from the screen Capability AAA F1lLength 76 F2Length 37 F3Length 123 Port Com2 Baud 9600 Setting n 8 1 TimeOut 7000 Verification 1 5 32 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ESMS INI File Contents Continued A4ER RS Factory defaults Pass thru serial cable 9600 n 8 1 High Low Energy Selectable ABA Track 2 bs Verification 0 removes verification button from the screen Capability 020 F2Length 37 Port Com2 Baud 9600 Setting n 8 1 TimeOut 7000 Verification 1 AS0ER RS Factory defaults sNull modem cable 1200 0 7 1 Low Energy High optional ABA Track 2 Verification 0 removes verification button from the screen Capability 020 F2Length 37 Port Com2 Baud 1200 Setting o 7 1 TimeOut 5000 Verification 1 3000a Barcode printer settings sNull modem cable is default Port Com2 Baud 9600 Setting e 7 1 CARD FORMAT DEV00 CR60 700 2000 2655 4
4. 61 504 1 30 1 62 505 1 30 1 63 506 1 30 1 S64 507 1 30 1 65 508 1 30 1 ASVS CNT 63 S13 345 36 1 l S14 346 42 19 1 S15 347 42 20 1 S16 348 42 21 1 S17 349 42 22 1 S18 350 42 23 1 S19 351 42 24 1 S20 352 40 25 1 S21 354 43 26 1 S22 355 45 27 1 S23 356 44 28 1 S24 300 42 l S25 301 1 NW 00 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 29 305 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 l S33 309 1431 S34 310 02 32 S35 311 15 16 S36 312 16 34 37 313 41 35 S38 314 17 36 S39 315 18 37 S40 316 19 38 S41 317 20 39 S42 318 21 40 1 S43 319 22 41 1 S44 321 i 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 15 18 56 57 l l a l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 5 19 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files BTNLIST INI File Contents Continued SVS CNT 49 S1 200 07 0 S2 210 08 0 S3 220 09 0 S4 230 10 0 1 l 1 3 l 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 S5 270 46 12 1 S6 340 39 13 1 S7 341 40 14 1 S8 343 15 33 1 S9 345 36 18 1 S10 346 42 19 1 S11 347 42 20 1 S12 348 42 21 1 S13 351 42 24 1 S14 352 40 25 1 S15 355 45 27 1 S16 356 44 28 1 S17 301 1 30 1 S18 302 1 30 1 S19 303 1 30 1 S20 304 1 30 1 S21 305 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 l 9 2 9 S22 306 1 30 S23 307 1 30 S24 308 1 30 S25 309 14 31 S26 311 15 16 S27 312 16 34 S28 314 17 36 S29 3
5. Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files ESMS INI File Contents Continued ErrorLogging DataFormat 0 31 10 93 16 30 45 1 10 31 93 16 30 45 ErrorLevel 0 Normal 1 Verbose Display 1 Do not touch leave as 1 ErrorLogSize AuditLogSize size of log files in bytes DateFormat 1 ErrorLevel 0 Display 1 ErrorLogSize 1000000 AuditLogSize 1000000 Storage QUALITY is JPEG compression variable the higher it is the better the quality of the stored image and its size PORTRAITS and SIGNATURES are the numbers of respective items taken on the system Quality 3 0 Portraits 0 Signatures 0 REFRAME Used for inline ID2000 3000 to ID4000 image conversion These parameters are used to correct the aspect ratio discrepency between the two The ID2000 3000 images shave a 5 to 6 aspect ratio ID4K has 2 to 3 SrcRatioX 5 0 SrcRatio Y 6 0 DestRatioX 2 0 DestRatio Y 3 0 PercntExpansion 100 0 XBiasPercnt 50 0 Y BiasPercnt 50 0 DestPixelsX 256 DestPixels Y 384 Rotations 0 Sharpening 0 FillColorRed 0 FillColorBlue 0 FillColorGreen 0 SUPPORT These are the settings of the support board that specify the sport address and the mask shouldn t be changed SUPPORT BASE ADDRESS 0x338 SUPPORT NUM _ PORTS 2 SB_ IDLE _0 RW 0x7a SB_IDLE_1 RO 0x01 SB_STROBE 0 0x01 SB_IRIS 0 0x02 SB_ SIG ENABLE 0 0x04 SB_SIG_DIR 0 0x08 SB_ BWTP_REMOTE 0 0x10
6. 4 CHD avio wo G Mg BIR _ _ MA DETAIL GAMMA D SUB OUT ves Figure 2 27 Camera Switches 2 39 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid CS 5001 Color Scanner Setup 1 Unpack the color scanner Do not connect any cables to it 2 Verify that the SCSI ID selector Figure 2 28 is set to 4 Change it if necessary 3 Turn off the ID 4000 computer then connect the power cord and the SCSI cable to the scanner If necessary see Cable Connections on page 2 51 for wiring diagrams 4 Turn on the scanner power switch 5 Calibrate the scanner as described in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual 6 After calibration turn on the computer and the other ID 4000 components Connectors Figure 2 28 Color Scanner SCSI ID Selector 2 40 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Magtek MT 80 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Setup Connect the Magtek MT 80 magnetic stripe encoder to serial port 2 and set the switches as appropriate for the installation Remove the cover from the unit to access the switch Figure 2 29 The standard default settings shown in Figure 2 30 are 4800 baud 1 stop bit and odd parity off 600 on on on Sw 5 Odd on STX ETX Transmit ETX Note Switches 6 and 9 are not used Figure 2 29 Magtek Encoder Switch Access 2 41 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configurat
7. 5 Using FDISK EXE partition the hard drive according to the following tables Local Systems with BLOB storage Drive Size MB Partitions Partition Sizes MB Any 90 all remaining space 2 74 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration All other systems Drive Size Partition Partitions Sizes MB MB 6 Continue with Formatting an Unformatted Hard Disk in the next section Formatting an Unformatted Hard Disk 1 Use FORMAT EXE to format all logical drives and install the DOS system and utility files in the partition indicated in the following tables Local Systems with BLOB storage Drive Size MB Partitions Partition Sizes MB Logical Drive C Logical Drive D 2 90 all remaining space System files Database BLOBs All other systems Partitions Partition Logical Logical Logical Drive i MB Drive C Drive D EF alete F m 90 250 System files Database 90 250 180 System files l l 30 250 250 150 system files 2 Use CHKDSK EXE to verify correct setup of each drive If CHKDSK reports any errors refer to the Microsoft DOS manual for corrective action 2 75 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 3 Use SCANDISK EXE to perform a surface scan of each drive If SCANDISK reports any errors refer to the Microsoft DOS manual for corrective action 4 Use LABEL EXE to create a volume label for each drive Installing Windows 3
8. ID4SV002 BMP Figure 4 22 Color Correction Dialog Box 4 19 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 6 Choose the Color Brightness button to display the Brightness Adjustment dialog box Figure 4 23 7 Select the Capture button then seat a person in the portrait position and capture his or her portrait for use in calibration Be sure conditions are typical for portrait capture with the system 8 Choose the printer to be calibrated from the Output Devices menu 9 Choose the Print Set button to print a sample brightness group and to display the Output Device Calibration dialog box Figure 4 24 Note Printing the sample group may require a few minutes Do not choose any buttons until the image prints 1D4000 Output Device Calibration Color Brightness Print set Polarold D4000 ID4SV003 BMP Figure 4 23 Brightness Adjustment Dialog Box 11D4000 Output Device Calibration Choose the picture Cancel to quit or Back to make a new set of pictures Cancel ODCALBRT BMP Figure 4 24 Output Device Calibration Dialog Box 4 20 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 10 If the printed sample group contains a satisfactory image select it by choosing its position in the Output Device Calibration dialog box This calibrates the system and returns you to the System Management window If none of the image
9. Serial Number Number from Close Up diskette 10 Select AT amp T Paradyne DM424 V 32 as the installed modem 11 Allow the setup program to create Windows group and icon Press ENTER to select the default configuration 12 Set the Video Mode to VGA 13 Press ENTER to accept the configuration Note It may require a few seconds for the system to test the configuration and redisplay it 14 Press ENTER to close the setup program and return to the C prompt 15 Start Windows and start Close Up to verify proper operation 2 79 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installing Crystal Reports Pro 3 0 Note Aways install Crystal Reports before installing the ID 4000 core software 1 Insert diskette 1 of Crystal Reports Professional Edition Version 3 X into drive A 2 If Windows is not running start it by typing win at the DOS prompt and pressing ENTER 3 Pull down the Program Manager File menu and select Run 4 Type a setup in the Run dialog box and click on OK 5 Select the default directory C CRW and click on Continue 6 Insert the other Crystal Reports diskettes when prompted 7 When a message indicates that file installation is complete click OK 8 When the INI File Change dialog box appears click Continue with Change 9 When the File Change dialog box appears click Continue with Change 10 When the message Would you like to create a new Crystal Reports Program Gr
10. The application description can be up to 50 characters and spaces long This description usually includes the customer s name and a brief description of the system Application List The application list displays up to 10 previously saved application names It allows you to edit or delete existing applications If you want to edit an application highlight its name and choose OK or double click on its name If you want to delete an application highlight its name and choose Delete When the message Do you want to RESET the image index back to the starting number appears choose Yes to delete the application Note Before you can delete an application you must delete all images associated with the application template Identifying a Database Directory The name you enter in the Database Directory box becomes the name of the run time database directory which contains the database and specifies the directory where the output of the lock file 1s written Unless otherwise directed use C ID4K SMPAPP SDATA as the database directory If you enter a directory name that does not exist the system confirms your entry and then creates the directory Warning Do not type a database directory name being used by another ID 4000 application Doing so destroys files already in the directory If the database directory already exists you can choose it via the Browse button instead of retyping its name After the directory name has been ent
11. specific installation diskettes and creates a lock file for the specific application Some sales agreements may also require the VAR or agent to set up the customer s databases data entry screens and badges at this time Building the application requires an D 4000 VAR Application Builder which is available from Polaroid only to VARs and agents To prevent unauthorized distribution of functional ID 4000 systems the customer application created by the VAR Application Builder is capable of storing only a small number of applicant records Removing this restriction from the customer s application requires the VAR or agent to send the application s lock file to Polaroid for reconfiguration 3 3 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Create Application VAR or Agent Create Installation Diskettes VAR or Agent Unlock Lock File Polaroid Install Customer System VAR or Agent Design Databases Screens Badges VAR Agent or Customer Issue Badges Customer Figure 3 1 Typical ID 4000 Configuration Sequence When removing the database limit Polaroid archives a copy of the lock file as a record of the customer s system configuration The lock file contains a complete description of the customer s D 4000 system Data in the lock file also lets Polaroid verify that the appropriate hardware is being shipped to the customer Polaroid then sends the reconfigured lock file to the customer either directly o
12. Camera Wiring and Connector Cover 2 37 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 5 Attach the strobe to the strobe bracket and latch with the strobe lock Be sure the strobe is set to one quarter power Figure 2 25 6 Attach the strobe and bracket to the connector cover Figure 2 24 with three Phillips head screws 7 Screw camera mounting pole into input unit base Figure 2 26 8 Attach the camera to the mounting bracket by opening the latch and angling it into place Figure 2 26 Caution Be sure the camera is secure by gently rocking in place miii Un A 4 5 1 4 power Figure 2 26 Camera Mounting Pole 2 38 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual 9 Confirm that the camera switches and dials Figure 2 27 are set as follows If necessary remove the plastic cover set the switches and reinstall the cover Section 2 System Configuration Switch or Dial Setting GAIN FIX GAIN dB Level 0 DETAIL ON GAMMA 45 D SUB OUT RGB SHUTTER NORM WHITE BALANCE MANUAL Green Magenta Dial 1 tick mark CW toward magenta from center Blue Red Dial tick mark CW toward red from top center Lens 16mm auto iris Strobe Ya power with the 16mm lens GEN LOCK PHASE Factory Settings confirm only H 0 degrees top center SC FINE 2 tick marks CW from top center position SC COARSE Position 1 10 Connect the system cables as described in Cable Connections on page 2 51 WHITE BALANCE Q
13. Connor 2525 525MB Tape Drive Setup The Connor 2525 525 MB tape drive has the following specifications Capacity 525MB 320MB formatted Tape speed 90 or 120 ips Transfer rate 2MB sec burst 180K B sec or 240KB sec average The factory configuration has four jumpers Install or reconfigure the existing jumpers according to Figure 2 20 It shows the drive set up as SCSI ID 6 with Autosense on The jumper blocks are located in a slot cut in the left side rear lower corner of the tape drive J5 J4 Rer 123 12345 ve OE 0 Figure 2 20 Connor 525 MB Tape Drive Jumper Settings 2 33 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Input and Output Device Setup Polaroid CI 5000 Plus Film Recorder Setup To set up the CI 5000 change the SCSI ID to 2 as follows 1 Turn off the entire D 4000 system Warning Failure to turn off all devices may damage the system 2 Disconnect the CI 5000 from the computer 3 Reset SCSI address to 2 with the small rotary switch on the back of the CI 5000 Figure 2 21 4 Reconnect the CI 5000 to the computer 5 Turn on the CI 5000 then turn on the computer Figure 2 21 SCSI ID Switch on CI 5000 Film Recorder 2 34 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid TX 1500 Thermal Printer Setup This procedure sets the TX 1500 color thermal printer for interlaced input the correct setting for D 4000 systems 1 Set the rear pan
14. File CONFIG SYS i DEVICE C SCSIASP14DOS SYS D C ID4K ESMS INI OUTPUT DEVICES DEV09_NAMES Nisca Nisca PVC DEV09_DPI 300 CARD FORMAT DEV09 DATA 700 2000 2726 45 12 0 0 2726 4512 DEVICE INFO DEV09 NISCA NULL PVC BRUTAL N 5800 6000 Setting Up Multiple Area of Interest Scanning Setup Procedure Use this procedure to set up the CS 5001 scanner for capturing more than one area of a scanned document Use multiple area of interest scanning for example to capture a portrait and a signature from a single document and to store them in two separate fields Note If multiple area of interest scanning is used images must be stored in the JFIF format Attempting to use the TIF 6 0 format will cause errors 1 Inthe Application Builder Setup Tool choose Multiple Area of Interest scanning 2 Edit the TWAIN INIT section of ESMS INI in the directory C D4K to set up multiple areas of interest as follows a Edit the SetToUse line to match the following SetToUse 4 b Ifthe areas of interest include one or more images to be captured in color edit the 4PixelType line to match the following 4PixelType 2 If the areas of interest include only black and white or gray scale images edit the 4PixelType line to match the following 4PixelT ype 1 c Set the 4Resolution line to the desired scanning resolution as follows Desired Resolution DPI 4Resolution Line 125 4Resolution 125 250 4Resolution 250 500 4Resolution 500
15. Location Organization Address City State ZIP Contact Name Telephone System Component Description Model etc Serial Number Computer o S Monitor a Film OutputUnit ff Thermal Output Unit input Unit a CameraBack oS S Modem a Signature Tabet Die Cutter Laminator Power Strip Other Hardware ff Other Hardware Other Hardware ff Other Hardware owens Sd Sofware G y O Sofware G y O Software Sofware Software Od y O Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix A 16 SUPPLEMENT TO THE POLAROID ID 4000 SER VICE MANUAL Version 1 03 Upgrade Polaroid Corporation Customer Interface and Logistics Division 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 April 7 1995 Copyright Polaroid Corporation 1995 All rights reserved Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Version 1 03 Upgrade Contents WS Oy CV E isacntend Aananccaasanroaanchanasenonhaaeeat 5 General Upgrade Procequme ssipcriraniiiii ia de esse eae 5 Database Screen Files ceccccccsseececceseeeeceeeeeseeeeesenseeeeseeseeeeaeees 5 Badoe DES ONS oa E E 6 Logos Printed with the TX 2000 000 eccccceccccceeececeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeees 6 Required Tools and Equipment ccc cccccseccccseececececeeeceneeeeeees 6 Preparing Tor THe Site VAS i oreen siyetetuas caus cuentas cae T 7 Documenting and Backing Up the Current System
16. Maintenance Repair and Maintenance Proceduress cceeccccecceeseeceeeeeeeees 6 51 Resetting the CI 5000 Film Recorder cc eeccceseeeceeeeeees 6 51 TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer Loading Paper and Ink 6 51 TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer Clearing Paper Jams 6 54 TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer Verifying Settings 6 57 TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Loading Paper and Ink 6 62 TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Clearing Paper Jams 6 66 TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Cleaning the Belt 0 0 6 68 TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Setting Switches 6 70 ImageCard II Printer Setting Print Head Voltage 6 71 ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets ce eeeececeeeeeeeeeeees 6 71 ImageCard II Printer Seating the Print Head ee 6 72 ImageCard II Printer Cleaning the Card Rollers 0 0 0 6 73 ImageCard II Printer Cleaning the Encoder O Ring 6 73 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair and Maintenance Symptom Tables When a problem occurs use these tables to identify possible causes and corrective action System Power Up Problems Problem A message at powerup indicating a problem in one or more of these areas e Memory e Main board e Keyboard e Flexible disk e Fixed disk e Ports LPT or COM e Cop
17. Polaroid Repair Manual ID 4000 for Windows Digital ID Workstation April 1995 Americas Business Center Technical Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 TEL 1 781 386 5309 FAX 1 781 386 5988 POLAROID SERVICE MANUAL ID 4000 FOR WINDOWS Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Contents ID 4000 Description cc ecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees l 1 System CONLOUT AMON asena saeataeaceeteceee 2 1 Application NEUE Pior alesii a 3 1 Calibration and Adjustment ee 4 ID 4000 Directories and Files eee 5 1 Troubleshooting Repair and Maintenance 6 1 On Site Parts Replacement accn cc nconewi 7 1 Third Party SOMWar veciveiscescagisiesstetstentessdeaaes 8 1 MEERTEN OEE PEIEE N ET ETE APE ATIE EREET AETA E EAO A 1 Operation and Menu Diagrams SQLBase Reserved Words TX 2000 Terminology Controls and Indicators Password Override ID 4000 Serial Number Registration Form Parts Catalog Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement ii Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Section 1 ID 4000 Description Contents TEA OOOO VCR VIEW vas exscncosanccas seat satonadescn A 1 3 PUTE Gaara eesti acce oe ore ee ace eee 1 4 Hardware C Om POM ems gists eee erage eee 1 5 ID 4000 Computer Display Keyboard and Mouse 1 5 TAU ANG OULU DEVIC eins Secrest EEE vara neon T 1 6 Badec F inishine Equipment sesir e E son
18. Ponai a a _ Application Builder Menu Diagram A 8 and A 9 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Exit ID 4000 y Application List a 7 Login Window p y List y y Window m Delete Current Record Sst Display Image Print Issue Recapture Selection Window Add Record DIASIBS PCX Figure A 1 Operating Sequences Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Cancel Capture Reutrn to Data Device Window Entry Window Q Capture gt gt Video Camera Device Selection Window Image Type JS Resolution tl V Y VJ 7 y y Co Reeve G V y y y DIACAP PCX Figure A 2 Portrait Capture Sequences A 5 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Exit Admin Screen gt Login Window gt Change Password y Reports Create Text Reports by Using Data Entry Crystal Report Window gt Export Records gt Delete Records 992999297 Batch Data Browse Entry Window Window t gt Exit System Mgmt i Query Window i Audit Log View Print Purge Error Log View Print Purge Access Maintenance Assign Access Privileges to Users Set Locks Set Access Requirements for ID 4000 Functions f gt Backup and Restore Statistics Views Hard Drive amp Output Device 7777 Calibrate Image Capture ar 299 Browse PEL Y Window Batch Delete Batch Batch Mag Stripe Processing gt Batch Barcode Import Module Window B g
19. YEARS Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix TX 2000 Terminology Controls and Indicators This section provides general information about the TX 2000 VY 300 color thermal printer terminology controls and indicators See the instruction manual provided with the printer for more detailed information Diagram Figure O me FRAME button DISPLAY Eion FIELD button MEMORY button MONITOR button PRINT button READY lamp SELECT button PAPER lamp INK lamp OPERATE button Paper discharge slot PUSH OPEN button VYFR PCX Figure A 6 TX 2000 Front Panel Controls Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Power On Power Off Ready Paper Power cable connected Ink LEDs ONS a Operate LED Operate LED OFF ON Operate LED indicates power on condition Ready Paper and Ink LEDs remain ON when power is off VYONOFF WMF Figure A 7 TX 2000 Power On Indicator Cartridge housing Paper cassette Cartridge removal lever Control cover Cassette cover VYFROP PCX Figure A 8 TX 2000 Front Panel Components INPUT button PICTURE button MENU button SELECT buttons SUB MENU button VYCO PCX Figure A 9 TX 2000 Controls Under Control Cover A 13 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Password Override Use this procedure to gain entry to a system when the password has been forgotten or is not available To gai
20. ceeecceeeeeeeees 7 12 Replacing Computer Expansion Boards cccccccseecceeeeeeeees 7 13 Removing an Expansion Board cccccccccseeccceeecceneeseeeaeeees 7 14 Installing an Expansion Boatd cccccccecccccsesceeeseeceeeeeseeeaeeees 7 15 Replacing the Computer Main and Cache Boards 7 15 Rep lacmo the Keyboar deursien E aE 7 17 Replace the Laminator serena e EN 7 18 Replacing the Magtek Magnetic Stripe Encoder 7 18 Replacing the Signature Tablet oi icaucsdsasevnsinasavacieatarasdseeanteieoeas 7 18 Replacing the TX 1500 or TX 2000 Thermal Printer 7 19 Replacing the Fingerprint Scanner 2 0 ceecccccsseeeeeenteeeeeeees 7 19 Replacing the Computer Tape Drive ccecccceeeeeceeeeeeeees 7 19 7 1 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the Portrait Camera 1 Shut off the Input Unit power switch 2 Remove the connector cover with the strobe attached from the camera and disconnect the cables from the camera Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Camera Wiring 7 3 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement 3 Remove the camera from the mounting pole Figure 7 2 4 Unpack the new portrait camera and save all packing materials 5 Install the lens from the camera being replaced on
21. ot a es ae ee ee S Install the applicable third party software FastBack Crystal Reports CloseUp bar code fonts Install the SQL Local database application 8 Install the SQL LAN Novell database application 9 Install the ID 4000 application software Refer to the remainder of this chapter for detailed information about each of these steps Software Installation NCR 3333 Installing the software on the NCR 3333 system consists of two separate procedures 1 Configuring the CMOS 2 Installing the software Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Configuring the NCR 3333 CMOS 1 Reboot the computer by simultaneously pressing CONTROL ALT and DELETE 2 During initialization press F1 to display the CMOS setup screen Figure 2 48 3 Verify that the settings are as shown in Figure 2 48 and change any settings that do not match the figure 4 Select Software Controlled Registers by pressing F2 The Software Controlled Registers screen appears Figure 2 49 Device Current settings New settings Date 1 28 1994 Time 0925155 Flexible Disk A 1 44MB 3 5 Flexible Disk B Not installed Fixed disk C Automatic Fixed disk D Not installed Extended memory size 7168 KB Primary display EGA VGA graphics display Screen width 80 Columns Monitor type O Format for entry
22. the Bar Code Label Designer program is enabled as if all the customer s workstations are capable of printing bar codes even though only two workstations have printers Lock Section Gives the lock file its name The lock section contains the key values to unlock the appropriate buttons and menus for the workstation s template Data in this section is changed whenever the user updates the locked information Whenever a system is updated this section must be maintained so the user does not lose the locked information The HW and SW sections contain the version numbers of all the modules used by the customer s system This information can be used by Polaroid for reviewing or troubleshooting a customer s system Polaroid s library of lock files also provides a complete record of all systems in use 3 5 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Lock File Viewing The Setup Tool both Master and VAR versions can read a lock file from floppy disk or other external source such as a network Use this feature only for viewing the Lock File It does not affect the support files required by a system To view the lock file choose Old System button in the Setup Tool to display the Application List Choose External from the Application List enter the lock file path in the dialog box that appears and choose OK to view the lock file Application Setup Procedure Summary Creating a new application with the VAR Application Buil
23. 1 1 Reboot the system by simultaneously pressing CONTROL ALT and DELETE 2 Start Windows Setup as follows a Insert Microsoft Windows Disk 1 into drive A b Log onto drive A by typing a and pressing ENTER c Type setup and press ENTER to display the setup welcome screen 3 Press ENTER to display the Express and Custom setup choices 4 Choose Express 5 Follow instructions on the screen for inserting the other Windows diskettes 6 When the Windows Setup dialog box appears enter D 4000 for Windows in the Name box and enter Polaroid Corporation in the Company box 7 Choose Continue and verify that you have entered the correct information 8 Choose Continue and follow on screen instructions until the Printer Installation dialog box appears 9 Choose Install from the dialog box and continue following on screen instructions 10 When the Setup Applications dialog box appears select the default MS DOS Editor and click OK 11 When the Windows Setup Tutorial dialog box appears choose Skip Tutorial 12 When the Exit Windows Setup dialog box appears remove the diskette from drive A and click Reboot 2 76 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 13 When the DOS prompt appears verify that Windows starts correctly by typing win and pressing ENTER Warning Unless it is impossible to do otherwise never reboot from within Windows Always exit from Windows before rebooting Note Ifthe ID 4000
24. 1 12 D 4000 Software COMPONENIS cece ceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeees 1 13 Application Templates and Software Modules 006 1 13 Customer Application Builder ccc cceecccceeccceeeceneeeeeaeees 1 16 VAR Application Builder eccccceeccccseeecceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeas 1 16 DAMP le Appa ONS oari ni E EEK asus tetas 1 17 l 1 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Section 1 ID 4000 Description ID 4000 Over view Polaroid ID 4000 for Windows is a system of hardware and software Figure 1 1 for producing secure photo identification badges It also electronically stores text data portraits and other identification images for viewing on the system display or for reissuing badges In its full featured configuration ID 4000 for Windows captures and stores text data and high quality images portraits signatures etc for each applicant The system then prints full color custom designed badges on instant film color thermal paper or other media With the appropriate options the system can encode magnetic stripes or print bar codes on badges Report writing and dossier printing modules print text data and images on plain paper D 4000 for Windows exports text and images for use by other applications and systems It also imports text data for creating and updating ID 4000 databases Figure 1 1 Typical ID 4000 Security I
25. 11 7 Lift the main board slightly at the side nearest to the expansion board connectors 8 Slide the planar board slightly toward the front of the cabinet so the interface connectors clear the rear of the cabinet Then remove the planar main board To install another planar main board reverse the procedure described above Fixing Screws Oo me ii 906 60C05 E L Figure 7 11 Planar Board Fixing Screws 7 16 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the Keyboard l 2 Shut off the computer Unplug the keyboard cable from the rear of the computer Figure 7 12 Unpack the replacement keyboard Connect the keyboard cable to the computer Figure 7 12 Power up the system according to the operating instructions Repackage the replaced keyboard Figure 7 13 for return shipment Figure 7 12 Keyboard Cable Connection Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the Laminator 1 Unpack the new laminator and save all packing material 2 Unplug the laminator being replaced 3 Plug in the new laminator and set the power switch to the heat position 4 Adjust the temperature according to Laminator Setup in Section 2 of this manual 5 Repack the defective unit and return it for service Replacing the Magtek Magnetic Stripe Encoder 1 Unpack the new encoder and save all packing material 2 Configure
26. 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Section 3 Application Setup Contents Software Configuration Sequence ceeccccsecccccsesceeesesceeseeeeees 3 3 Lock File DeSCLIptiONn cc cecccceccccaecceceeeceaeecececeeaeeceseeceeaenes 3 5 Oo Xe A CAAA T E O oe rete eet E ere aT ET ae Re 3 6 Application Setup Procedure Summary ccececeeeccceseeeeeeeeeees 3 6 Planning the Setup Process 00 eecccccecccccseseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeaees 3 7 Naming the Application and Database Directory 0 3 7 APplCavlOnINAMe aE A OI ee 3 7 APP Hh Canon Destria E N 3 8 Apphcation PASI esrncarnorieinen nann eE A E ARENA 3 8 Identifying a Database Directory s nosonnssoensssensseossseeesseeessn 3 8 Providing Basic Application Information c cc eeecceeeeeeee eee 3 9 Datibo a E T 3 9 ACOS CONTO lorier iena A A E AET E E tes 3 9 COURS C VAC ae O A A N 3 9 POrTat Sye uessa ee rer Ronen er ener one erty 3 9 OURO TOMA Sunan s ea ee a A eet 3 9 Storage Options cc cecccccecccceseecceeeecceseecceseeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeees 3 9 LSM AUC a a E 3 10 petume Up Database Lot ihor a E E 3 10 Specifying the Template Hardware and Software 3 11 Choosing a Template ccccccecccccccsesececcseeeeceeaaeeeeeeeseeseeeesanes 3 11 Choosine Hardware ODtONS vcscssssdsccesdsssencedaacaunadvom vans oaaveeaioeats 3 11 Choosing Application Software ccccccceccccssesceeeseeeeeeseeeaeeees 3 12 S
27. 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 6 After entering the desired settings choose OK to put them into effect To cancel the new settings choose Revert instead 7 To verify the effect of the new settings choose the Preview and Scan buttons as needed to scan an image If necessary repeat steps 5 and 6 to make additional adjustments 8 Choose the Store button to display the Store dialog box Figure 4 35 9 To store the new values as the default settings values in effect whenever the Scanner Control Panel appears save the new values in the file CSSO0I CFG To store the new values as a unique configuration file for loading via the Retrieve button enter a file name and choose Save 10 Choose the Done button to return to the ID 4000 application File Hame Directories co windows ttwainkcs5001 a is c gt windows twain E gt cs500i Save File as Type Drives Conio Fils CES e Bem a IDSV006 BMP Figure 4 35 Store Dialog Box 4 32 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Calibrating the CI 5000 Color Film Recorder Perform the CI 5000 calibration procedures below in the order given Electrostatic Discharge Warning Sensitive electronic components in the CI 5000 computer and other parts of the system can easily be damaged by small static discharges Warning Always use a wrist strap and grounded anti static mat when removing equ
28. DLL TWNSCAN EXE CARDINAL DLL HIFFL DLL INFORITE DLL CI5000 DLL HILCONV DLL LOGORES DLL CMDIALOG VBX CLRMATCH DLL HILENH DLL MHDES200 DLL DLINE VBX COMMDLG DLL HILIMMGR DLL MHRUN400 DLL GRID VBX CRC DLL HILXFORM DLL MONITOR DLL MHSR200 VBX CS 500I DLL IFFBMP DLL PATHRM DLL MSCOMM VBX DISKINFO DLL IFFEPS DLL POLFILE DLL MSMASKED VBX ERRAUD DLL IFFGIF DLL SCALE DLL MYGD VBX ERROR DLL IFFHCUT DLL SHOWLINE DLL PICCLIP VBX HAILAOIDLL IFFIMG DLL SNAP DLL QELINK VBX HAILBLB DLL IFFJPEG DLL SUPPORT DLL ROTTXT VBX HAILCAL DLL IFFMSP DLL TAPELIBW DLL SIGNAT VBX HAILFFT DLL IFFPCX DLL THERMAL DLL SPIN VBX HAILFFTF DLL IFFPICT DLL TOG DLL THREED VBX HAILFFTI DLL IFFRAS DLL VBRUN300 DLL TRANSIM VBX HAILFLT DLL IFFTGA DLL VIDEO DLL HAILHST DLL IFFTIFF DLL WINSSI DLL 5 12 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual 5 13 C WINDOWS WIN B 1 CLIPBRD EXE CALC HLP WIN INI WIN B 2 CLOCK EXE CALENDAR HLP WINFILE INI CONTROL EXE CARDFILE HLP WINHELP BMK DRWATSON EXE CHARMAP HLP CANYON MID EMM386 EXE CLIPBRD HLP 256COLOR BMP EXPAND EXE CONTROL HLP SPART PAR ARCADE BMP MPLAYER EXE GLOSSARY HLP ARCHES BMP MSD EXE MPLAYER HLP FSSELPT2 PCL ARGYLE BMP NOTEPAD EXE NOTEPAD HLP FSSLPT3 PCL CARS BMP PACKAGER EXE PACKAGER HLP CASTLE BMP PBRUSH EXE PBRUSH HLP _DEFAULT PIF CHITZ BMP PIFEDIT EXE PIFEDIT HLP DOSPRMPT PIF EGYPT BMP PRINTMAN EXE PRINTMAN HLP EDIT PIF FLOCK BMP PROGMAN EXE PROGMAN HLP QBASIC PIF HONEY BMP RECORD
29. Diagnostics Use this diagnostic procedure to verify setup after replacing or altering the computer the computer system board hard driver or memory 1 Turn ON the computer 2 When the screen displays a message asking you to press F1 for hardware setup press the F1 key to display the CMOS settings Figure 6 1 3 Verify that the hardware setup matches the setup displayed on the screen If it does not edit the settings as necessary 4 Select Software Controlled Registers by pressing F2 Device Current settings New settings Date 1 28 1994 Time Oe S27 eS Flexible Disk A 1 44M Flexible Disk B Not instal Fixed disk C tomatic Fixed disk D Not i 1 Extended memory size 7 168 KB Primary display EGA VGA graphics display Screen width 80 Columns Monitor type O Format for entry of date MM DD YYYY Dai Lll be set immediately Move up a selection ftware Controlled Regist Move down a selection F Exit without changes Enter the new setting END Save the changes and exit Figure 6 1 Setup Version 1 01 00 3333 6 36 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 5 Verify that the displayed settings are as shown in in Figure 6 2 If they are not make the necessary changes and press the End
30. Laminator Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description ID 4000 Software Components ID 4000 software has several components e Application templates and software modules e Customer Application Builder e VAR Application Builder e Sample Applications Application Templates and Software Modules D 4000 for Windows hardware and software is available in a variety of configurations called application templates While the Security Identification and Badging Station SIBS template with appropriate options is capable of full ID 4000 functionality other templates have only selected functions The ID 4000 Security Verification Station SVS template for example can only retrieve and display data and images for verification purposes New application templates with specialized capabilities are expected to become available from time to time To prevent unauthorized distribution of functional systems application templates produced by VARs agents and Polaroid sales organizations have capacity for only a few database records These templates become fully functional only after the application lock file has been reconfigured and verified by Polaroid prior to delivery to the customer See Software Configuration Sequence in the System Configuration section of this manual Several standard and optional software modules are available within ID 4000 application templates The Microsoft Windows operating system required to run the ID 4000
31. Paper jam Incorrectly set color tint contrast or brightness controls on thermal processor Ink cartridge being reused Paper not traveling smoothly through thermal processor Incorrectly set printer front panel switches 6 27 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Turn off entire D 4000 system Turn ON thermal printer only Make sure only the POWER READY FRAME and RGB lights are ON Press the PRINT button on the printer Wait for a test print horizontal black lines to eject Close and latch the door Replace cartridge and paper Install ink cartridge Install new ink cartridge Wait for steady light Remove paper jam See page 6 66 Adjust color tint contrast or brightness dials to middle settings on thermal processor Make sure that the FRAME and RGB lights are ON Replace the ink cartridge Ink cartridges cannot be reused Remove the paper from the unit fan it to separate the sheets and reinstall it Check the front panel settings Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Problems Continued Problem Repeated jams or paper feed problems Possible Cause Dirty printer belt ImageCard II Color PVC Printer Problems Problem Blank card ejects from printer no error codes visible Printing too light Poor print quality in center of card Unprinted areas and patches of ribbon dye on card Printing ribbon s
32. Repair Maintenance Loading an Ink Cartridge Use the following steps to replace the ink cartridge whenever the Ink light is flashing 1 Open the cartridge cover press the cartridge removal lever and remove the cartridge Figure 6 14 Warning Throw away the spent cartridge Do not attempt to reuse it 2 Remove any slack from the inked paper in the replacement cartridge by pressing and turning one of the spools Figure 6 15 3 Push the replacement cartridge into the printer and close the cartridge cover Cartridge removal lever VYINKR PCX Press and turn VYTC PCX Figure 6 15 Removing Slack from Ink Cartridge 6 53 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer Clearing Paper Jams Simultaneous blinking of the READY PAPER and INK LEDs on the front of theTX 2000 color thermal printer indicate a paper jam Use the following procedure to clear the jam 1 With the printer on open and close the ink cartridge cover Figure 6 16 to reset the printer If a sheet discharges from the printer and the READY LED stays on steadily the jam has cleared and the printer is ready discontinue this procedure The blank sheet that discharged can be reused If a sheet discharges but the READY LED is off open and close the cartridge cover a second time If the READY LED stays on steadily the printer is ready discontinue this procedure If the REA
33. Run command in the Windows Program Manager File menu to start A SETUP EXE 3 Choose Custom installation 4 Choose Hardware IRQ 5 then choose Continue 5 Deselect remove checks from all boxes except 8 bit Windows CAM then choose Continue 6 Allow the program to update the system files then choose Continue 7 Choose OK to exit from the setup program remove the diskette from drive A and restart Windows Installing Adaptec EZ SCSI Lite Software Use this procedure to install and set up the Adaptec EZ SCSI Lite software when using an Adaptec SCSI board and a Nisca PVC printer with the D 4000 Note Before performing these steps configure and install the Adaptec SCSI board page 2 31 and the Nisca PVC printer page 2 36 1 Start Windows and display the Windows Program Manager 2 Insert the EZ SCSI Lite Ver 3 xx diskette provided with the Adaptec board in drive A 3 Select Run from the Program Manager File menu and start the program A SETUP 4 Read and follow the on screen checklist 5 Choose Install Adaptec EZ SCSI then choose Continue 6 When a message indicates that installation is complete return to the Windows Program Manager and remove the diskette from drive A 2 111 Polaroid 1D 4000 Service Manual ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 7 Using the Windows Notepad or another text editor verify that the following values and lines have been added to the indicated files
34. SB_CTP_MEM 0 0x20 SB_CTP_PRINT 0 0x40 SB_SIG_CARDPRES 1 0x01 SB_CI5K_ PULL 1 0x02 SUPPORT BOARD ON 5 29 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ESMS INI File Contents Continued OUTPUT_DEVICES DEV00_NAME Film CI 5000 DEV00_DPI 278 DEV01_ NAME Thermall VY 300 HiRes DEVO1_ DPI 183 DEV11_NAME Thermal2 VY 300 Square DEV11_ DPI 152 DEV12 NAME Thermal3 VY 300 PAL DEV12_ DPI 180 DEV02 _ NAME Thermal2 TX1500 DEV02_DPI 96 DEV03 NAME B amp W Thermall Sony 610 DEV03_DPI 96 DEV04 NAME B amp W Thermal Sony 860 DEV04_ DPI 96 DEV05_ NAME Dossier LaserJet DEV05_DPI 300 DEV06_NAME DataCard ImageCard I DEV06_DPI 300 DEV07_NAME WINFAX WINFAX DEV07_DPI 300 DEV08 NAME DataCard BW DataCard II DEV08 DPI 300 DEV09_NAME2 amp Nisca Nisca PVC DEV09_DPI 300 DEV10 NAME Color ID Card Fargo PVC DEV10_DPI 300 DEVICES This is the output dimensions for particular devices in twips sIf the device is not VERTUAL leave them zeroes CI 5000 VIRTUAL 5310 4140 HP LaserJet HISISNORMAL 0 0 HP LaserJet 4 4M NORMAL O 0 VY 300 VIRTUAL 6030 4680 DEVICE LIBRARY CI 5000 CI5000 DLL VY 300 HiRes THERMAL DLL VY 300 Square THERMAL DLL VY 300 Pal THERMAL DLL HP LaserJet II Si HP LaserJet I TX1500 TX1500 DLL Sony610 MONITOR DLL Sony860 MONITOR DLL Monitor MONITOR DLL Film Count The number of prints that could be made with one spack of CI5000 film Film_Count 8 5 30
35. SCSI cables from the film recorder 3 Remove the six screws from the bottom of the film recorder and remove the cover 4 Connect Centronics cable 1A5556A between parallel port 1 of the CPU and the 25 pin connector on the back of the film recorder 5 Reconnect the power cable turn the film recorder on and turn on the D 4000 computer 6 Install Digital Palette Gentest on the host system as follows a Make anew subdirectory DPGENTST under the existing directory DPALETTE The the result is C DPALETTE DPGENTST b Copy all files from the DPGENTEST diskette to the directory you have just created to be sure GTI images are in the directory c Add the two following lines to AUTOEXEC BAT SET DP2000 DEF IMAGE DIR C DPALETTE DPGENTST SET DP2000 PARALLEL PORT 1 4 35 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 7 Install the camera back on the film recorder 8 Insert the final assembly alignment gauge into the camera back Figure 4 37 Alignment Procedure Warning Most of the steps in this procedure are performed with the power on Use extreme caution to avoid electrical shock 1 Exit to DOS and run Digital Palette GENTEST by typing c dpalette dpgentst dpgentst and pressing Enter Final Assembly Alignment Gauge Calibrated Digital Palette DPASAL PCX Figure 4 37 Electrical Final Assembly Alignment of the CRT 4 36 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration an
36. Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ESMS INI File Contents Continued Page Count CI 5000 0 VY 300 HiRes 0 VY 300 Square 0 VY 300 Pal 0 Sony610 0 Film Tables This is used by print spooler to speed up CI5000 printing The specified fast film table will override whatever is the default Film 1 C dpalette UVFASTP1 FLM CI 5000 Spooler The maximum number of jobs in CI5000 queue The default is 4 if nothing is specified QueueLimit 4 TAPE SCSI ID 6 BARCODE39 Fonts used to print barcodes L low density M midle 3H high Do not change L12 C39P12DITt L24 C39P24DITt L36 C39P36DITt L48 C39P48DITt L60 C39P60DITt L72 C39P72DITt M12 C39P12DmTt M24 C39P24DmTt M36 C39P36DmTt M48 C39P48DmTt M60 C39P60DmTt M72 C39P72DmTt H12 C39P12DhTt H24 C39P24DhTt H48 C39P48DhTt H60 C39P60DhTt 5 31 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ESMS INI File Contents Continued BARCODE20F5 Fonts used to print barcodes L low density M midle Do not change L12 IntP12DITt L24 IntP24DITt L36 IntP36DITt L48 IntP48DITt L60 IntP60DITt L72 IntP72DITt M12 IntP12DmTt M24 IntP24DmTt M36 IntP36DmTt M48 IntP48DmTt M60 IntP60DmTt M72 IntP72DmTt MAGSTRIPE Restore Y ES saves unencoded data to disk and restores it in next session Restore No Test No MT 80
37. a Fixed Disk Setup Identify Drive WritePreComp 65535 515 Mb Landing Zone OF Cylinders 1048 eo A 2 69 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Power Management System Standby Disabled Monitor Power Mgmt Disabled Hard Disk Standby Disabled Security Mode Disabled Performance Mode turbo mode standard ew Advanced System Setup Cache Control Internal Cache Enabled ROM Cache C0000 C7FFF Cacheable Second Level Cache Disabled Video ROM Cache F0000 FFFFF Cacheable BIOS Advanced System Setup ROM Shadowing BIOS BIOS Chipset and Peripheral Control C a User Password Administrator Password Password Prompt Allow user to change User Pswd Boot Options Keyboard Num Lock Boot Sequence Disketteless Operation Drive C Displayless Operation Keyboardless Operation Disabled J ISA Legacy Resources Do not change 3 Ifnecessary format the hard disk and install DOS as described on page 2 74 4 Install or configure the following software as appropriate for the system Installation or Config Software Instructions Install Windows Page 2 76 2 70 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installation or Config Software Instructions ESMS INI and AOI INI for multiple area of 2 112 interest scanning Software Installation IBM ValuePoint 6482 1 Power up the system 2 When the set
38. a card to verify that seating the print head has corrected the problem 6 72 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance ImageCard II Printer Cleaning the Card Rollers Poor quality printing in the center of the card usually indicates that the card rollers need cleaning Use isopropanol and a cotton swab to clean the five rollers shown in Figure 6 46 Warning Do not clean the cleaning rollers Clean these rollers only clean these rollers Figure 6 46 ImageCard II Printer Card Rollers ImageCard II Printer Cleaning the Encoder O Ring The encoder O ring which monitors the motion of the print ribbon and overlay foil should be cleaned weekly Use isopropanol to clean the O ring Figure 6 47 and be careful not to touch the O ring with your fingers Encoder O ring is wy C256 SS Or Figure 6 47 ImageCard II Printer Encoder O Ring 6 73 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 6 74 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Contents Replacine tbe Portrait Camera cota eros eucte ee eea ees 7 3 Replacine the OML PU ICE orrai E 7 7 Removing and Installing the Computer Cabinet 0000 7 9 Replacine tne Hard riy esac tee a 7 10 Replacing the 3 Inch Diskette Drive i ceeecceeeeeeeees 7 11 Replacing the Computer Power Supply
39. affect almost all colors to some degree At the end of each scroll bar is a color box that displays the effects of the setting You can change the values by dragging the scroll boxes or typing values in the edit boxes Saturation Settings The three Saturation scroll bars represent the intensity boost applied to each primary color red top green middle and blue bottom Drag the desired scroll box or enter a number in the edit box to achieve the desired setting The range of values is 1 000 to 1 969 the neutral or unboosted setting is 1 000 Increasing saturation boosts a primary color wherever it dominates and decreases its contribution where the other two primary colors dominate Hue Settings The Hue adjustments shift the balance or power of primary color saturation among the secondary colors yellow magenta and cyan As in the Saturation box the scroll bars represent the Hue settings for the three primary colors Note Always adjust saturation before hue The effect of each Hue scroll bar setting is proportionally related to the Saturation boost set for that primary color When a color s Saturation is set to 1 0 for example the Hue setting for that color has no effect The range of valid Hue settings is 300 to 300 The typical useful range however is from 100 to 100 Negative values for red top Hue bar accentuate yellow at the expense of magenta Beyond 100 greens shift toward yellow and magentas shift towar
40. and press ENTER f Select Y g Select Netware DOS ODI Client h Select Y to return to the menus 1 Select Configuration Diagnostic Troublshooting j Select Configuration amp Diagnostic Program k Select Install then Configure adapter l Select Auto Configure m When a message indicates that configuration is complete select OK n Select Test then select Run Tests amp Start o When a message indicates that the tests are finished press ENTER p Select Quit amp Exit q Edit the Link Driver section of NET CFG in the C NWCLIENT directory as follows 1 Change 3C589 to 3C5x9 2 Remove the semicolon from the line containing 300 3 Change 802 2 to 802 3 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 20 Reboot the system to complete the software installation When the software installation is complete proceed to System Calibration on page 2 82 and Functional Check on page 2 120 Software Installation CSS 462 486 ESP M After setting up the input and output devices and connecting the cables use the following steps to install the software on the CSS 462 486 ESP M computer 1 Power up the system 2 Initialize the mouse driver for COM2 by logging into C MOUSE type cd mouse and press ENTER and running MOUSE COM type mouse and press ENTER 3 Log into the Windows directory type cd windows and press ENTER and run SETUP type setup and press ENTER 4 Se
41. appears after dialing Modem does not answer incoming calls Modem cannot send or receive faxes Section of fax missing EC light on modem flashing Possible Cause Incorrect number being dialed Wrong dialing mode Modem disconnected from telephone line Faulty telephone outlet or line Modem disconnected from telephone line Fax software incorrectly installed Disabled answer mode in fax software Noisy telephone line Faulty modem 6 34 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check number and correct it if necessary If dialing through a PBX system a 9 and a comma pause may be required before the telephone number Verify that the dialing mode is set to Tone ATDT or Pulse ATDP as appropriate for the telephone system Verify the connection between the modem and the wall outlet Connect a telephone to the outlet and verify operation if necessary have the line or outlet repaired Verify the connection between the modem and the wall outlet The cord must be connected to the modem s LINE connector Review fax software installation and reinstall if necessary Enable answer mode or receive fax in fax software Resend the fax Replace modem Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Lamination Problems Problem Bubbles along sealed edge Upper edge of finished card is extruded Voids along edge incomplete seal Parallel ridges across finish
42. are to be stored 3 9 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Choice Description Max efficiency Default Max compatibility TIFF 6 0 JPEG Customized Allows a customized ID 4000 Security Identification and Badging Station to store in any format available Polaroid JPEG Reads and writes to Version 2 0 format In line Convert ME Converts as needed from Polaroid JPEG to TIFF 6 0 LZW In line Convert MC Converts as needed from Polaroid JPEG to TIFF 6 0 LZW Signatures Checking the Signatures box stores signatures in PCX format Setting Up Database Log In If an SQL database has been selected in the Basic Application Information window you must provide database log in information This information usually includes the following items e Server name e Database name e Sign on name e Password Unless directed otherwise use the following log in data Server Name SERVERI Database SDATA Name Sign On Name SYSADM Password SYSADM If necessary refer to the database documentation for specific log in procedures To create a database follow the instructions for SQLBase local network installations provided with the database software 3 10 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Specifying the Template Hardware and Software The Setup Screen shows the configuration of the current workstation The default is a Security Identification and Badging Station with no hardware or software
43. cartridge Install new print cartridge Wait for steady light before printing Remove jammed paper See Clearing Paper Jams TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer on page 6 54 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer Problems Continued Problem Buttons on front of printer inoperative Printer appears to be on but does not print Printer produces completely black images Inaccurate color in printed images Possible Cause FRONT CONTROL switch on rear panel set to off Incorrect printer settings Incorrect printer settings Negative Positive Reverse printing on Captured images have inaccurate color Portrait printing out of calibration 6 25 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Set FRONT CONTROL switch rear of printer on Verify printer settings page 6 57 Verify printer settings page 6 57 Clear Negative Positive Reverse printing Calibrate the input unit or the color scanner according to the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Adjust the color balance of printed portraits according to the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Problems Problem Possible Cause System software does not Data connection lost recognize the Color Thermal Printer Black pictures are being Wrong cable co
44. choosing OK from each open window If the system has a CS 5001 color scanner 1 Start Windows and display the Windows Program Manager 2 Open the SprintScan program group and select Control Panel 3 Select More from the Control Panel then select Devices to display a SCSI device list Figure 6 7 4 Verify that the SCSI IDs are correct and make any necessary corrections by changing the settings on the devices The System Configuration section of this manual contains SCSI ID setting instructions for each device 5 Return to the Windows Program Manager by choosing Done or OK from each open window SCSI Device List No Device No Device No Device No Device POLAROID C5 500 No Device ARCHIVE YVIPER 150 212 No Device Figure 6 7 Typical SCSI Device List 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T IDSV011A BMP 6 42 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Digital Palette Diagnostics Hardware Test The CI 5000 can print a resident test image to verify normal operation and identify its internal configuration EPROM version VRAM and DRAM configurations interface type and Daughter Board memory Perform this test as follows 1 Turn the CI 5000 power switch on and wait for it to perform its self diagnostics 2 Verify that the camera back is properly installed and contains film 3 Remove the dark slide 4 Press and hold the reset button on the back of the CI 50
45. chosen If you wish to use a template other than the Security Identification and Badging Station see Choosing a Template below You must add hardware to the setup before the workstation can be accepted To specify the hardware for the application see Choosing Hardware Options below You must also choose the software options for the application and set up the serial interface as described in Choosing Software Options and Setting Up the Serial Interface below The workstation name is generated automatically using an incremented number prefixed by WS The first workstation name generated for example is WS 1 After specifying all hardware and software click on the Save button During the save the system confirms that you want to copy IDAU ENC to the database directory and that you want to copy the default TOG file to the database directory You must choose Yes in both cases Note If you save an application with no hardware defined you can use the Old Application option from the Application Setup Main Screen to complete the application Choosing a Template To choose an application template other than the one currently selected click on the gt button to display a list of available templates If the application is a LAN system the Station Name is sequentially generated WS 1 WS 2 etc For a stand alone station enter the Station Name Choosing Hardware Options To view the available hardware options click on t
46. click Continue 5 Click Continue to acknowledge where informix will install to C INFORMIX and where Windows is installed C WINDOWS and the group name you want the informix programs to reside in Program Manager 6 Click OK to confirm the paths from the previous dialog box and install the Informix software 7 CLick Yes to allow Informix to make changes to AUTOEXEC BAT in the Append AUTOEXEC BAT dialog box 8 Click OK in the Information dialog box about the original AUTOEXEC BAT being copied to AUTOEXEC IFX 9 Click OK to acknowledge the completion of the installation 2 90 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 10 Click Run to run the SETNET program which sets up the environment in which Informix is run 11 Set up the SETNET program using the following data as an example The setup will usually identical except for the Hostname Hostname fuzzball Username inform1x Servicename sqlexec Protocolname tcp ip Password Radio Button checked Password inform1x 12 Click Save The Servicename refers to the entry in the services file see above 13 Exit from Windows reboot reload the network software and restart Windows 14 Verify Informix installation as follows a From the Program Manager use the Run command from the File menu to run C INFORMIX BIN ILOGIN EXE b In ILOGIN click File Run then click OK without entering anything in the edit boxes assuming a database named
47. djustRed 98 CaptureAdjustGreen 84 CaptureAdjustBlue 88 LiveBrightness 69 LiveContrast 100 LiveHue 49 LiveSaturation 59 LiveAdjustRed 27 LiveAdjustGreen 7 1 LiveAdjustBlue 100 AutoCenter 0 SVideo UseStrobe 0 UseCalibration 0 CaptureBrightness 50 CaptureContrast 50 CaptureHue 50 CaptureSaturation 50 CaptureA djustRed 50 CaptureAdjustGreen 50 CaptureAdjustBlue 50 LiveBrightness 50 LiveContrast 50 LiveHue 50 5 21 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual CARDINAL INI File Contents Continued LiveSaturation 50 LiveAdjustRed 50 LiveAdjustGreen 50 LiveAdjustBlue 50 AutoCenter 0 Calibration Points to the section which has the target information Target ID3000 The desired color space for the captured images This points to the section that has the colorimetry information for the color space Other possible spaces are CCIR601 and CCIR709 and CIELAB We hope to eventually move to CCIR709 ColorSpace ID3000 The desired value for the black card Black 2 The desired value for the white card White 248 The desired value for the gray card for setting the iris Gray80 200 The desired hue and saturation for the skin card SkinHue 11 SkinSaturation 30 Option for LUT calculation 0 single straight line use white card 1 single straight line use gray80 card 2 piecewise linear using all available grays UseGray 1 Option for matrix calculation 0 use skin tone card 1 Mean square error fi
48. it does enter the following parameters and click OK before going to step 6 Server Name SERVERI Database SDATA Name SYSADM Sign On Name SYSADM Password 6 Choose Hardware 7 Choose the hardware listed on the customer s bill of materials then choose OK 8 Choose Software 9 Choose the software listed on the customer s bill of materials then choose OK 10 Choose OK then choose Save Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup 11 Start the ID 4000 Configuration Builder 12 In the Copy To dialog box choose the floppy drive being used to create the diskettes 13 Choose Customer System 14 If you want to print diskette labels and your system is set up for printing them check the Print Labels box 15 Choose OK 16 Follow instructions on the screen for inserting diskettes in the drive and printing the diskette labels Restrictions on Copying Application Files Observe the following restrictions when using the Copy Application Files option in the customer diskette configuration section of the Setup Tool e The directories and paths described on the receiving system must be exactly the same as those on the copying system e No application can be created on the receiving machine prior to a copy The application must have been installed via customer disks The Copy Application function may sometimes reset generated numbers on the LAN To avoid this problem make a backup copy of
49. lighted Figure 6 23 e READY e OPERATE e FRAME If the front panel LEDs are not lighted as shown reset the printer by unplugging the printer power cord from its power source waiting at least 10 seconds then plugging it back in After resetting the printer reattempt to print an image If printing is normal the printer has reset properly and you can discontinue this procedure If the problem has not been corrected the printer s default menu settings may be incorrect Verify them as described in the next section Verifying Printer Default Menu Settings If resetting the TX 2000 printer does not correct the printing problem use the following steps to verify that the printer s default menu settings are correct This procedure requires the following software and equipment provided with the Cardinal Snap Plus board e Cardinal SNAPshot and SNAPtest diskette e 4 pin DIN 8 pin DIN cable 1 Exit from the ID 4000 application exit from Windows and turn off the ID READY lamp ON _ FRAME button ON 4000 system OPERATE button ON All LEDs and buttons OFF except those shown Figure 6 23 Normal TX 2000 Front Panel Settings 6 58 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 2 Disconnect the video camera cable from the VIDEO IN jack on the Cardinal Snap Plus board and connect the 8 pin end of the 4 pin 8 pi
50. line cord replace cord if necessary Check fuses and replace 1f necessary Check for power at switch return scanner for switch replacement if necessary Return scanner for power supply adjustment Test power supply and return scanner for power supply replacement if necessary Set SCSI ID selector on back of scanner to 4 See Computer does not start correctly or fails to recognize a SCSI device on page 6 20 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem Scanner motor runs but fails to grip and pull in image Scanner fails to turn on and grip picture when it 1s inserted into feed tray Scanned picture is out of position Cooling fan runs continuously Possible Cause Improperly inserted picture Dirt or debris preventing drive roll rotation Loose or missing drive belt or incorrect guide roller installation Picture too thin or transparent for detection by upper photointerrupter Upper photointerrupter disconnected from main controller board Faulty upper photointerrupter Incorrect head or foot settings in SprintScan software Faulty fan thermostat 6 10 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Remove picture and reinsert it Remove dirt or debris from drive roll shaft guide roller pivot arms and clutches Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Use document carrier pr
51. menu and choose Exit to close the Diecut Area Adjustment program Figure 4 54 Position and Size Control Arrows 4 50 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Section 5 ID 4000 Directories and Files Contents TDe4000 DiFector y SU UNCUT can E 5 3 File Listin os Oy OI eclOry ania eee aren ee areas 5 9 CDDP AGE TB i aincoceonsentexnvdawotenwninedtecismoivoarsnseaarkseuteesstutimokioeteteuaecets 5 9 C DAO sta aaatatna abate nauaniannce dun anon doen aceniuhienah osheaneubaseanannint 5 10 C DAE eee a a ee E AE 5 10 COIDAK CDPiB MAPS occire a a oietiie eaeeereeds 5 11 CIDER CDP LOGOS wrioaiekaeds si aavioinkat eed inaeetdnssdaetnceiaatoniaaeioaioiet 5 11 COIDAK CDP FORTS aiherra a aE ctebusocnisty 5 11 CDAK CDPSIG igaara a a tuted 5 11 C IDAR CERTABCE orn me norma ve tonnes ney tenner me 5 11 OC IDAK CUSTOMER sohsiiinted slhuoilaatused uintual sonar wiiiuail voles etude 5 11 CTDAK CUSTOMER APP cocsacrseccsata racsemansautea aaoi 5 11 CVIDAK CUSTOMER DB DIR vss tncerrtevuatransasdterat wenn nese 5 11 C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIRMUMG occ cceeseecccenneeeeceensenes 5 11 UD 2 AD Ge crrene ne ene Ene een Ene REE ert Or earner ne tr Cr nE 5 12 CAWINDOW Ss caecia easaihe ais naty a a a O 5 13 CAWINDOWSSY STEM cesta tere tise le tia ashen aera etal 5 14 AUTOEXEC BAT STARTNET BAT CONFIG SYS 0 000 5 15 AUTOR MC BA iia ataes tania eal ateelise ccaulee G 5 15 STARINE EBA cake age eal epee tet eats ot at
52. of date MM DD YYYY Dal ill be set immediately Move up a selection F ftware Controlled Regist Move down a selection F Exit without changes Enter the new setting F the changes and exit Current Current New Yes Yes Fast LPT I tr to tot ot t amp NNNNNNNN CG as a a a a A 0000000 0 Cache OS Cacheable Parallel Bidirect Boot from Flex Disk Move up down a selection Move left right a selection ESC Return to the first screen Enter the new setting END Save and return to the first screen Figure 2 49 Software Controlled Registers Screen 2 62 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 5 Ifshadow video BIOS is disabled set to No skip to step 6 If shadow video BIOS is enabled set to Yes disable it as follows a Select Shadow Video Bios b Select O No Disable c Press ENTER 6 Press END to return to the CMOS Setup screen 7 Press END to save the setup parameters and exit to the DOS prompt 8 Reboot the system by simultaneously pressing CONTROL ALT and DELETE After configuring the CMOS proceed to
53. on Scanner Control Panel 4 30 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 4 Choose the Field button to display the Field Adjustments dialog box Figure 4 34 5 Type new settings for any of the following field values as needed Horizontal Shifts the scanned area right or left while maintaining the Alignment same area width Positive numbers shift the scanned area to the right negative numbers shift the scanned area to the left Vertical Alignment Shifts the scanned area up or down while maintaining the same area height Positive numbers shift the scanned area downward negative numbers shift the scanned area upward Head Placement Shifts the top of the scanned area up or down increasing or decreasing the height of the scanned area Positive numbers shifts the top of the scanned area upward increase the height of the scanned area negative numbers shift the top of the scanned area downward Foot Placement Shifts the bottom of the scanned area up or down increasing or decreasing the height of the scanned area Positive numbers shift the bottom of the scanned area downward increase the height of the scanned area negative numbers shift the bottom of the scanned area upward Polaroid CS 500i Scanner Field Adjustments Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Head Placement Foot Placement IDSVO09 BMP Figure 4 34 Field Adjustments Dialog Box 4 3 Polaroid ID
54. print head See ImageCard II Printer Seating the Print Head on page 6 72 Increase the card strip offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Corrective Action Check outlet and repair if necessary Verify that printer voltage is set to 115V or 240V as appropriate for source Check for power at printer end of line cord replace cord if necessary Check fuse and replace if necessary Replenish blank labels Press Pause button If indicator does not go out reseat the labels and adjust the head position Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Intermec 3000A Bar Code Label Printer Problems Continued Problem Bar codes too dark or too light Not printing computer not communicating with printer Possible Cause Corrective Action Improperly adjusted density Adjust density Cable not connected Incorrect cable Incorrect ESMS INI assignment or switch settings Magtek MT 80 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Problems Problem Power LED off Possible Cause No power at AC outlet Faulty line cord Fuse burned out 6 32 Check cable connections and tighten if necessary Verify that cable is null modem replace 1f necessary Verify that ESMS INI device assignment matches COM port and printer back panel switches are set according to Section 2 of this manual Corrective Action Check outlet and repair i
55. supply 5 Repack the defective unit and return it for service Replacing the Computer Tape Drive 1 Turn off the ID 4000 system and disconnect the power cord from the computer 2 Remove the cabinet from the computer as described on page 7 9 7 19 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement 3 Depress the latches on each side of the floppy drive Figure 7 14 and slide the floppy drive half way out of the top shelf Make a written note of the orientation of the cable connectors unplug them and remove the floppy drive 4 Repeat step 3 for the old tape drive and remove it Note the cable connector orientation before unplugging them 5 Unpack the new replacement tape drive handling it carefully by its edges Save all packing materials 6 Configure the new tape drive according to the appropriate procedure in Computer Configuration in Section 2 of this manual Notes for Archive Viper and Cipher 150mb tape drives If the drive is used with a SCSI hard drive remove the terminating resistors and connect the drive to the middle connector of the SCSI cable The terminating resistors are in SIP form located between the 50 pin SCSI connector and the circuit board at the rear of the drive If the drive is to be used without a SCSI hard drive install the terminating resistors and connect the drive to the end of the SCSI cable Be sure the red line on the 50 pin connector is closest to the power con
56. system has an IBM ValuePoint 466DX2 Dp computer do not enable 32 bit disk access in Windows Installing the Mouse Driver 1 Remove the write protection from the mouse setup diskette and insert the diskette in drive A 2 If Windows is not running start it by typing win at the DOS prompt and pressing ENTER 3 Pull down the Program Manager File menu and select Run 4 Type a setup in the Run dialog box and click on OK to display the Mouse Setup dialog box 5 Click on Continue to display the User Information dialog box 6 Enter ID 4000 for Windows and Polaroid in the appropriate locations 7 Click on Continue to display the Mouse Setup dialog box then click on Continue to accept the default settings 8 Remove the diskette from drive A click on Restart and click OK to reboot 9 Start Windows by typing win at the DOS prompt and pressing ENTER 10 Verify that the mouse is working properly 2 77 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installing the Cardinal SnapPlus Windows Driver 1 If Windows is not running start it by typing win at the DOS prompt and pressing ENTER 2 Open the Main program group and choose the Windows Setup icon 3 When the Windows Setup dialog box appears pull down the Options menu and select Change System Settings 4 Click on the down arrow on the right end of the Display box then choose Other Display from the drop down list to display a dialog box with the me
57. the System Management button to display the System Management window Figure 4 14 4 Choose the Calibration button from the System Management window to display the Calibrate dialog box Figure 4 15 5 Choose Adjust Image Output Color to display the Color Correction dialog box Figure 4 16 ID 4000 43 00 13 Administration Si LiriNie me SET LOCKS Set security locks on use of the system Administration Screen SYSMAN BMP Figure 4 14 System Management Window Calibrate _ Adjust Image Output Color _ Calibrate Image Capture N CALDIAG BMP Adjustment Value 3 Red Less No change More Color Brightness Polarotd D4000 ID4SV002 BMP Figure 4 16 Color Correction Dialog Box 4 15 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 6 Select the Capture button then seat a person in the portrait position and capture his or her portrait for use in calibration Be sure conditions are typical for portrait capture with the system 7 Choose the printer to be calibrated from the Output Devices menu 8 After determining whether the amount of red in the printed portraits should be changed select the appropriate color sample group from one of the three shown on page 4 13 by choosing the appropriate Red button No Red Change More Red Less Red 9 Choose the Print Set button to print the sample color group you selected in step 8 a
58. the VAR application builder includes the Application Manager Database Screen Designer Badge Designer and Bar Code Label Designer With these tools VARs and agents can set up databases data entry screens and badges for their customers when necessary The VAR Application Builder also includes the Application Setup Tool and Configuration Builder which are not available to customers These tools create and configure customer applications and they produce floppy diskettes for installing the applications on the customer s hardware The VAR Application Builder can also produce installation diskettes for additional VAR Application Builder systems In addition the VAR Application Builder includes the compressed files necessary for producing installation diskettes for each application Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Sample Applications An ID 4000 sample application with a database screens and badges is shipped with each system to help new users quickly understand and use the Application Builder tools This sample application also makes it possible for Polaroid Manufacturing to verify proper hardware operation before it is shipped to the customer Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Section 2 System Configuration Contents COnMeUraliOMm Segu eNO oenar ane 2 5 ID 4000 Hardware and Software Component Summary 2 6 ID 4000 Tli
59. the cartridge then slide the cartridge all the way into the compartment and raise the ink lever Figure 6 34 5 Close the ink cartridge door then press the OPEN CLOSE button to latch it Note Ifthe INK light on the front of the unit is blinking after you close the cartridge door check for one of the following and correct it before continuing e Incorrectly inserted cartridge e Partially open cartridge door e Cut or torn film ink paper in cartridge Figure 6 34 Inserting the Ink Cartridge 6 65 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Clearing Paper Jams A paper jam in the thermal processor usually causes the READY INK and PRINT lights to flash simultaneously Clear the paper jam according to the procedures below Clearing Jams in the Printer Housing 1 Move the ink lever down and remove the ink cartridge Figure 6 35 2 Remove the jammed paper while turning the drum in the direction of the arrow Figure 6 36 Caution Ifthe drum does not turn easily do not force it Forcing the drum may strip the teeth on the drum gear Instead unplug the printer power cord plug it back in and turn on the printer This may allow the printer to detect the jammed paper and eject it automatically 3 Install the ink cartridge and close the ink cartridge door Figure 6 36 Turning Drum to Remove Paper 6 66 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Se
60. the e drive Testing the Current System After restoring the current system as described above perform a functional check as described in the ID 4000 Service Manual to verify that the system is operating normally Correct any operational problems before installing the version 1 03 software as described below 11 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Installing the Ver 1 03 Software Install the ID 4000 version 1 03 software as follows 1 Install the ID 4000 core software from the customer diskettes as described in the System Configuration section of the ID 4000 Service Manual Note It is not necessary to delete the existing application manually before installing the Version 1 03 software The installation program automatically deletes the existing application 2 From the DOS prompt run the PRUNE EXE utility provided on the Version 1 03 diskettes as follows Number of Hard Drive Partitions PRUNE Command prune c id4k customer sdata img c id4k customer sdata tog ini 20000 prune d id4k customer sdata img d id4k customer sdata tog in1i 20000 3 or more prunee id4k customer sdata img d id4k customer sdata tog ini 20000 Note If necessary see PRUNE EXE Syntax on page 18 for more information 3 Reinstall system files that were copied earlier Warning If the system is networked wait until the last disks are installed to reinstall system files or they will be overwr
61. the new camera 6 Attach the new camera to the mounting pole and reconnect the cables strobe and connector cover to the camera Caution Be sure the camera is secure by gently rocking in place Figure 7 2 Removing the Camera from the Mounting Pole 7 4 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement 7 Confirm that the camera switches and dials Figure 7 3 are set as follows If necessary remove the plastic cover set the switches and reinstall the cover Switch or Dial Setting GAIN FIX GAIN dB Level 0 DETAIL ON GAMMA 45 D SUB OUT RGB SHUTTER NORM WHITE BALANCE MANUAL Green Magenta Dial 1 tick mark CW toward magenta from center Blue Red Dial tick mark CW toward red from top center Lens 16mm auto iris Strobe Ya power with the 16mm lens GEN LOCK PHASE Factory Settings confirm only H 0 degrees top center SC FINE 2 tick marks CW from top center position SC COARSE Position 1 6 12 SETO 2E a coos x Figure 7 3 Camera Dials and Switches 7 5 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement 8 Verify that the strobe is set to one quarter power Figure 7 4 9 Turn on the input unit power switch and verify that the Power and green LEDs on the camera light 10 Perform the following calibration procedures from Section 3 of this manual a Focusing the camera b Calibrating the live image c Calibrating the captured image 11 Capture
62. this manual Clean reference chip or clear away debris Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual See Scanner loses calibration when turned off on page 6 14 Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual See Guide rollers fail to return to start position on page 6 12 Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Badge Printing Quality Problems Problem Poor badge color or brightness in both portrait and non portrait areas Poor color or brightness only in portrait area of badge Poor color or brightness only in portrait area of badge continued Badge image not centered on film Black border around badge image Possible Cause Outdated film in color film recorder Exhausted ink cartridge in color thermal printer Color film recorder out of calibration Incorrect portrait color or brightness data being transmitted to printer Portraits captured by input unit too dark or light Scanned portraits missing colors or washed out Film recorder out of calibration Film recorder out of calibration Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check film expiration date and replace with fresh film if necessary Replace the ink cartridge whenever replenishing paper Calibrate the film recorder according to the C
63. to activate the position and If the system prints only one badge per images trols for one of the sheet the Side 1 and Side 2 buttons are not accessible e S1Ze con Diecut Tools DC_ICON BMP Figure 4 52 Diecut Tools Icon Diecut Area Adjustment File Move Height 2 75 5 ene d SNS SKK Se 5 So 5 ates Xx gt S vores oS ves ves es es es es ves S oc OSS SKS SIIS l e lt lt lS e Se 5 SOOO OOTEE ESOS EGS ron SSSI ves SESE SCC SEES SECC SECC SECC SRR KKK KR KKK KK KRY SESS S III OI IID Taas ves cates S85 0505 e aX lt 29 2 eS lt gt Da REEE EO EO AEO EO AE AE AE LL LL LL AE CC AE AE AE AE AE T oe 3292s eR AISSI SSSI SISSI IIIS SSSI ISISI SISSA 00 Tette 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0S0 00O ISISI SSS SSIS SSSR ZITI E SR RR RR RR RRR RD LEMME M MMMM eee eee SC KK KK KE SS KKK KT SKK KKK KR KR KR KR KKK ep SS RK I KK OD SCC CC RR RR RR RR KKK KOH SK KK KT I KK KI OM SS CR KR KT SO RK KI OM SR KK KT SR KK KR KI OM SC RR E CK OS SR KK ED ESENES ONNENN NANNAN LLS SSSA 4 F999 OOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOEK O Width 1 75 0 007 Step Card type CR60 Device CI 5000 B003 BMP Figure 4 53 Diecut Area Adjustment Window 4 49 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 10 11 Click on the position and size control a
64. too light or too Wrong line thickness Increase thin setting SIGNATURETHICK setting in INFORITE INI to 4 6 19 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance SCSI Communication Problems Problem Possible Cause Computer does not start SCSI device not powered correctly or fails to up or turned on properly recognize a SCSI device SCSI cables incorrectly installed Incorrect SCSI IDs Incorrect termination 6 20 Corrective Action 1 Turn off computer 2 Verify that all SCSI devices are plugged into AC power and turned on 3 Turn on computer Verify that all cables are securely attached to the correct connections Verify that SCSI devices are in correct order in SCSI chain See SCSI Diagnostics on page 6 41 and the appropriate device setup instructions in Section 2 of this manual Verify that each device has a unique SCSI ID 1 6 Verify that the first and last devices in the SCSI chain are terminated and that all others are not Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual CI 5000 Color Film Recorder Problems Problem CI 5000 does not power up green LED does not light Possible Cause No power at AC outlet Faulty line cord CI 5000 power fuse burned out Faulty power switch Faulty power supply Loose or disconnected logic board connectors Faulty logic board 6 21 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check ou
65. trm txt notepad exe txt ini notepad exe ini pcex pbrush exe pcx bmp pbrush exe bmp wri write exe wri rec recorder exe rec hlp winhelp exe hlp intl sLanguage enu sCountry United States iCountry 1 iDate 0 iTime 0 iTLZero 0 iCurrency 0 iCurrDigits 2 iNegCurr 0 iLzero 1 iDigits 2 iMeasure 1 s1159 AM s2359 PM sCurrency sThousand sDecimal sDate sTime sList sShortDate M d yy sLongDate dddd MMMM dd yyyy ports A line with filename PRN followed by an equal sign causes filename to appear in the Control Panel s Printer Configuration dialog box A printer connected to filename directs its output into this file LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 COM 1 9600 n 8 1 x COM2 9600 n 8 1 x COM3 9600 n 8 1 x COM4 9600 n 8 1 x EPT FILE LPT1 DOS LPT2 DOS 5 47 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files WIN INI File Contents Continued FontSubstitutes Helv MS Sans Serif Tms Rmn MS Serif Times Times New Roman Helvetica Arial TrueType Sounds SystemDefault ding wav Default Beep SystemExclamation chord wav Exclamation SystemStart tada wav Windows Start SystemExit chimes wav Windows Exit SystemHand chord wav Critical Stop SystemQuestion chord wav Question SystemAsterisk chord wav Asterisk mci extensions wav waveaudio mid sequencer rmi sequencer Compatibility NOTSHELL 0x0001 WPWINFIL 0x0006 CCMAIL 0x0008 AM
66. 0 HLP F36 WINDOWS SYSTEM TX2KCENT DLL F37 WINDOWS SYSTEM TX2KDISP DLL F38 WINDOWS SYSTEM TX2KPREV EXE F39 WINDOWS SYSTEM TX2KSPIN DLL F40 WINDOWS SYSTEM OEMSETUP INF DELETE SECTIONS S1 Polaroid S 2 CI 5000 EPT S 3 CI 5000 LPT EDIT SECTIONS S1 PrinterPorts S2 Devices PrinterPorts E1 CI 5000 E2 VY 300 DEVICES E1 CI 5000 E2 VY 300 VIDEO INI VIDEO INI is located in the C D4K directory VIDEO INI File Contents GrayScale B amp W Printer Brightness 5 Gamma 5 CalCardWidth 5000 CalCardHeight 4000 WindowsDeviceName Video Printer WIN INI WIN INI is located in the C WINDOWS directory It contains several sections for Windows and Windows applications including D 4000 The short Polaroid section of WIN INI defines the startup directory for the ID 4000 application Polaroid tartUpDir C ID4K WIN INI File Contents windows spooler yes load C MOUSE POINTER EXE run Beep yes NullPort None device BorderWidth 3 CursorBlinkRate 530 5 46 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files WIN INI File Contents Continued DoubleClickSpeed 452 Programs com exe bat pif Documents DeviceNotSelectedTimeout 15 TransmissionRetry Timeout 45 KeyboardDelay 2 KeyboardSpeed 3 1 ScreenSaveActive 0 ScreenSaveTimeOut 120 Desktop Pattern None Wallpaper None GridGranularity 0 Extensions cal calendar exe cal crd cardfile exe crd trm terminal exe
67. 0 flexibility device assignments can vary Choosing the Appropriate Boards Use the Boca Board in the standard configuration This provides two additional serial ports and one additional parallel port If more serial ports are needed use the DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL COM X1 which will increase the number of serial ports by four On NCR 3333 systems with two on board serial ports for example the DigiBoard increases the total number of serial ports to six 2 30 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration BOCA AT YIO Setup The BOCA AT YIO board supports up to two serial ports and one parallel port The additional serial port is installed by adding a cable The jumper settings shown in Figure 2 18 enable COM3 and LPT2 Note INT9 should not be used under any circumstances as this is the interrupt line for the second interrupt controller DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL COM Xi Setup To setup the DigiBoard enter Windows and run the setup program found in the Windows directory of the DigiBoard diskette Displayed Setting gt Position gt Jumper Name gt SA COM1 oje coms SB COM2 ele com4 PINTS l PINT7 SAINT3 SBINT3 SAINT4 ele sBINT4 SAINTS SBINTS SAINT SBINTS Aw mM MNAANAANNA A ANANANNA Figure 2 18 Boca Board Jumper Settings Adaptec SCSI Board Configuration When using the Nisca PVC printer with the ID 4000 an Adaptec SCSI board must be inst
68. 00 until you hear the filter wheel move about 30 seconds 5 Wait for the green LED to stop blinking about 50 seconds indicating that film exposure is complete 6 Pull the film tabs and process the film for 70 seconds before peeling the print from the negative 7 View the test image to verify that it printed seven color bars red at top white at bottom and the configuration information as shown in Figure 6 8 Video random access memory VRAM Dynamic random access memory DRAM Interface type EPROM Added memory on version Daughter Board on top of Logic Board CISRESE2 WMF Figure 6 8 Typical CI 5000 Test Image 6 43 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance CI 5000 SCSI Diagnostics To view the SCSI setup for the ID 4000 system including the CI 5000 see SCSI Diagnostics on page 6 41 Scanner Diagnostics Viewing Internal Information Codes The CS 500 scanner internally stores information about the current SCSI ID setting the SprintScan software version and the total number of scans performed with the scanner To view this information use the following steps 1 Start Windows and display the Windows Program Manager 2 Open the SprintScan program group and select Control Panel 3 Select More from the Control Panel then select Codes to display the internal information codes Figure 6 9 CS 500 SCSI Diagnostics To view the SCSI setup for the D 4000 s
69. 01 or 102 key US and Non US keyboards mouse drv Microsoft or IBM PS 2 network drv No Network Installed language dll English American system drv NCR all 80386 and 80486 based machines codepage 437 woafont fon English 437 aspect 100 96 96 display drv ET4000 640x480 32768 col 386Enh 32BitDiskAccess OFF device int13 device wdctrl mouse vmd network dosnet vnetbios emmexclude C600 C7FF emmexclude E000 EFFF ebios ebios woafont dosapp fon display VDDTLI4 386 EGA80WOA FON EGA80WOA FON EGA40WOA FON EGA40WOA FON CGA80WOA FON CGA80WOA FON CGA40WOA FON CGA40WOA FON keyboard vkd device vtdapi 3 86 device vpicd device vtd device reboot device vdmad device vsd device v86mmer device pageswap device dosmer device vmpoll device wshell device BLOCKDEV device PAGEFILE device vfd device parity device biosxlat device vcd device vmcpd device combuff device cdpscsi local CON FileSysChange off PagingFile D WIN386 S WP MaxPagingFileSize 53248 standard NonWindowsApp localtsrs dosedit ced 5 43 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files SYSTEM INI File Contents Continued mci WaveAudio mciwave drv Sequencer mciseq drv CDAudio mcicda drv drivers timer timer drv midimapper midimap drv THERMAL INI THERMAL INI is located in the C ID4K directory THERMAL INI File Contents Thermal Printe
70. 0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 COC0C0 808000 0 0 FFFFFF Emerald City 404000 COC0C0 FFFFFF 0 C0C0C0 0 408000 808040 FFFFFF 408000 808040 0 COCOC0 COC0CO 808080 0 808080 8000 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF Fluorescent 0 F FFFFF FFFFFF 0 FF00 0 FFOOFF COC0C0 0 FF80 COC0C0 0 COC0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF Hotdog Stand FFFF FFFF FF FFFFFF FFFFFF 0 0 FF FFFFFF FF FF 0 COC0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 0 FFFFFF FFFFFF FFFFFF LCD Default Screen Settings 808080 COC0C0 COC0C0 0 COC0C0 0 800000 COC0C0 FFFFFF 800000 C0C0CO 0 COC0C0 COC0C0 7F8080 0 808080 800000 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF LCD Reversed Dark 0 80 80 FFFFFF 8080 0 8080 800000 0 8080 800000 0 8080 COC0C0 7F8080 0 CO0C0C0 800000 FFFFFF 828282 FFFFFF LCD Reversed Light 800000 FFFFFF FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 808040 FFFFFF 0 COCO0C0 COC0C0 800000 COC0C0 COC0C0 7F8080 0 808040 800000 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF Mahogany 404040 COC0C0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 40 COCOC0 FFFFFF COC0C0 CO0C0C0 0 COC0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 COC0C0 80 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF Monochrome C0C0C0 FFFFFF FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 0 COCOC0 FFFFFF COC0C0 COC0C0 0 808080 C0C0C0 808080 0 808080 0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF Ocean 808000 408000 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 804000 C0OC0C0 FFFFFF C0C0C0 COC0C0 0 COCOC0 COC0C0 808080 0 0 808000 0 0 FFFFFF Pastel COFF82 80FFFF FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 FFFF80 FFFFFF 0 C080FF FFFFFF 808080 C0C0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 C0C0C0 FFFF00 0 0 F FFFFF Patchwork 9544BB C1FBFA FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 FFFF80 FFFFFF 0 64B 14E FFFFFF 0 COCOC0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 FFFF00 0 0 FF FFFF Plasma Pow
71. 125DPI gt FRAHE Foszition Size Horiz oO MEMORY Required 225 kbytes Available 16320 kbytes Figure 2 51 Scanner Control Panel 2 114 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 3 Use the following steps to edit AOI INI in the directory C ID4K for defining the individual areas of interest within the overall area of interest a Edit the Scanner AOI Num section of AOL INI as follows Scanner AOI Num Num AOI n AOL View v AOI Rotate Angle r Use these values in place of n v andr n Number of areas of interest being defined within the overall area of interest Using a value of 0 turns off multiple area of interest scanning v Preview on or off 0 preview off 1 preview on r Rotation angle for all areas of interest after scanning Set to one of these values corresponding to the rotation angle in degrees 0 no rotation 90 180 270 b Edit the Scanner AOI1 section of AOI INI to define one individual area of interest within the overall area of interest Scanner AOTI1 Field_Type t Field_ Name f Iml X1 x Iml Yl y Im1 Ht h Iml Wd w Use these values in place of variables t f x y h and w t Field type used to store the image from the individual area of interest S signature field P portrait field f Name of the field being used to store the image from the individual area of interest x y Location and size of the individual area
72. 140 100 100 2520 3960 DEV01 CR60 700 2000 3015 4681 101 101 2520 3959 DEV11 CR60 700 2000 3015 4681 101 101 2520 3959 DEV 12 CR60 700 2000 3061 4592 101 101 2520 3959 DEV02 CR60 700 2000 2992 4590 50 50 2520 3959 DEV00 CR79 700 2000 4140 5310 720 362 2699 4500 DEV01 CR79 700 2000 468 1 6029 720 362 2699 4500 DEV11 CR79 700 2000 468 1 6029 720 362 2699 4500 DEV 12 CR79 700 2000 4592 6122 720 362 2699 4500 DEV02 CR79 700 2000 4590 5985 720 362 2699 4500 DEV00 CR80 700 2000 4140 53 10 541 269 3061 4860 DEV01 CR80 700 2000 468 1 6029 541 269 3061 4860 DEV11 CR80 700 2000 468 1 6029 541 269 3061 4860 DEV 12 CR80 700 2000 4592 6122 541 269 3061 4860 DEV02 CR80 700 2000 4590 5985 541 269 3061 4860 5 33 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ESMS INI File Contents Continued DEV03 BWTH 700 2000 3940 5248 623 125 2700 4720 DEV04 BWTH 700 2000 3870 5 140 160 160 3550 4820 DEV05 DOSS 600 2000 1 1520 15206 0 0 11520 15206 DEV06 DATA 700 2000 3060 4860 0 0 3063 4860 DEV07 DOSS 600 2000 12240 15840 0 0 12240 15840 DEV08 DATA 700 2000 3060 4860 0 0 3063 4860 DEV09 DATA 700 2000 2726 45 12 0 0 2726 4512 DEV 10 DATA 700 2000 3060 4860 0 0 3063 4860 Die Cut_H CI 5000 2 13 26 77 26 CI 5000 1 0 0 VY 300 HiRes 2 200 360 200 50 VY 300 HiRes 1 370 315 VY 300 Square 2 200 360 200 50 VY 300 Square 1 370 315 VY 300 PAL 2 200 360 200 50 VY 300 PAL 1 370 315 TX1500 2 0 300 0 50 TX1500 1 270 180 So
73. 15 18 37 S30 316 19 38 S31 318 21 40 1 S32 319 22 41 1 S33 321 23 42 1 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 18 l l l A l S34 326 26 45 1 S35 327 27 46 1 S36 328 28 47 1 S37 329 29 48 1 S38 331 31 50 1 S39 333 32 51 1 S40 334 33 52 1 S41 339 36 18 1 S42 501 1 30 1 43 502 1 30 1 S44 503 1 30 1 S45 504 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 9 9 S46 505 1 S47 506 1 S48 507 1 S49 508 1 9 9 9 9 5 20 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files CARDINAL INI CARDINAL INI is located in the C ID4K directory It sets the calibration parameters and the brightness and contrast values for the live video image CARDINAL INI Contents Capture 1 for NTSC 2 for PAL VideoStandard 1 for composite 2 for RGB 3 for S Video VideoInput 2 1 for horizontal window 2 for square 3 for vertical window VideoResolution 3 strobe recharge time in seconds StrobeDelay 14 loads the support library StrobeA vailable 1 UseStrobe 1 magic number for strobe grab timing in msec SynchDelay 3 RGB UseStrobe 1 UseCalibration 0 CaptureBrightness 7 CaptureContrast 100 CaptureA djustRed 22 CaptureAdjustGreen 15 CaptureA djustBlue 0 LiveBrightness 26 LiveContrast 7 1 LiveAdjustRed 82 LiveAdjustGreen 66 LiveAdjustBlue 44 AutoCenter 0 Composite UseStrobe 0 UseCalibration 0 CaptureBrightness 14 CaptureContrast 9 CaptureHue 46 CaptureSaturation 19 CaptureA
74. 2 System Configuration For ODI the batch file for connecting the the networks should be the following This assumes that all other required net files are in the C NET directory e C NET LSL C NET 3C509 C PCTCP ODIPKT C NET IPXODI C NET NETX C PCTCP ETHDRV C PCTCP IDRIVE Used only for mounting UNIX file systems See Using PC TCP to Mount UNIX Drives below Using PC TCP to Mount UNIX Drives The procedure below uses PC TCP to mount UNIX drives on the PC for storing images as files in directories 1 Install FTP PC TCP including idrive as described in UNIX TCP IP Client Side Software Setup on page 2 100 2 Perform the following on the UNIX server a Add the client hostname in the exports file in the etc dir b Execute exportfs a to activate the exports file 3 In the WinApps Group window within Windows double click on Network Control and click on Drives 4 Inthe Available Drives Edit Control type the server name and press ENTER The server name appears next to a computer icon 5 Double click on the server name next to the computer icon to display the available filesystems exported by the exports file below the server name 6 Click on the filesystem in which you want the images to reside 7 From the Local Name drop down list box choose the appropriate local drive name 8 Click on the Connect button at the bottom to display the PC TCP User Information dialog box 2 102 Polaro
75. 2 112 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration d Edit the 4Left 4Top 4Right and 4Bottom values to define the overall area of interest enclosing all the individual areas of interest as shown in Figure 2 50 relative to the maximum scanning area Note Dimensions of this overall area of interest must be entered in inches Up to two decimal places hundreths of an inch can be used For example 4Left 0 53 places the left side of the area of interest 0 53 inches from the left edge of the maximum scanned area Document Maximum scanning area 4Bottom Overall area of interest Note Overall area of interest dimensions must be in inches Figure 2 50 Overall Area of Interest Variables in ESMS INI 2 113 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration You can use the scanner control panel Figure 2 51 to determine the overall area of interest dimensions Open the control panel from the SprintScan icon or by creating a new record with the D 4000 and choosing the Capture button From the control panel perform a preview scan of a representative document Move the cropping bars to enclose the desired area of interest Then calculate the ESMS INI area of interest dimensions from the values in the Frame area of the control panel Horiz Position Horiz Size Vert Position Vert Size Polaroid CS 500i Scanner Control Panel Image Type Color Resolution
76. 30 68 40 17 40 68 130 1 Diamonds 32 80 136 80 32000 Thatches 248 116 34 71 143 23 34 113 Pattern 224 128 142 136 234 10 140 MMCPL ODBC C WINDOWS SYSTEM ODBCINST DLL CSS00I INI CSSOOLINI is located in the C ID4K directory CSSO0LINI File Contents Digital Scanner The following determines the TWAIN Source selected by default ScnManufacturer Polaroid ScnProductName Polaroid CS 500i Scanner The following will cause the CS500I to try to FORCE TWAIN to use the Source identified by the above Currently that does not appear to work we are consulting with the TWAIN working group about why SetSource 1 5 26 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual DWIN INI DWIN INI is located in the C ID4K directory DWIN INI File Contents PRINTERPORTS CI 5000 DPAL EPT 15 45 DEVICES CI 5000 DPAL EPT VY 300 HiRes TX2000 LPT1 VY 300 PAL TX2000 LPT2 VY 300 Square TX2000 LPT1 CI 5000 EPT Exposure 6 CamerabackFilm1 3 CI 5000 EPT BandSizePercent 75 Compression 0 WaitForDone 0 Resolution 1 ESMS INI Section 5 Directories and Files ESMS INI is located in the C ID4K directory and is the most critical ID 4000 INI file ESMS INI defines the following Scanner setup SCSI tape ID Error logging definition Bar code definitions Total image counter Magnetic stripe definitions Magnetic stripe hardware settings Date formats Card formats size diecutting parameters ESMS INI File Con
77. 4 FAX Modem Setup ccecceeesseeeeeees 2 49 aserler VY Printer Sep ig eke e teat a S 2 49 Hardware Key Installation and Setup cc eeccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 50 Coe 0 0h 1h e1 0 8 hc eee mee me nen er art NE 2 51 SiS TN A Naat estates Ges ced ecu ele cate 2 51 SCSI Device Address Organization ccccccseeccceseeeeeeseeeeeaees 2 55 SCSI Disk Tape CI 5000 Plus and CS 5001 Cabling 2 55 SC SHB oatd C Oni Eura O cnet aac EE 2 56 SCSI Cabling with 850m Controller Board eee eees 2 56 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Cabling cc ccccccsesccesseeeeeneeeeens 2 57 Intermec 3000A Barcode Labeler Cabling ecco 2 58 DataCard Black and White PVC Printer Cabling 2 58 TX 2000 V Y 300 Color Thermal Printer Cabling 2 59 Cabling Options with Cardinal and Support Boards 2 60 Software Installation and Setup serron ii n a E EREE 2 61 Software Elements ecccccceccccesesccceseseceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseesaees 2 61 Software Installation Overview oorsien ia 2 61 Software Installation NCR 3333 0 eeccccseeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 61 Software Installation HP Vectra VL2 4 50 ceeceee ees 2 64 Software Installation CSS 462 486 ESP M cece ees 2 68 Installing the CSS 462 IDE IO Device Drivet e 2 69 Software Installation AT amp T Globalyst cece eeeeeee eens 2 69 Software Installation IBM ValuePoint 6482 eee 2 71
78. 6 EXE V100018 FOT VGACOLOR 2GR QLGUP DLL WSWAP EXE V100019_ FOT ARIAL TTF QMDBF01 DLL V100020_ FOT ARIALBD TTF VIOFCAMD 386 QMGUP01 DLL CGA40WOA FON V100021 FOT ARIALBI TTF VDDTLI4 386 QMTXTO1L DLL CGA80WOA FON V100022 FOT ARIALL TTF VIPX 386 QMUTLOI DLL COURE FON V100023 FOT COUR TTF VNETWARE 386 SHELL DLL DOSAPP FON V100024 FOT COURBD TTF VSHARE 386 STORAGE DLL EGA40WOA FON V100025_ FOT COURBI TTF VTDAPI 386 TKCENT DLL EGA80WOA FON V100026_ FOT COURL TTF TKSCSI DLL MODERN FON V100027 FOT SYMBOL TTF V7VGA 3GR TOOLHELP DLL ROMAN FON V100028 FOT TIMES TTF VGA 3GR TTEMBED DLL SCRIPT FON V100029_ FOT TIMESBD TTF TTEMBEXT DLL SERIFE FON WINGDING FOT TIMESBI TTF MIDIMAP CFG TX2KCENT DLL SMALLE FON TIMESIL TTF TX2KDISP DLL SSERIFE FON VGACOLRX GR2 V100001 TTF WIN CNF TX2KSPIN DLL SYMBOLE FON V100002_ TTF TYPELIB DLL VGAFIX FON DPAL HLP V100003_ TTF IPXODI COM VER DLL VGAOEM FON FINSTALL HLP V100004_ TTF LSL COM WIN87EM DLL VGASYS FON HPPCLSA HLP V100005_ TTF NETX COM HPPCLSE HLP V100006_ TTF TBMI2 COM COMM DRV ARIAL FOT HPPCLSEO HLP V100007_ TTF DPAL DRV ARIALBD FOT HPPCLSOP HLP V100008 TTF CPWIN386 CPL HPPCLS5A DRV ARIALBI FOT NETWARE HLP V100009_ TTF DRIVERS CPL HPPCLSE DRV ARIALI FOT TX2000 HLP V100010_ TTF MAIN CPL KEYBOARD DRV COUR FOT V100011_ TTF SND CPL MCISEQ DRV COURBD FOT APPS INF V100012_ TTF MCIWAVE DRV COURBI FOT CONTROL INF V100013_ TTF BWCC DLL MIDIMAP DRV COURI FOT OEMO INF V100014 TTF COMMDLG DLL MMSOUND DRV SYMBO
79. 7 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet Board Installation 0 2 30 Serial Port Board Configuration ccccceccccsesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 2 30 Adaptec SCSI Board Configuration cccccccseccceseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Connor 2150 2250 Tape Drive Configuration ccccceeeeeees 2 32 Connor 2525 525MB Tape Drive Setup ccccccccceccceeeeeeeeees 2 33 2 1 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Input and Output Device SCU Donisi inia 2 34 Polaroid CI 5000 Plus Film Recorder Setup cc eeeee 2 34 Polaroid TX 1500 Thermal Printer Setup cc eeceeeeees 2 35 Polaroid TX 2000 Thermal Printer Setup cc eecceeeeees 2 36 NISC ach VC PENESCU D asena N eiavieetinees 2 36 Input Unit Assembly and Setup ccccccccesscccsssseeceeseeeneneees 2 37 Polaroid CS 5001 Color Scanner Setup s ssenssensseesseessenssees 2 40 Magtek MT 80 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Setup 00 2 41 Laminar SS UU eA 2 42 Intermec 3000A Barcode Labeler Setup eee cceeceeeeeeees 2 43 Sony 610 Black and White Thermal Printer Setup 2 44 Sony 860 Black and White Thermal Printer Setup 2 44 Inforite Signature Tablet Setup eecccccsseeeeceeeseeeeeeneeeees 2 45 DataCard B amp W PVC Printer ImageCard I Setup 2 45 DataCard Color PVC Printer ImageCard II Setup 2 46 AT amp T Paradyne 14
80. 9 Only numbers from 0 to 9 Letter place holder a z A Z A Alphanumeric A Z a z 0 9 amp Any printable letter number symbol and space Upper and lowercase letters from A to Z converting them to uppercase and space Upper and lowercase letters from A to Z converting them to lowercase and space Literals Parentheses can be used for phone number area codes etc Dash can be used for entries such as a Social Security Number The dollar sign is used for currency edit masks A The backslash is used to define any other character as a literal such as in an edit mask for an inventory number e g A 501 553 Separators Date separator Time separator s Thousands separator Decimal separator 15 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement b Ifthe existing application joins to non primary key fields recreate the appropriate tables to make the join field the primary key field in the table being joined to Example These tables are used in the Version 1 01 system being upgraded pk ID pk DIVISION DEPT gt DEPT LNAME DEPT fT DEPT LOCATION oo For Version 1 03 recreate Table 2 to make DEPT the primary key as follows pk ID pk DEPT DEPT DEPT LNAME LOCATION DEPT DIVISION o c Verify that date numeric or logical field types are not used for look up table keys Only character field types are valid for the join list box even though the Databa
81. 90 to the lens axis as shown in Figure 4 7 Note Use only the blue backdrop Auto Live Calibrate P gehen ges Cancel EJ Live Settings B C I vol Adjusting for color balance IMGCAL02 PCX Figure 4 6 Camera Calibrate Dialog Box 1 5m LENSPERP EPS Figure 4 7 Backdrop Position for Calibration 4 7 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 8 Hang the calibration target oriented as shown in Figure 4 8 on the portrait backdrop in the same position as the typical applicant s head The top of the target should be at the same height as the top of an applicant s head If necessary aim the camera to center the target in the Calibrate dialog box After completing these calibration setup steps proceed to Calibrating the Live Image below Calibrate Auto Live Calibrate Cancel EJ Live Settings 22 7o ao as 5s oan le a fe e Adjusting for color balance Adjusting for color balance color balance Setup IMGCAL09 PCX Figure 4 8 Target Viewed in Calibrate Dialog Box Calibrating the Live Image Use the procedure below to calibrate the ID 4000 portrait camera for viewing the live portrait The live image is the image on the ID 4000 display used for posing the applicant before the portrait is captured or frozen Note Ifyou have not already done so perform the steps in Setting Up for C
82. BMAPS e Sample bitmap BMP files User bitmaps copied to this directory when added to a badge design C ID4K CDP LOGOS Sample D 4000 logo files e g AXXLOGO POO Customer logo POO files C ID4K CDP PORT CDP design portrait files BMP in each of three formats square vertical horizontal CDP design ghost image files BMP in each of three formats The Adjust image file ADJUST BMP C ID4K CDP SIG C ID4K CLRTABLE CDP screen to output device color tables e g VY300CLR Note These tables apply only to badges not to portraits 5 6 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Table 5 1 ID 4000 Directories Continued File Listing Contents C ID4K CUSTOMER Local TOG numbering file TOG INI Tog files hold image TOG numbers card history unique keys and generated numbers The local TOG file assures that generated numbers are unique A TOG is always taken from the shared TOG file in the database directory If it is not used for some reason it 1s stored in the local TOG file until the same TOG is requested again Note The name of this directory is determined by the lock file path specified with Configuration Builder function of the D 4000 Application Setup Tool C ID4K CUSTOMER APP e Database screen file APP SCR e List of badges in use APP INI e List box entries file LBDATA INI e Badge definition files ODF e Badge logic files LDF e Badge sid
83. C 850M SCSI controller Page 2 27 l Second BOCA serial port 1f required 2 30 2 BOCA IO AT board 2 30 3 Polaroid Support board 2 25 4 Ethernet LAN board 1f required 2 30 5 Cardinal SNAPPlus Framegrabber board 2 26 6 2 12 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration NCR 3333 Systems Verification Station Only Setup Slot Board Instructions Figure 2 3 Cirrus Logic VLBus video card none req d l Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI controller Page 2 27 2 Ethernet LAN board 1f required 2 30 5 Figure 2 3 NCR 3333 Slot Numbers 4 Reinstall the computer cover After configuring and installing the boards proceed to Input and Output Device Setup on page 2 34 2 13 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration HP Vectra VL2 4 50 Configuration Configuring the HP Vectra VL2 4 50 requires the following two procedures e Initial setup e Installing drives and boards Initial Setup Perform this procedure to set up the HP Vectra VL2 4 50 computer before installing any drives or boards Note This procedure requires seven blank formatted 3 floppy diskettes 1 Unpack the computer monitor and keyboard from their shipping boxes 2 Connect the power cords and cables according to instructions provided with the computer 3 Turn on the monitor and the computer 4 Follow the on screen instructions to install WFW 3 11 5 Start Windows and verify proper system operation with mou
84. CODE DECRYPT EXACT EXP FACTORIAL FIND FV HEX HOUR IF INT ISNA LEFT LENGTH LICS LN LOG LOWER MEDIAN MICROSECOND MID MINUTE MOD MONTH MONTHBEG NOW NULLVALUE PI PMT PROPER PV QUARTER QUARTERBEG RATE REPEAT REPLACE RIGHT ROUND SCAN SDV SECOND SIN SLN SQRT STRING SUBSTRING SYD TAN TERM TIME TIMEVALUE TRIM UPPER VALUE WEEKBEG WEEKDAY YEAR YEARNO ABORT ACTIVITYLOG ADD ADJUST ADJUSTING ALIAS ALL ALTER AND ANY APPLY AS ASC ASCII AUTOCOMMIT AVG BACKUP BACKWARD BELL BETWEEN BM BRAND BREAK BTITLE BULK BY CACHE CASCADE CENTER CHAR CHARACTER CHECK CHECKPOINT CLIENT CLUSTERED COLUMN COMMANDSIZE COMMENT COMMIT COMPRESSION COMPUTE CONNECT CONTINUE COPY COUNT CREATE CURRENT CURSOR CURSORNAME DATA DATABASE DATABASES DATE DATEPICTURE DATETIME DATETIMEPICTURE DAY DAYS DB2 DBA DBAREA DBDIR DEC DECHO DECIMAL DEFAULT DEINSTALL DELETE DESC A 10 DESCRIBEINFO DETECT DEVICESIZE DIF DIRECT DISCONNECT DISTINCT DONE DOUBLE DROP DUP ECHO EDIT END ERASE ERRORLEVEL ERRORS ETIME ETONE EXECUTE EXISTS EXIT EXPLAIN EXTENSION FETCH FETCHTHROUGH FILTER FILTERROW FLOAT FOR FOREIGN FROM GRANT GROUP HASHED HAVING HEADING HISFILESIZE HOUR HOURS IDENTIFIED IN INDENT INDEX Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual INMESSAGE INSERT IN
85. DPRING PCX Figure 4 40 Centering Rings 4 38 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 6 Verify that the image coincides with the scribed lines in the center of the gauge and that the line around the perimeter of the image falls between the inner and outer scribe marks on the gauge Figure 4 39 If the image is out of position or alignment attempt to align it by adjusting the CRT centering rings see below If adjusting the centering rings fails to align the image mechanically adjust the CRT see page 4 41 7 After verifying image alignment or aligning the image perform the COS4 adjustment on page 4 44 Centering Ring Adjustment Use these steps to align the CI 5000 image with the final assembly alignment gauge only if alignment cannot be achieved with the camera back mirror or the CRT yoke as described in the alignment procedure above 1 Make the following adjustments on the monitor board Figure 4 38 a Adjust R7 to center the image horizontally b Adjust R27 to center the image vertically c Adjust R48 to obtain correct image height 2 Ifthe center lines of the tennis court still coincide with the gauge scribe marks alignment is complete discontinue this procedure If the lines of the tennis court do not coincide with the gauge scribe marks go to step 3 3 Set R27 and R7 on the monitor board Figure 4 38 to their nominal center positions 4 Cut the hot melt adhesive
86. DY PAPER and INK LEDs are still flashing go to step 2 2 Open the cartridge cover remove the ink cartridge Figure 6 17 then close the cartridge cover VYOPCL PCX Figure 6 16 Opening and Closing the TX 2000 Ink Cartridge Cover Cartridge removal lever VYINKR PCX Figure 6 17 Removing the TX 2000 Ink Cartridge 6 54 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 3 Ifyou see any slack in the ink cartridge paper press in the takeup spool and turn it to remove the slack Figure 6 18 4 Wait until the READY LED turns off and only the INK LED flashes then open the cartridge door Reinstall the ink cartridge and close the door If the READY LED stays on steadily the printer is ready discontinue this procedure If the READY PAPER and INK LEDs are still flashing go to step 5 5 Open the cassette door and remove the paper cassette Figure 6 19 VYTC PCX VYREMC PCX Figure 6 19 Removing the Paper Cassette 6 55 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 6 Insert your finger into the cassette compartment and push any jammed paper out of the discharge slot Figure 6 20 7 Reinstall the paper cassette Figure 6 21 and close the cassette door 8 Open and close the ink cartridge cover to reset the printer If the READY LED stays on steadily the printer is ready If the READY PAPER and INK LEDs are still flashing retu
87. Directories list 2 106 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 7 Choose the Select All button disable Copy Fonts to Windows Directory then choose OK to complete the installation 8 Choose OK as needed and follow the on screen instructions to return to the Windows Program Manager ID 4000 Core Installation Use the following procedure to install ID 4000 software Note If Microsoft Office is running close it before starting this procedure to prevent Office files from interfering with ID 4000 installation If you are upgrading from an earlier version of ID 4000 for Windows see Section 3 Upgrading from Earlier Versions before proceeding with the instructions below 1 If Windows is not running start it by typing win at the DOS prompt and pressing ENTER 2 Insert ID 4000 Install Disk 1 into drive A 3 Use Run in the Program Manager File menu to start A SETUP EXE Note To avoid File Not Found errors do not run A SETUP EXE from the Windows File Manager 4 Atthe message asking which application to install click on Select All and click on OK 5 Accept the default directory by clicking on OK 6 Follow the on screen instructions for removing and inserting diskettes 7 When the message Changes have been made to AUTOEXEC BAT click on OK 8 When the message asking whether you want the changes to take effect appears click on OK 9 When a message asks whether to reboot remove
88. E button then wait for the READY light to stop blinking and stay on 6 Press the PRINT button once 7 Wait for the PAPER light to flash indicating that cleaning has been completed 8 Open the cassette door swing out the paper cassette tilt down the front edge of the cassette and remove the belt cleaning plate from the thermal processor 9 Reinsert the paper in the cassette raise the cassette front back into place swing the cassette back in and close the cassette door Note If this procedure fails to adequately clean the belt moisten the four cleaning pads A in Figure 6 43 on the cleaning plate with isopropyl rubbing alcohol and repeat the belt cleaning procedure Figure 6 43 Moistening the Cleaning Plate Pads 6 69 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Setting Switches The switches and buttons on the front of the TX 1500 printer must be set correctly for proper printer operation and optimum image quality when used with the D 4000 If you suspect that any switch setting may be set incorrectly verify that each switch is set as follows Par Al Switch Figure 6 44 Setting Treaty B o rca gt on Note Only the lights indicated should be on If others are on turn them off If you change any settings press the Set button Figure 6 45 to accept the new settings Figure 6 45 TX 1500 Set Button E 6 70 Polaroi
89. ER EXE RECORDER HLP LEAVES BMP REGEDIT EXE REGEDIT HLP SCRNSAVE SCR MARBLE BMP SETUP EXE REGEDITV HLP SSFLY WIN SCR REDBRICK BMP SMARTDRV EXE SETUP HLP SSMARQUE SCR RIVETS BMP SOL EXE SOL HLP SSMYST SCR SQUARES BMP SOUNDREC EXE SOUNDREC HLP SSSTARS SCR TARTAN BMP TASKMAN EXE TERMINAL HLP THATCH BMP TERMINAL EXE WINFILE HLP HIMEM SYS WINLOGO BMP WINFILE EXE WINHELP HLP RAMDRIVE SYS ZIGZAG BMP WINHELP EXE WINMINE HLP WINMINE EXE WRITE HLP BOOTLOG TXT WIN COM WINTUTOR EXE SETUP TXT WINVER EXE CONTROL INI PROGMAN CUP WRITE EXE DOSAPP INI CHIMES WAV LINKGRID INI CHORD WAV REG DAT ACCESSOR GRP MARKGRID INI DING WAV WINTUTOR DAT APPLICAT GRP MOUSE INI TADA WAV CRYSTALR GRP MSD INI MORICONS DLL GAMES GRP ODBC INI NETWORKS WRI PBRUSH DLL MAIN GRP ODBCINST INI PRINTERS WRI RECORDER DLL MICROSOF GRP ODBCISAM INI README WRI TWAIN DLL POLAROI0 GRP PPTVIEW INI SYSINILWRI POLAROID GRP PROGMAN INI WININIWRI CALC EXE PRINTBAR GRP QEX INI CALENDAR EXE STARTUP GRP SYSTEM INI WORDDOS XTD CARDFILE EXE TRUBRWSE INI WORDWIN XTD CHARMAP EXE APPS HLP TRUEGRID INI WPERFECT XTD Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual C WINDOWS SYSTEM DP_DITHR 16 OLE2PROX DLL NWPOPUP EXE V100013 FOT VGALOGO RLE SPRNTSCN 16 OLECLI DLL PSPOOLER EXE V100014 FOT OLESVR DLL SYSEDIT EXE V100015 FOT STDOLE TLB DP_DITHR 256 QELIB DLL TX2KPREV EXE V100016 FOT SPRNTSCN 256 QEUTIL DLL USER EXE V100017_ FOT MMTASK TSK QLDBF DLL WIN38
90. ERS 30 LASTDRIVE E 13 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement 8 Verify that AUTOEXEC BAT matches the following and edit the file if necessary LH C DOS SMARTDRV EXE X ECHO OFF PROMPT p g SET MOUSE C MOUSE LH C DOS MOUSE EXE Q SET TEMP C DOS C DOS SHARE EXE L 500 F 5100 SET DPALETTE C DPALETTE DPALETTE CFG SET WSID 1 2 SET PATH C DOS C ID4K C ID4K SYS C WINDOWS 2 SET FASTBACK C FASTBACK SET FBP_USER ID 4000 callSTARTNET BAT 2 WIN 73 Note These lines can be custom configured for each workstation 9 Edit the SYSTEM INI file 386enh section as follows a Edit the 32BitDiskAccess and DMABufferSize lines to match the following 32BitDisk Access ON DM ABuffer S1ze 128 Note Ifthe system has a 130MB IDE hard drive set 32BitDiskAccess to OFF In addition note that 32 bit disk access may not work for some systems and a trial and error approach may be necessary When it does work performance improves substantially b Remove all EMMEXCLUDE entries 14 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement 10 If you are upgrading from version 1 01 perform steps a d below before continuing to step 11 a Review all screens with edit masks to verify that the masks operate as expected The specific changes from earlier versions are as follows Placeholders H Digit placeholder 0 9 Also the minus and plus signs and space
91. Formatting the Hard Disk and Installing DOS ee 2 74 NETS CALILIN VW MICO W S ilsatanoacedeatcageaieatageimantamaataanegaosatarcantadsacancats 2 76 2 2 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Software Installation and Setup Continued Installing the Mouse Driver cccceccccceccccceeeceeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeas 2 77 Installing the Cardinal SnapPlus Windows Drivet 2 78 Installing Close Up S Oense eaa aaan 2 78 Installing Crystal Reports Pro 3 0 0 cecccccecccceseeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeens 2 80 Installing PastBack PLUS 6 0 icsscssscecsnaay siewoadgssiesadsanenbantdaiesaiiens 2 80 DOS Windows SQLBase Server Installation ce eeee 2 82 Gupta SQLBase Server Installation on Novell Netware Server 2 84 Client Software Installation for Oracle on SCO UNIX Server 2 87 Client Software Installation for Oracle on NetWare Server 2 89 Client Software Installation for Informix on SCO UNIX Server 2 89 SQL LAN Novell DataBase Software Installation 2 92 Novell Netware Client Side Software Setup ccccccceecceee ee 2 99 UNIX TCP IP Client Side Software Setup eee 2 100 Using PC TCP to Mount UNIX Drives ec eeeeceeeseeeees 2 102 Modifying STARTUP NCF for NetWare ceeccceeeeeeees 2 103 Setting Up Stand Alone Database with Gupta SQLBase Server 2 103 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet Board Configuration 2 105 Bar Code
92. INI is located in the C D4000 directory It tracks the software structure for use by UNINSTALL in deleting the application and all its directories UNINST INI File Contents DELETE DIRECTORIES D1 DPALETTE D2 WINDOWS TWAIN D3 ID4000 DELETE FILES F1 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMUTLO1I DLL F2 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMTXTO01 DLL F3 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBF01 DLL F4 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMGUPO1 DLL F5 WINDOWS QEX INI F6 WINDOWS SYSTEM V9FCAMD 386 F7 WINDOWS SYSTEM DOSPORTS EXE F8 WINDOWS SYSTEM QLDBF DLL F9 WINDOWS SYSTEM QLGUP DLL F10 WINDOWS SYSTEM QELIB DLL F11 WINDOWS SYSTEM QEUTIL DLL F12 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMUTLO1 DLL F13 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMTXT01 DLL F14 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBFO1 DLL F15 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMUTLO1 DLL F16 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMTXT01 DLL F17 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBFO1 DLL F18 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMUTLO1 DLL F19 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMTXT01 DLL F20 WINDOWS SYSTEM QMGUP01 DLL F21 WINDOWS SYSTEM DP _ DISP DLL F22 WINDOWS SYSTEM DP_DITHR 16 F23 WINDOWS SYSTEM DP DITHR 256 F24 WINDOWS SYSTEM DP_PREV EXE F25 WINDOWS SYSTEM DP_ SPIN DLL F26 WINDOWS SYSTEM DPAL DRV F27 WINDOWS SYSTEM DPAL HLP F28 WINDOWS SYSTEM TKCENT DLL F29 WINDOWS SYSTEM TKSCSI DLL F30 WINDOWS SYSTEM PSPOOLER EXE 5 45 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files UNINST INI File Contents Continued F31 WINDOWS TWAIN DLL F32 WINDOWS SYSTEM DP_DITHR 16 F33 WINDOWS SYSTEM DP_DITHR 256 F34 WINDOWS SYSTEM TX2000 DRV F35 WINDOWS SYSTEM TX200
93. IPRO 0x0010 REM 0x8022 PIXTE 0x0040 CP 0x0040 JW 0x42080 TME 0x0100 VB 0x0200 WIN2WRS 0x1210 PACKRAT 0x0800 VISION 0x0040 MCOURITER 0x0800 _BNOTES 0x24000 MILES V3 0x 1000 PM4 0x2000 DESIGNER 0x2000 PLANNER 0x2000 DRAW 0x2000 WINSIM 0x2000 CHARISMA 0x2000 PR2 0x2000 PLUS 0x1000 ED 0x00010000 APORIA 0x0100 EXCEL 0x1000 GUIDE 0x 1000 NETSET2 0x0100 W4GL 0x4000 W4GLR 0x4000 TURBOTAX 0x00080000 Microsoft Word 2 0 HPDSKJET 1 fonts Arial TrueType ARIAL FOT Arial Bold TrueType ARIALBD FOT Arial Bold Italic TrueType ARIALBI FOT Arial Italic TrueType ARIALI FOT Courier New TrueType COUR FOT Courier New Bold TrueType COURBD FOT Courier New Italic TrueType COURI FOT Times New Roman TrueType TIMES FOT Times New Roman Bold TrueType TIMESBD FOT 5 48 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual WIN INI File Contents Continued Times New Roman Bold Italic TrueType TIMESBI FOT Times New Roman Italic TrueType TIMESI FOT Courier New Bold Italic TrueType COURBI FOT WingDings TrueType WINGDING FOT MS Sans Serif 8 10 12 14 18 24 VGA res SSERIFE FON Courier 10 12 15 VGA res gt COURE FON MS Serif 8 10 12 14 18 24 VGA res SERIFE FON Symbol 8 10 12 14 18 24 VGA res S YMBOLE FON Roman Plotter ROMAN FON Script Plotter SCRIPT FON Modern Plotter MODERN FON Small Fonts VGA res SMALLE FON Symbol TrueType S YMBOL FOT embedding SoundRec Sound Sound SoundRec exe picture Package Pac
94. Installing the Software below Installing the Software on the NCR 3333 System 1 Ifnecessary format the hard disk and install DOS as described on page 2 74 2 Install or configure the following software as appropriate for the system Installation or Config Software Instructions Install Windows Page 2 76 Mouse driver Close Up 2 78 Crystal Reports FastBack PLUS Cardinal SnapPlus Windows driver 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet configuration 2 105 Bar code fonts 2 106 7 2 107 ESMS INI and AOI INI for multiple area of 2 112 interest scanning 2 108 2 63 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installation or Config Software Instructions SQLBase isolation level settings 2 108 Oracle DLL file names 2 109 PowerSCSI for tape drives 2 111 PVC printer software 2 118 Software Installation HP Vectra VL2 4 50 After setting up the input and output devices and connecting the cables use the following steps to install the software on the HP Vectra VL2 4 50 computer 1 Power up the computer 2 Delete the Windows directory from the hard drive by typing deltree c windows and confirming your action 3 Install Windows as described on page 2 76 4 Reboot the system so changes take effect 5 Edit AUTOEXEC BAT to change the line C WINDOWS SMARTDRV EXE to C DOS SMARTDRYV X 6 Add the following two lines to the 386Enh section of SYSTEM INI in the C WINDOWS directory CO
95. L FOT OEMSETUP INF V100015_ TTF COMPOBJ DLL MOUSE DRV TIMES FOT SETUP INF V100016_ TTF CTL3D DLL NETWARE DRV TIMESBD FOT V100017_ TTF DDEML DLL SOUND DRV TIMESBI FOT VGALOGO LGO V100018 TTF DP_DISP DLL SYSTEM DRV TIMESI FOT V100019_ TTF DP_SPIN DLL TIMER DRV V100001_ FOT QECR LIC V100020_ TTF FINSTALL DLL TX2000 DRV V100002_ FOT V100021 TTF HPPCLSE1 DLL VGA DRV V100003_ FOT WINOA386 MOD V100022 TTF HPPCLSE2 DLL VGA443 DRV V100004_ FOT WINOLDAP MOD V100023_ TTF HPPCLSE3 DLL V100005_ FOT V100024 TTF HPPCLSE4 DLL DOSPORTS EXE V100006_ FOT IPX OBJ V100025_ TTF LZEXPAND DLL DOSX EXE V100007_ FOT V100026 TTF MMSYSTEM DLL DP PREV EXE V100008_ FOT WIN386 PS2 V100027_ TTF OLE2 DLL DSWAP EXE V100009_ FOT V100028 TTF OLE2CONV DLL GDIEXE V100010_ FOT OLE2 REG V100029_ TTF OLE2DISP DLL KRNL286 EXE V100011_ FOT SETUP REG WINGDING TTF OLE2NLS DLL KRNL386 EXE V100012_ FOT 5 14 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files AUTOEXEC BAT STARTNET BAT CONFIG SYS AUTOEXEC BAT AUTOEXEC BAT is located in the root directory of C drive C AUTOEXEC BAT File Contents LH C DOS SMARTDRV EXE X ECHO OFF PROMPT p g SET MOUSE C MOUSE LH C DOS MOUSE EXE Q SET TEMP C DOS LH C DOS SHARE EXE L 500 F 5100 SET DPALETTE C DPALETTE DPALETTE CFG SET WSID 1 Configured for each workstation SET PATH C DOS C ID4K C ID4K SYS C WINDOWS C DPALETTE Configured for each workstation SET FASTBACK C FASTBACK Configu
96. LEFT RIGHT 4 OPTION gt gt OPERATE INIT OFF FRAME COLOR W MULTI AREA STD SWITCH SEL PICTURE MEMORY AUTO CHANGE OFF BUZZER ON COLOR CONVERT OFF INPUT VIDEO 5 CLEAR gt MEMORY CLEAR NO BACKUP CLEAR NO 7 I F INIT gt gt BAUD RATE PE ERROR SEL ON OFF ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUV WXYZ0123456789 S SP DEL gt INPUT VIDEO Figure 6 26 Correct TX 2000 Default Menu Settings 6 60 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 8 If any setting is incorrect change it as follows a Press the SUB MENU button until the arrow points to the setting to be changed b Press the SELECT or the SELECT button Figure 6 25 until the desired setting appears c Save the new setting and exit from the menus by pressing the DISPLAY button Figure 6 27 d Ifnecessary return to the main menu by pressing the MENU button 9 After verifying and correcting the settings as necessary press the DISPLAY button to exit from the menus Then press ESC on the computer keyboard and follow instructions on the screen to exit from the SNAPtest program 10 Remove the cable connecting the TX 2000 S VIDEO OUT jack to the Cardinal Snap Plus board and reconnect the ID 4000 video camera cable to the Cardinal Snap Plus board VIDEO IN jack 11 Start Windows and the ID 4000 application then print an image to verify correct TX 2000 operation DISPLAY button
97. M1FIFO 0 COM2FIFO 0 7 Reboot the system 8 In the Windows Program Manager delete the Applications group 9 Install Plug and Play by inserting the Plug and Play Diskette into drive A then using the Windows Run command to run a setup 10 Exit from Windows log into the C WINDOWS directory and start Windows setup by typing setup and pressing ENTER 11 Change the Computer setting to MS DOS System with APM then save the setup 2 64 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 12 Modify SYSTEM INI by adding the following lines POWER DRYV Powerstatus 0 13 Start Windows 12 Insert the Advanced Power Management Disk into drive A then use the Windows Run command to run a power anstapm exe US 13 Install SLEEP EXE in the Windows Startup group as follows a Open Windows Startup Group b Pull down the Program Manager File menu and select New c Select Program Item d Use the Browse button to select SLEEP EXE from the Windows directory e Choose OK to insert display SLEEP EXE in the Startup group f Close the Startup group and exit from Windows 14 If C CONFIG SYS does not contain the following line add it Device C DOS POWER exe ADV MAX 15 Reboot the system 16 Install the Colorado Trakker advanced software as follows a Insert the Colorado Trakker advanced software diskette in drive A and log onto drive A b Type a setup and press ENTER c Choose Colorado Trakker d Fro
98. NMORE BMP 4 24 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 7 Choose the Store button to display the Store dialog box Figure 4 28 8 To store the new values as the default settings values in effect whenever the Scanner Control Panel appears save the new values in the file CSSOOI CFG To store the new values as a unique configuration file for loading via the Retrieve button enter a file name and choose Save 9 Choose the Done button to return to the ID 4000 application File Hame Directories c windows tiwaintcs500 gt windows gt twain E gt cs500i Save File as Type Drives Config Fils CES e Bem a IDSVO06 BMP Figure 4 28 Store Dialog Box Description of Color Settings The Color Correction dialog box Figure 4 29 appears when you choose Color from the Scanner Control Panel advanced settings buttons Polaroid CS 500i Scanner Color Correction Saturation Reference ColorSet 2 IDSV004 BMP Figure 4 29 Color Correction Dialog Box 4 25 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Use this dialog box to boost saturation when colors in the scanned images consistently appear washed out or too intense or when certain colors are consistently distorted compared with the original image The six scroll bars in this dialog box can be adjusted individually but the six values are interrelated changes to an individual scroll bar will
99. OK User ID system Password oracle Connect String t fuzzball test d Ifthe message Logon Successful does not appear recheck the configuration for proper setup e Disconnect by choosing Exit and waiting for the message Disconnect Successful 2 88 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Client Software Installation for Oracle on NetWare Server The client software pieces necessary for communicating with oracle on the Novell Netware Server are e Communications software IPX SPX and ODI e SQL Net SPX e 3 Disks for Oracle Client Software Oracle7 Server for Netware Version 7 0 Windows Install V3 0 8 3 7 Windows Required Support Files V7 0 12 1 0 Windows SQL Net SPX V1 1 1 5 1 Install the Oracle Installer by inserting the Oracle Windows Install diskette in drive A and running A SETUP EXE from the Windows Program Manager 2 Insert the Windows Required Support Files diskette in drive A click From then click Install 3 Insert the Windows SQL Net SPX diskette in drive A click From then click Install 4 Add the following line to the end of AUTOEXEC BAT SET PATH C ORAWIN BIN PATH 5 Exit from Windows then reboot Note Be sure you are connected to the Novell Network via ODI before you attempt to log into the Oracle database Client Software Installation for Informix on SCO UNIX Server The client software necessary for communicating with informix on the UNIX
100. Ooo0o00 qdwdvodAda HALS wHMOd OV Figure 2 40 Cabling Diagram ID 4000 with TX 2000 VY 300 Thermal Printer 2 54 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration SCSI Device Address Organization For the NCR system utilizing the 850M SCSI card the ID addressing is as follows Device CI 5000 Plus color film recorder 3 Spare CS 5001 color scanner Archive Viper tape drive 7 Reserved for Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI controller SCSI Disk Tape CI 5000 Plus and CS 5001 Cabling Note You MUST terminate at both ends of the SCSI line and ONLY the ends Example The ID 4000 computer has an internal SCSI hard disk and a tape unit Both are driven from the same SCSI board on the same cable The hard drive is at the end of the cable and the tape drive 1s in the center of the cable In this case the terminating resistors in the tape drive must be removed and the resistors in the hard drive must be installed left in place If a SCSI device is attached to the rear panel external connector the terminating resistors on the SCSI card must be removed If no external SCSI device is installed the terminating resistors on the SCSI board must be left installed In the case of an optical drive connected to the SCSI board rear panel connector the resistors on the SCSI card would be removed and the resistors inside the optical drive would be installed left in place Warning Turn off ALL power both to compute
101. PP HLP ID4BC HLP ID4CAB HLP ID4CDP HLP ID4DSD HLP ID4LE HLP ADJUST INI BTNLIST INI CARDINAL INI CI5000 INI CSSOOLINI DWIN INI ESMS INI FDSCSLINI 5 10 SVS Z SWU Z THERMAL Z VIDEO Z VSU Z VTOOLS Z WS Z W_CI5000 Z W_CS5001L Z W_DBO Z W DB1 Z W DB2 Z W QE Z W QLIB Z W_VY300 Z IMAGE INI INFORITE INI LBTEMP INI THERMAL INI TWIN INI VIDEO INI AOLINI AUDIT LOG ERROR LOG HW LST ESMSINT TXT ID4000 TXT INTCDP TXT REPRTINT TXT TOOLSINT TXT README WS Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files C ID4K CDP BMAPS BCH BMP BCV BMP LOGO2 BMP SNAKE2 BMP C ID4K CDP LOGOS LOGO2 BMP AXXLOGO PO00 NEW2 P00 GREATLOG P00 NEW3 P00 NEW P00 TRIO PO0 C ID4K CDP PORTS ADJUST BMP GMANG H BMP HHAT S BMP MANG_V BMP GHHAT H BMP GMANG S BMP HHAT V BMP GHHAT S BMP GMANG V BMP MANG H BMP GHHAT V BMP HHAT H BMP MANG _S BMP C ID4K CDP SIG KIRKSIG BMP C D4K CLRTABLE CIS5K CLR DEFAULT CLR VY300 CLR C ID4K CUSTOMER TOG INI C ID4K CUSTOMER APP LBDATA INI DAYPASS LDF AXXOSS ODF MEETING ODF SAMPLE INI DOSSIER LDF DAYPASS ODF GREAT LDF DOSSIER ODF SAMPLE SCR AXXOSS LDF MEETING LDF GREAT ODF C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIR SAVEQRY DAT IDLK ENC TOG INI EMPLOY EE MDX IDUA ENC VISIT MDX EMPLOY EE DBF VISIT DBF C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIR IMG 000 TIF Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual C ID4K SYS ADJIMG DLL HAILOP DLL IMAGE
102. Pont Install aioe esse cndee cece sated na dacntie tetera tetateutiane 2 106 ID 4000 Core Installation cece cceecccceeseceeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeees 2 107 Setting Date and Time Formats ccccccecccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 2 108 Setting SQLBase Isolation Levels coreia nr 2 108 Optimizing DOS and Windows ccccseecceeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 2 109 Renaming Oracle Dib Males raae a e T 2 110 Loading PowerSCSI for Tape Drives ccccceccccceeeeeeeeeees 2 111 Installing Adaptec EZ SCSI Lite Software eee 2 111 Setting Up Multiple Area of Interest Scanning 0 2 112 Specifying Film Type for the CI 5000 Plus ee 2 118 DataCard Black and White PVC Printer Software Setup 2 119 DataCard ImageCard II Printer Driver Installation 2 119 Fargo Printer Driver Installation cceccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 120 System C ali AMON cc drossianesaansantesuiaercaceusebondvaceagaivieiaviaeasares 2 120 Punciiona k CI Kaase sushiotiascactatuneianu canes urohoanannteens 2 121 Database Screen Designer Test lt s 2asccesconnssvatagnrdsossedenoseeneseacs 2 121 Badoe Desiome re Shokan E E reac 2 122 Loo iniand Data Bitty 1 CS Urcicicsitectercentn sacar E 2 123 Portrait and Signature Capture Test cecccccseeccceeeceeeaeeees 2 124 2 3 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 2 4 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Section 2
103. Print head voltage for YMC printing too high Faulty card stock Card registration offset too low Excessive print head offset 6 29 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Increase the head prep offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Increase the print head offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Verify that the ribbon panel length is between 3800 and 4000 Reduce the print head voltage See ImageCard II Printer Setting Print Head Voltage on page 6 71 Use card stock from a different lot Increase the card registration offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Decrease the print head offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 TA Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ImageCard II Color PVC Printer Problems Continued Problem Printing ribbon breaks along a sharp edge card prints but faintly colors are incorrect Overlay improperly applied but printing is correct Ribbon or overlay breaks during operation Overlay breaks Card stops before printing ejects blank Jam LED blinks Possible Cause Card registration offset too high Incorrect print head offset Print head offset too high Head prep offset too high Card registration offset too low Head prep offset too high Card registration offs
104. STALL INT INTEGER INTO iS iSOLATION JOURNAL KEY LABEL LAST LEFT LIKE LIMIT LINESIZE LINESPACE LINEWRAP LIST LM LOAD LOADBUFFER LOADVERSION LOCAL LOCALLY LOG LOGBACKUP LOGFILEPREALLOC LOGFILESIZE LOGS LONG LONGINFERS LONGLENGTH LONGOFFSET MAX MICROSECOND MICROSECONDS MIN MINUTE MINUTES MODIFY MONTH MONTHS NEW NEWDB NEWPAGE NEXTLOG NO NODE NOPREBUILD NOT NULL NULLS NUMBER OF OFF ON OPTIMIZEDBULK OPTION OR ORDER OUTMESSAGE OVER PAGE PAGESIZE PARTITIONS PASSWORD PAUSE PCTFREE PERFORM PICTURE PLANONLY POST PRECISION PREPARE PRESERVECONTEXT PRIMARY PRINT PRINTLEVEL PUBLIC READONLY READONLYDATABASE REAL RECOVERY REFERENCES REFINTCHECK RELEASE REMARK RENAME REORGANIZE REPORT RESOURCE RESTORE RESTRICT RESTRICTION RETRIEVE REVOKE RIGHT RM ROLLBACK ROLLFORWARD ROWCOUNT ROWID ROWS RUN SAVE SAVEPOINT SCREEN SCROLL SCROLLROW SECOND SECONDS SELECT SELECTLISTNAME SERVER SET SHOW SIZE SMALLINT SNAPSHOT SOL SOLBASE SORTSPACE SPACE SPANLIMIT SPOOL STATISTICS STOGROUP STORE SUBTITLE sum SYNONYM A 11 Appendix SYSDATE SYSDATETIME SYSTEM SYSTIME SYSTIMEZONE TABLE TCOUNT TIME TIMEOUT TIMEPICTURE TIMESTAMP TIMESTAMP TIMEZONE TITLE TM TO TPONE TTITLE UNDO UNION UNIQUE UNLOAD UPDATE USE USER USERERROR USING VALUES VARCHAR VERSION VIEW WAIT WHERE WIDTH WITH WKS WORK WRAP YEAR
105. STORESS on the Server is already running Note You can also add the program icon to the Informix group by clicking File New Program Item C INFORMIX BIN ILOGIN EXE c Wait for the Dialog box with the Customer Names to verify correct operation If the dialog box does not appear review the configuration for errors Informix Error Messages 9 If the error message 932 Cannot find services file or sqlexec entry not found appears follow these steps 1 Make sure PCTCP environment points to PCTCP directory 2 91 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 2 Make sure the Informix Listener Daemon and its port are listed in the services file See the beginning of UNIX TCP IP Client Side Software Setup on page 2 100 3 After completing steps and 2 reboot restart Windows and try again SQL LAN Novell DataBase Software Installation Client Server Model Client server technology is a form of distributed processing where computing activities are shared among cooperating networked computers An application is functionally split into two or more programs which execute on different computers and communicate with each other by passing messages across the network The client programs run on users PCs Server programs run on more powerful computers The client sends requests to a server program that is listening The server program receives the requests processes them then sen
106. Server is e Communications software PC TCP o I Net PC To install the communication software refer to UNIX TCP IP Client Side Software Setup on page 2 100 2 89 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Note After installing the communications software make sure that the IP address and host name with the domain name is in the host s file as well as the host s file on the server On the SCO UNIX server the host s file is in the ETC directory Otherwise Informix may not run properly Also make sure that the services file on the client has an Informix entry with the same port number as the Informix Listener Daemon on the UNIX server In the services file the line to add or verify is sqlexec 1540 tcp informix Entries in the services file are usually placed in ascending order of port number In this case the port number is 1540 Before installing I Net PC reboot the system to eliminate the effects of any earlier software installation and start Windows Then load the communications software to connect to the UNIX server from DOS as follows 1 Insert the I Net PC diskette into drive A then run A SETUP from the Windows Program Manager 2 Click OK to continue in the Welcome dialog box 3 Click OK to acknowledge requirements in the System Requirements dialog box 4 Enter the Serial Number and the Key from the Informix diskette in the Serial Number and Key dialog box and
107. Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Diagnosing BOCA Board Port Conflicts Use the steps below to identify BOCA board port conflicts 1 Turn on the computer and wait for the DOS prompt to appear If you are running Windows or another program close it to display the DOS prompt 2 Type msd and press ENTER then wait until the MSD main menu Figure 6 4 appears 3 Select LPT Ports to display the parallel port settings Figure 6 5 File Utilities Help Computer i Disk Drives A B C Memory 640K 23552K Ext LPT Ports 1 1024K XMS Video i COM Ports 1 Network i No Network IRQ Status OS Version MS DOS Version 6 20 TSR Programs Mouse i Not Detected 8 20 Device Drivers Other Adapters Press ALT for menu or press highlighted letter or F3 to quit MSD MSD4 BMP Figure 6 4 MSD Main Menu LPT Ports Port On Paper I O Tine Address Line Error Out LPT1 Yes No LPT2 O3BCH Yes No LPT3 O3BCH Yes No 003 PCX Figure 6 5 Parallel LPT Port Settings 6 40 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 4 Verify that no parallel port conflicts exist and that each port has a unique address If any conflicts exist make a note of them before continuing 5 Press ESC or ENTER to return to the MSD main menu then select COM Ports to display the serial port settings Figure 6 6 6 Verify that no seria
108. System Configuration Configuration Sequence The ID 4000 system configuration sequence is generally as follows Step Page 1 Prepare the installation site 2 10 2 Configure the ID 4000 computer 2 12 3 Configure and install the computer drives and 2 21 boards 4 Unpack and set up the input and output devices 2 34 5 Connect the cables 2 51 6 Install the software 2 61 7 Calibrate the system 2 120 8 Perform the functional test 2 121 Some installations may also require you to use the VAR Application Builder to create the D 4000 application and produce installation diskettes prior to the installation process The Application Setup section of this manual provides detailed instructions for these installations 2 5 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration ID 4000 Hardware and Software Component Summary ID 4000 Hardware PC One of the following e NCR System 3333 Model 1020 486 33 e HP Vectra Model VL2 4 50 e CSS Labs Preferred 462 Model 486 ESP M e AT amp T Globalyst 525 e IBM ValuePoint System 6384 e IBM ValuePoint 466 DX2 Dp e Digital DECpc LPx PC7 66 RAM Two 4MB SIMM modules 8 MB total 16 MB RAM Storage e 120 520 or 1260 MB IDE Hard Drive 3 5 1 44 MB Floppy Drive or 3 5 5 25 1 44 MB 1 2 MB Floppy Drive Connor Streaming Tape 250 or 525 Drive Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI board Polaroid Support Board Cardinal SnapPlus Frame grabber board Boca IO AT Board 2 Serial 1 Pa
109. T FILMPGRF FLM TYPE669 FLM SASGRAPH FPL FILMPPAN FLM TYPE691 FLM ZENOALL FPL CFGWEDGE CAM HCPOLA FLM HDEF100 FLM U05013PS FNT DP2000 HLP DPALETTE CFG SO100 FLM U05016PS FNT 1SO200 FLM U05033PS FNT READ ME2 SYS ERR DAT PC100 FLM U05036PS FNT SYS HELP DAT POLABLUE FLM U06013PS FNT RUN OVL SYS MSG DAT POLACHRM FLM U06016PS FNT IBM RUN OVL PRCHROME FLM U06033PS FNT CFGMERGE EXE PROI00D FLM U06036PS FNT FINDDP EXE TY PE331 FLM IMGPRNT EXE TY PE339 FLM DEFAULT FPL SETCFGPT EXE TYPE554 FLM DRHELVCR FPL 5 9 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual C D4000 C ID4K CID4K DIR SAMPLE DIR SID4K DIR VID4K DIR PATHRM DLL IDUA ENC SETUP EXE UNWININLEXE TOG IN SETUP INF BUTTONS BMP DPALETTE CFG HORZ CFG HORZ CS CFG SQR CFG SQR_CS CFG VERT CFG VERT_CS CFG CI5000 DAT CS5001 DAT SAVEQRY DAT THERMAL DAT VIDEO DAT CI5000 DEF THERMAL DEF SYSSETUP DOC TOG INI UNINST INI SETUP INS SETUP LGO INS0762 LIB SPACE LST CTOOLS XZ ASVS Z C C15000 Z CAB Z APW ENC IDUA ENC A REPORT EXE ADJUST EXE ASVS EXE BC EXE CAB EXE CDP EXE DEVEDIT EXE DIECUT EXE E REPORT EXE INSTALL EXE LEDIT EXE LOGOEDIT EXE NEWC SL EXE SE EXE SIBS EXE STATS EXE SVS EXE Section 5 Directories and Files CARDINAL Z CDP Z C15000 Z CS 5001 Z DEVEDIT Z DIALOGS Z DIECUT Z DSD Z FLSAMPLE Z IMAGE Z INFORITE Z QE Z SAMPINST Z SIBS Z SOFTWARE Z SUPPORT Z SWIPE EXE SWU EXE VSU EXE AWSMAIN HLP ID4A
110. TER 6 71 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 6 Type anew offset value as recommended in the symptom tables and press ENTER 7 Press ESC to escape from the diagnostics program and answer Y to the prompt Save in EEPROM 8 Remove the diskette from A drive 9 Print a card to verify that setting the offset has corrected the problem ImageCard II Printer Seating the Print Head Use this procedure to seat the ImageCard II print head when the symptom tables indicate that seating is necessary 1 Exit from Windows to the DOS prompt 2 Insert the ImageCard II printer diagnostic diskette into drive A and log onto drive A 3 Type ii and press ENTER to display the diagnostic main menu 4 Select 2 Diagnostics then select Check Print Steps 5 Select Feed a Card and press the Insertion Slide to pick a card 6 Select Register Card then manually push the card all the way under the print head 7 Lower the print head onto the card by selecting Home Print Head then Print Head Prep Position then Print Head Down 8 Using your two index fingers press down on the print head s aluminum heat sink While pressing with both fingers attempt to rock the head side to side to make sure it is seated 9 Raise the print head by selecting Print Head Up the Home Print Head 10 Remove the card by selecting Eject Card 11 Press ESC to exit from the diagnostic program 12 Print
111. TOG INI in the LAN lock file directory and restore it after the application installation is complete When you choose to copy bitmaps with the Copy Application function the message Path Not Found may appear when you are installing the application on a satellite system To correct the problem change Bitmap in the CONFIG INI bitmap section to BMAPS You can also avoid the problem by manually copying the bitmaps in the ID4K CDP BMAPS directory to the satellite system Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Clearing Memory After Testing SQLBase Systems After testing the SQLBase database on a system exit from Windows before using a non SQLBase database SQLBase loads many drivers TSRs and DLLs into memory Closing the SQLBase icon on the bottom of the Program Manager screen does not clear them If SQLBase is not purged properly a message stating that SQLBase drivers cannot be accessed may appear when using other databases This is most likely to occur with dBase 3 16 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Contents amp alibPa On SEG UCINC Cau etre ana sceeee cadena 4 3 Cahbratine the Input Unit eerie ih 4 5 Setting Up for Calibration cc ccccceeecceeeeeeseceeeeeseeeens 4 5 Calibrating the Live Image noniine niinniin 4 8 Focusing the Camera oeseiscccsisvediesiavevieoisiaeintiatectewate Mandy 4 9 Calibrating
112. WINDOWS SYSTEM QEINF03 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEINF03 dll Q E Oracle7 Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEOR703 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEOR703 dll Q E TextFile Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QETXT03 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QETXT03 dll PROGMAN INI PROGMAN INI File Contents Settings Window 68 48 580 384 1 5 40 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files display drv VGA443 DRV Order 2345617 Groups Group1 C WINDOWS MAIN GRP Group2 C WINDOWS ACCESSOR GRP Group3 C WINDOWS GAMES GRP Group4 C WINDOWS STARTUP GRP Group5 C WINDOWS APPLICAT GRP Group6 C MOUSE MOUSE GRP Group7 C WINDOWS POLAROID GRP QETXT INI QETXT INI File Contents Defined Tables AUDIT LOG AUDIT ERROR LOG ERROR LOG AUDIT FILE AUDIT LOG FLN 0 TT Comma FIELD1 FIELD_1 DATE 10 0 10 0 m d yy FIELD2 FIELD_2 VARCHAR 8 0 8 0 FIELD3 FIELD_3 VARCHAR 61 0 61 0 ERROR LOG FILE ERROR LOG FLN 0 TT Comma FIELD1 FIELD_1 DATE 10 0 10 0 m d yy FIELD2 FIELD_2 VARCHAR 10 0 10 0 FIELD3 FIELD_3 NUMERIC 4 0 4 0 FIELD4 FIELD_4 NUMERIC 5 0 5 0 FIELDS FIELD_5 NUMERIC 1 0 1 0 FIELD6 FIELD_6 NUMERIC 1 0 1 0 FIELD7 FIELD_7 NUMERIC 1 0 1 0 FIELD8 FIELD_8 VARCHAR 82 0 82 0 QEX INI QEX INI File Contents SQLCONNECT dBASEFile QEDBF TextFile QETXT SQLBase QEGUP QEDBF IndexExtension NDX MDX Compatibility ANSI CharSet ANSI Locking Record Extension DBF QET
113. XE X ECHO OFF PROMPT p g SET MOUSE C MOUSE C DOS MOUSE EXE Q SET TEMP C DOS C DOS SHARE EXE L 500 F 5100 SET DPALETTE C DPALETTE DPALETTE CFG SET WSID 1 2 SET PATH C DOS C ID4K C ID4K SYS C WINDOWS 2 SET FASTBACK C FASTBACK SET FBP _USER ID 4000 call STARTNET BAT 2 WIN 3 Note These lines are custom configured for each workstation 4 Edit the SYSTEM INI file 386enh section as follows a Edit the 32BitDiskAccess and DMABufferSize lines to match the following 32BitDisk Access ON DM ABuffer Size 128 Note Ifthe system has a 130MB IDE hard drive set 32BitDiskAccess to OFF In addition note that 32 bit disk access may not work for some systems and a trial and error approach may be necessary When it does work performance improves substantially b Remove all EMMEXCLUDE entries Renaming Oracle DLL Files A supplemental diskette is supplied for Oracle systems Use this diskette to load two files into WINDOWS SYSTEM ORA7WIN DLL and COREWIN DLL Files of the same names in the ORAWIN BIN directory must be renamed to ORA7WIN BAK and COREWIN BAK to prevent connection errors 2 110 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Loading PowerSCSI for Tape Drives If the ID 4000 system has a tape drive load PowerSCSI as follows before attempting to access the tape drive 1 Insert the PowerSCSI diskette for DOS Windows and NetWare 386 into drive A 2 Use the
114. XT CharSet ANSI Delimiter FieldSizing 0 FieldGuessing 0 HeaderLine 0 Extension TXT 5 41 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual QEX INI File Contents Continued Q E NoLogon dBASEFile TextFile Maximized 1 AsciiOem 0 QEMCONNECT dBASEFile QEDBF SQLBase QEGUP ParadoxFile QEPDX TextFile QETXT DB2 QEDB2 SQLServer QESS Oracle QEORA ExcelFile QEXLS NetWareSQL QEXQL Btrieve QEBTR XDB QEXDB INGRES QEING DatabaseManager QEDBM Tandem QETDM Informix QEINF Progress QEPRO Oracle7 QEOR7 MDI QEMDI Q EDEF NoLogon dBASFEFile ParadoxFile TextFile ExcelFile Btrieve Maximized 0 AsciiOem 0 QEPDX Extension DB QESS Cancel 0 Netapi 1 CharSet ANSI QEORA CharSet ANSI QEXLS FieldSizing 0 FieldGuessing 0 Extension XLS QEBTR Extension DTA Charset ANSI SYSTEM INI SYSTEM INI is located in the C WINDOWS directory SYSTEM INI File Contents boot shell progman exe mouse drv C Mouse mouse drv network drv language dll sound drv mmsound drv comm drv comm drv keyboard drv keyboard drv system drv system drv 386grabber V7VGA 3GR oemfonts fon vgaoem fon 5 42 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual SYSTEM INI File Contents Continued 286grabber VGACOLRX GR2 fixedfon fon vegafix fon fonts fon vgasys fon display drv VGA443 DRV drivers mmsystem dll keyboard subtype type 4 keyboard dll oemansi bin boot description keyboard typ Enhanced 1
115. a Wd hie a ra ac eee pee ea stalling al ld alae lana ie 2 6 TAO OOS OIC Wy ae ssc ces Acre asada hse nee 2 6 ID 4000 Product Tiers ccc ccccccseeccccsceceeeeceeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeeeaees 2 7 Installation Software Tools and Equipment eee 2 9 Tools and Equipment ccccccceccccesccceseceeeeceeaeeceseeceeaeceseeceaees 2 9 DOE WARG eg hiea beat onacanctentaec A 2 9 IAA AN 5 5 pea gen ae eae ea aac ate Verna mee ae este cd 2 9 Site Preparation and Layout ecccccccccseecceeeeseceeeeseeeaenees 2 10 Poysicat Layout oenen ete pa ee ae AE tte hehe 2 10 Eventing Condi Ons nee a E E a eed 2 11 Environmental Conditions ccccceesceccseeeeeceeesseceeseeseeeeaaeneees 2 11 Computer Conficuration ss ias tein sesh a veal am tease 2 12 NCR 3333 Configuration xcc6cce ssh cu ato dsainceeeidavtatadasucesdtddesieddatwnen 2 12 HP Vectra VL2 4 50 Configuration cccccceccccsescceeeeseeeaeeees 2 14 CSS Preferred 462 486 ESP M Configuration cccceeeee 2 19 AT amp T Globalyst 525 Configuration cccccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 IBM ValuePoint Model 6482 Configuration ccceceeeeeeees 2 23 Drive and Board Configuration ccccccccsecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeens 2 25 Support Board Configuration cccccccccseeccccesceceeeeseeeeeeeeeaees 2 25 Cardinal Snap Plus Board Configuration ccccccccseeeeeeeeeees 2 26 Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI Card Configuration 2 2
116. a portrait print a sample badge and evaluate the quality of the printed portrait If the portrait color or brightness is not satisfactory but the remainder of the badge 1s satisfactory see Adjusting the Appearance of Printed Portraits in Section 3 of this manual 12 Repackage the camera being replaced for return shipment IN f H TARRE w Figure 7 4 Strobe Power Dial 7 6 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the Computer Note Before servicing the computer make sure there is no diskette in the floppy drive it could be lost during service Caution For safety always keep the computer in the horizontal desktop position during service Electrostatic Discharge Warning Many assemblies in this computer use components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD To avoid damage use these electrostatic discharge precautions Where possible use ESD wrist straps when servicing sensitive areas of the computer Always work in a static free area Before handling the assemblies discharge yourself by touching a metal water pipe or something else with a good connection to ground As much as possible handle boards only by the edges Do not touch components unless it is absolutely necessary Place assemblies on an anti static padded surface when they are removed from the computer Always keep boards in their protective wrapping when they are not insta
117. ad Possible Cause Non uniform backdrop Backdrop does not fill entire image area Autocentering threshold setting too low Autocentering threshold setting too high Autocentering top setting too low Subject seated too low Autocentering top setting too high 6 8 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Change to a uniform color backdrop Reposition backdrop or re aim camera Use larger backdrop Increase AutoCenterThreshold value in CARDINAL INI Nominal value is 3 Decrease AutoCenterThreshold value in CARDINAL INI Nominal value is 3 Increase AutoCenterExtraTop value in CARDINAL INI Nominal value is 30 Raise subject s chair or re aim camera Reposition backdrop as needed to fill entire image area Increase AutoCenterExtraTop value in CARDINAL INI Nominal value is 30 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Problem Scanner does not power up when power switch turned on Scanner powers up but does not operate Possible Cause No power at AC outlet Faulty line cord Main fuse or power fuse burned out Faulty power switch Power supply out of adjustment Faulty power supply Incorrectly set SCSI ID Computer does not recognize scanner because of SCSI problem 6 9 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check outlet and repair if necessary Check for power at scanner end of
118. agnostics software or the optional facsimile software see Optional Software Modules on page 1 15 With the fax modem and the remote diagnostics software the ID 4000 can be diagnosed updated with new software and operated via telephone line by Polaroid technicians With the fax modem and the facsimile software the ID 4000 can transmit badge images and dossiers by telephone directly to standard facsimile machines It can also receive facsimiles from standard fax machines Figure 1 14 Fax Modem Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Badge finishing equipment The badge finishing devices below trim and encapsulate badges for durability and tamper resistance This equipment or its equivalent must be used to finish badges printed with the Polaroid color film recorder or with any of the color thermal printers available with the ID 4000 Diecutter The diecutter Figure 1 15 trims the badge image printed by the color film recorder or color thermal printer to the precise size required for laminating Four versions are available and the diecutter supplied with the system depends on the size of the badges and the number printed on each sheet of film or thermal paper Badges per Sheet EE 1 7 8 x 3 1 8 1 7 8 x 3 1 8 Laminator The laminator Figure 1 16 uses precise heat and pressure to seal the diecut badge image inside a transparent security pouch Figure 1 16
119. alibration on page 4 5 before starting this procedure l Start the live image calibration by clicking on the Auto Live Calibrate button in the Calibrate dialog box 2 Wait for the message Calibration Completed to appear 3 Choose OK to return to the Calibrate dialog box 4 8 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 4 If you wish to fine tune the appearance of the live image perform the following steps before going to step 5 a Make sure the Live Settings box is checked b Adjust the sliders to achieve the desired brightness B contrast C hue H saturation S and for red r green g and blue b settings 5 Proceed to the following section Focusing the Camera Focusing the Camera After calibrating the live image as described in the previous section perform the steps below to focus the camera 1 Adjust the outer focus ring on the camer lens to obtain the sharpest focus 2 Ifthe focus 1s acceptable discontinue this procedure and go to Calibrating the Captured Image in the next section If focus is not acceptable go to step 3 3 Set the outer focus ring to its center position 4 Loosen the Lock screw Figure 4 9 to release the Focus screw 5 Adjust the Focus screw Figure 4 9 to obtain the sharpest focus 6 Tighten the lockdown screw After focusing the camera proceed to Calibrating the Captured Image in the next section CAM_FOC PCX Figur
120. alibration and Adjustment section of this manual Adjust the color balance or brightness of printed portraits according to the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual See Frozen portrait too dark or Frozen portrait too light on page 6 7 See One or more colors missing from scanned image on page 6 15 or Washed out image with no detail on page 6 17 Calibrate the film recorder with ImagePrint according to the Calibration and Adjustment section Calibrate the film recorder with ImagePrint according to the Calibration and Adjustment section Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Badge Printing Quality Problems Continued Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Signature printed on badge Thickness of signature Increase or decrease is too dark or too light captured by tablet is outof SIGNATURETHICK adjustment setting in INFORITE INI lightest 1 darkest 4 Signature Tablet Problems Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Red or green LEDs do not Not connected to AC power Verify that the tablet power light transformer is connected to AC power Faulty power transformer Replace power transformer Fails to capture signature Cable not connected to Verify cable connections serial port tighten if necessary Connected to wrong serial Verify that INFORITE INI port has correct port assignment and that cable is connected to the assigned port Signature
121. alled in the ID 4000 computer as follows 1 Unpack the Adaptec SCSI board and disable its BIOS and floppy drive controller by setting the board switches as follows Adaptec Switch Setting Description Termination installed off I O port 330 333h 4 off 5 on Floppy disabled od Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 2 Install the board in a 16 bit ISA slot After installing the Adaptec board set up and connect the Nisca printer as described on page 2 36 Then install the Adaptec SCSI software provided with the Adaptec board as described on page 2 111 Connor 2150 2250 Tape Drive Configuration The tape drive standard configuration is set up in conjunction with an IDE hard drive Install the terminating resistors and plug the drive into the end of the SCSI cable The factory configuration has only two jumpers Three additional jumpers not provided must be added to achieve the proper configuration shown in Figure 2 19 Note Ifthe tape drive is used with a SCSI hard drive the terminating resistors must be removed and the tape drive should be in the middle connector of the SCSI cable The terminating resistors are in SIPP form and are located between the 50 pin SCSI connector and the circuit board at the rear of the drive The tape drive SCSI ID should be set to 6 Figure 2 19 Connor Tape Drive Jumper Settings 2 32 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration
122. alog box then return to step 4 Choose the OK button to accept the calibration value then wait for Calibration Completed to appear The system requires several seconds to calibrate itself for color brightness and contrast The electronic flash fires several times during the process Choose the OK button to return to the Calibration dialog box If you wish to fine tune the appearance of the captured image perform the following steps before going to step 10 a Make sure the Live Settings box is not checked b Adjust the sliders to achieve the desired brightness B contrast C hue H saturation S and for red r green g and blue b settings To discontinue calibration and return to the System Management window choose the OK button and choose Yes when the message This will replace current calibration Continue appears Then remove the calibration target from the backdrop and store it where it will not be marred or damaged CAM_POT EPS Figure 4 11 Frozen Image F Adjustment on Camera Base Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Camera Calibration Setup Values The camera Calibrate dialog box contains a Setup button that provides access to the Camera Calibration Setup dialog box For normal installations the values in this setup dialog box should not be changed For proper camera calibration the values should be set as follows Auto Centering Checked if sys
123. anently setting the printer to turn on whenever it is connected to AC power To execute this setup command manually turn on the TX 2000 printer by pressing the Operate button Figure 2 23 Then print one image using the Windows printer driver Figure 2 23 TX 2000 Operate Button Nisca PVC Printer Setup Use the following procedure to set up and connect the Nisca PVC printer to the ID 4000 Note Before starting this procedure configure and install the Adaptec SCSI board as described on page 2 31 The Nisca printer requires the Adaptec board 1 Follow installation instructions in the Nisca printer User s Manual The Nisca printer s factory set SCSI ID setting 1s 4 2 Install the terminator on the printer s SCSI 2 connector 3 Use the SCSI cable to connect the printer s SCSI 1 connector to the Adaptec SCSI board in the computer After setting up and connecting the printer install the Adaptec SCSI software as described on page 2 111 2 36 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Input Unit Assembly and Setup 1 Connect the 9 pin D sub connector to the RGB Sync Video out connector Set the tint in middle and daylight indoor to daylight position 2 Connect DIN connector to video camera DC12V 3 Attach the connector bracket by screwing the camera mount bracket to the bottom of camera 4 Slide the connector cover in place and attach it with two screws Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24
124. appropriate hardware options Optional Software Modules File backup and restore Provides a fast simple method for creating backup copies of data and system files requires the tape drive described on page 1 11 Dossier printing Prints one or more complete records including portraits and other images on plain paper requires appropriate printer Text data export Exports selected fields from selected applicant text records to an ASCII text file for use by other systems or applications Text data import Imports applicant text data from other applications and systems into the D 4000 applicant database Text data and image export and import Exchanges text data and identification images with other ID 4000 stations Card history Maintains a separate database of all activities involving applicant records This database can be searched to retrieve records according to an activity or to retrieve all records for a particular applicant to determine the applicant s activity history Functional card encoding Prints bar codes on the face of the badge or on separate labels requires the bar code label printer described on page 1 10 Also encodes magnetic stripes incorporated in the badge laminating material requires a magnetic stripe encoder described on page 1 10 Image conversion Converts ID 4000 portraits signatures and other images to standard image file formats for use with other systems and applications Remote diagnostics Allows
125. are NO Install OS 2 Client Software NO Install Five User SQLBase Server for NetWare YES Install C Application Programming Software YES Install C Application Programming Examples YES May be set to NO for some installations 2 93 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 3 Press ENTER 4 Depending on your network configuration select a drive on which to install the SQL server software 5 Modify AUTOEXEC BAT and CONFIG SYS files Press ENTER and follow the instruction on the screen Select drive type and follow the instructions on the screen 6 Make a backup of SQL INI by copying it to SQLOLD INI 7 Modify the SQL INI which is located in the path defined in step 4 above In the SQL ini file there is a header defined as NetWare The following sections in NetWare need to be modified Modifications to DBNSERVR in NetWare Section Immediately following is the file structure as it appears on the screen Notes on how to modify this structure are below File Structure dbnservr This section is for the SQLBase NLM database server This is a NetWare Loadable Module NLM and is loaded on the NetWare file server You can specify which communication protocol s the server can use as well as which protocol s a database can use servername server sqlspx dbname demo sqlspx cache 2000 dbdir db sqlbase 2 94 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Modif
126. aserJet II 32 HP LaserJet 4 4M 32 DataCard ImageCard II v2 0 32 Monitor 32 Below this area will be added the custom systems and aplications General format is 9 9 SYSTEM Sys0 Name of Customer System Sysl Name of Customer System2 Name of Customer System LFDitectory Lock File Path Cust0 Name of Custom Application Custl Name of Custom Application2 END OF ESMS INI FILE FDSCSLINI FDSCSI INI is located in the C ID4K directory FDSCSLINI File Contents 386Enh device C WINDOWS SY STEM V9FCAMD 386 FDC950 DE00 5 IMAGE INI IMAGE INI is located in the C ID4K directory 5 36 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual IMAGE INI File Contents BackgroundRemoval For the following values 0 do not do 3 3x3 5 5x5 DoDilate 3 DoErode 0 For the following values 0 do not do o w indicates strength 1 10 DoSharpen 0 DoBlur 7 For the following values 0 do not do it 1 do it DolImageFill 1 INF ORITE INI INFORITE INI is located in the C D4K directory INFORITE INI File Contents Capture CommPort 1 Note these should be in a 2 1 ratio or distortion will occur SignatureWidth 400 SignatureHeight 200 SignatureThick 2 this value gives the signature gray level distribution should be greater than 0 the biger the number more light the signature SignatureGray 128 MOUSE INI MOUSE INI File Contents mouse MouseType PS2 MSD INI MSD INI F
127. ating a Formula To create a formula for calculation or comparison select Formula Field from the Insert menu Enter a name for the formula in the Insert Formula dialog box and enter the formula in the Formula Editor when it appears In the Formula Editor you can use fields operators and functions by selecting them from the scroll lists If necessary choose the Help button for detailed information about each function After creating a formula check the formula syntax with the Check button When the formula 1s complete select Accept and place the formula as if it were a database field Adding a Graphic You can add a graphic by selecting Insert Graphic then choosing the graphics file to be included Changing Sort Order To change the sort order select Record Sort Order from the Print menu Then choose the fields to be used for sorting the report data 8 6 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Changing the Sort and Grouping by Field To change the sort and group by field select Group Section from the Edit menu From the list that appears select the group section of interest Then select a new trigger field from the Edit Group Section dialog box when it appears Using Only Specific Records To limit the report to specific records for example the records of Manufacturing Dept employees with more than 10 years of service click on the first field to be used for selecting records in this case the Dep
128. authorized repair technicians to diagnose operate and transfer new system files to your ID 4000 systems via telephone Requires the optional fax modem described on page 1 11 Facsimile utility Sends badge images and dossiers to any standard facsimile fax machine via telephone line Requires the optional fax modem described on page 1 11 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Customer Application Builder The Customer Application Builder module provided with ID 4000 application templates allows users to customize ID 4000 databases data entry windows badge and dossier designs and bar code labels Its components include Application Manager Allows the customer to create and manage applications sets of database data entry windows for special purposes For example a customer may use the Application Manager to create a set of special screens for entering sensitive financial data Database Screen Designer Sets up a customized database structure for storing applicant data Badge Designer Defines and arranges the elements data fields fonts portraits signatures bar codes appearing on badges printed by ID 4000 systems Also used for setting up dossiers Bar Code Label Designer Defines the bar codes if any printed on ID 4000 badges See D 4000 Application Builder Guide for detailed information about the Customer Application Builder VAR Application Builder Like the customer Application Builder
129. ave all packing materials 2 Verify that all switches are set as follows the factory settings Back Panel Thru EE GAMMA Posi Nega DIP Switches Figure 2 33 D ADJ 3 Connect the video cable part 1B8811B to Video In on the printer Connect the other end to the video breakout cable attached to the Cardinal SNAPPlus board in the D 4000 computer ODOONOO WON ah Figure 2 33 DIP Switch Settings Sony 610 Thermal Printer Sony 860 Black and White Thermal Printer Setup 1 Unpack the printer and save all packing materials 2 Set the switches on the back of the printer according to Figure 2 34 3 Connect the BNC end of the printer cable to the printer and connect the 8 pin mini M connector end of the cable to center connector of the Cardinal board in the ID 4000 computer Switch gt Postfeed Aspect Memory Input Type fo ohm termination Normal Direction setting gt Shown _bType Paper On he 4 3 am Frame om i p Normal Scan of fm Color On 3 T aL GAMMA I H HI E Figure 2 34 Switch Settings Sony 860 Thermal Printer 2 44 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Inforite Signature Tablet Setup Connect the Inforite signature tablet to serial port 1 and connect the power cable integral with the tablet s serial connector to AC power No other settings are needed Note The Inforite software is included i
130. b 4 6 71 62 30 63 1 17 Hott Uh PT Th Te TE TE TE TE TIE TE Te 5 23 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual CARDINAL INI File Contents Continued Macbeth horizontal The following is for the Macbeth chart with its more usual Orientation with the white square in the lower left Size 6 4 White 1 4 Gray80 2 4 Gray60 3 4 Gray40 4 4 Gray20 5 4 Black 6 4 DarkSkin 1 1 Skin 2 1 The following are the CIELAB values of the full Macbeth chart Lab 1 4 96 00 0 00 0 00 Lab 2 4 81 35 0 00 0 00 Lab _ 3 4 66 67 0 00 0 00 Lab 4 4 51 61 0 00 0 00 Lab _5 4 35 98 0 00 0 00 Lab 6 4 20 44 0 00 0 00 Lab_1_3 29 66 27 38 51 12 Lab 2 3 55 48 41 13 33 65 Lab 3 3 41 22 50 91 25 96 Lab 4 3 81 35 3 96 79 13 Lab_5 3 51 61 48 93 15 78 Lab 6 3 51 61 21 67 26 62 Lab 1 2 61 74 27 57 58 23 Lab 2 2 41 22 17 58 43 13 Lab 3 2 51 61 42 88 14 75 Lab 4 2 30 88 26 04 23 48 Lab 5 2 72 43 28 45 59 50 Lab 6 2 71 62 12 33 67 07 Lab 1 1 38 02 12 19 14 39 Lab 2 1 66 37 13 04 17 02 Lab 3 1 51 04 0 33 22 15 Lab 4 1 43 21 16 89 21 98 Lab 5 1 56 39 12 58 25 46 Lab 6 1 71 62 30 63 1 17 CCIR709 The following is the colorimetry for the CCIR709 color space Gamma function segments gamma k k0 endpoint Gamma0 1 0 4 5 0 0 0 018 Gamma1 0 45 1 099 0 099 1 0 Illuminant is D65 Illuminant 0 3127 0 3290 Phosphor chromaticities xr yr xg yg xb yb Chromaticiti
131. base Databases 5 39 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ODBCINST INI ODBCINST INI File Contents ODBC Drivers Q E ML dBASEFile dbf Installed Q E ML TextFile Installed Q E ML Oracle7 Installed Q E ML SQLBase Installed Q E ML XDB Installed Q E ML DatabaseManager Installed Q E ML Informix5 Installed Q E dBASFFile dbf Installed Q E SQLBase Installed Q E XDB Installed QE Informix Installed Q E Oracle7 Installed Q E TextFile Installed Q E ML dBASFFile dbf Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBF04 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBF04 dll Q E ML TextFile Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMTXT04 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMTXT04 dll Q E ML Oracle7 Driver C WINDOWS SY STEM QMOR704 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMOR704 dll Q E ML SQLBase Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMGUP04 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMGUP04 dll Q E ML XDB Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMXDB04 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMXDB04 dll Q E ML DatabaseManager Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBM04 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBM04 dll Q E ML Informix5 Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMINFS504 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMINEF504 dll Q E dBASEFile dbf Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEDBFO03 dIl Setup C WINDOWS SY STEM QEDBF03 dll Q E SQLBase Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEGUP03 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEGUP03 dll Q E XDB Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEXDB03 dll Setup C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEXDB03 dll Q E Informix Driver C
132. base screen and badge designs and security data as follows a Print samples of all badge designs and document all custom colors shapes and logos b Make a list of all users and passwords c List the lock settings for all functions d List all users and their security keys 3 Run CHKDSK or SCANDISK to verify hard drive integrity and correct any problems detected by these programs 4 Back up all workstations servers and consoles Verify the backup files 5 Copy the following files to a floppy disk so they can be restored later to the upgraded system C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA IDUA ENC C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA SAVEQRY DAT C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA IDLK ENC Note On networked systems these files are in the SDATA directory on the network 6 Create a system floppy disk for booting from a floppy if necessary by inserting a blank diskette in the a drive typing c sys a and pressing Enter If the system is on a network also copy the network drivers to maintain ability to log into the server Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Repartitioning the Hard Drive After documenting and backing up the current system perform the following 1 Type ver and press Enter to determine the current DOS version 2 Insert diskette 1 of the current DOS version in the a drive type fdisk and press Enter to start FDISK 3 Remove all existing partitions from the drive as follows a Select 3 delete partition b Sele
133. ble to select a memory address Base Diagram M Eo w wa wa Closed Open o CEO Ai i DA P Termination Remove all termination packs from RN1 RN2 and RN3 Figure 2 17 1 RN1 1 RN2 1 RN3 Figure 2 17 RN1 RN2 and RN3 on TMC 850N 2 29 Polaroid 1D 4000 Service Manual ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Zero Wait State The zero wait state setting determines whether or not the controller takes advantage of the fast operation zero wait on IBM AT computers Zero wait state is disabled at the factory because some AT compatibles implement the fast operation differently from IBM and some XT AT compatibles use the zero wait state feature for other functions Enable this feature by jumpering W5 as shown below if your installation requires it Zero Wait State Selection Zero Wait State enabled ID 4000 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet Board Installation If the system configuration calls for the 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet board install it in the computer and attach it to the desired connection type 10BaseT 10 Base5 When performing the software intallation be sure to perform the board configuration described on page 2 105 Serial Port Board Configuration The serial port handler in the Version 3 software supports multi port serial boards in addition to the standard IBM ports The ports are numbered differently in the various configurations described below Note Because of ID 400
134. blems 6 24 TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Problems cccecceeeeeees 6 26 ImageCard II Color PVC Printer Problems cceeeeees 6 28 Intermec 3000A Bar Code Label Printer Problems 6 31 Magtek MT 80 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Problems 6 32 Modem Probles ae en me eee a eT nT 6 33 Lamination PLOD ICIS iri ccty Seta ie T EEES 6 35 Diagnostic Procedures cccccccecccccsesecceeeceeceeeecceeesceeeeeseeeaeeeeeas 6 36 SCM D1A CIO SUS oxic hier aed te a tice eral ulin ees ale lula cently 6 36 NCR 3333 Computer Diagnostics cccceccccsseecccaesceeeaeeeeeaees 6 37 Microsoft Diagnostics MSD ccc cceececcseeceeeseseeeeeeseeeaeeees 6 39 Diagnosing BOCA Board Port Conflicts eeeecceeeeeeees 6 40 SCST DIENOS UES ae ale E NE ad een ate aca eine 6 41 Dieital Palette Dias noses ree E E E R 6 43 Scanner Diagnostics ccceseecccnseeecenserccnseeccnaseeccnaveccuaneeccness 6 44 Input Unit and Cardinal Board Diagnostics cc eececeeeeeees 6 45 Support Board Strobe and Lens Diagnostics ccceeceeeeees 6 45 Signature Tablet DidemOs ties xcctscpsscecerea tances sevehees oie caaestal exceeds 6 46 Magtek Magnetic Stripe Encoder Test ccccccceeccccseeeeeeeeees 6 47 Modem DINOS ES eaa a AA 6 49 Setting Up Remote Diagnostics eccccccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 6 50 6 1 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair
135. canner loses calibration when turned off on page 6 14 Check cables and tighten or attach as needed Turn computer on Clear debris from photointerrupter Return scanner for photointerrupter replacement or refer to the scanner service manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem Guide rollers fail to return to start position when picture removed from feed tray Illumination lamp fails to light during scan works OK for a few scanning cycles when scanner first turned on Illumination lamp fails to light during scan even when system first turned on Possible Cause Jammed guide rollers or guide roller clutches Damaged guide rollers or clutches Faulty fan thermostat causing system to overheat Loose lamp connections Lamp control cable loose or unplugged Burned out lamp lamp controller overheat thermostat or lamp control circuit on main controller board 6 12 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Clean debris from guide rollers and clutches Return scanner for guide roller and clutch replacement or refer to the scanner service manual Return scanner for fan thermostat replacement or refer to the scanner service manual Check lamp connections tighten if necessary Check lamp control cable connections on main controller board J20 and lamp controller board J33 and tighten if necessary Return scan
136. ce the last printer belt cleaning or 1f paper transport problems have been frequent clean the printer belt see page 6 68 before continuing 3 Fan the paper to remove static electricity then insert it into the cassette with the marked side up Warning Do not stack the paper above the green mark inside the cassette Overloading the cassette will cause the paper to jam Figure 6 30 Tilting Down the Paper Cassette 6 63 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 4 Raise the front edge of the cassette to its original position 5 Swing the paper cassette back into the unit and close the cassette door Note Ifthe PAPER light on the front of the unit is blinking after you close the cassette door check for one of the following and correct it before continuing e Folded or creased paper e Paper inserted upside down e Incorrect paper type e Paper cassette not all the way in Loading an Ink Cartridge 1 Open the ink cartridge door by pressing the OPEN CLOSE button Figure 6 31 2 Move the ink lever to the down position Figure 6 32 and remove the ink cartridge Be careful not to catch your fingers in the spring Figure 6 32 Removing the Ink Cartridge 6 64 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 3 Check the tension of the ink paper in the cartridge If it is loose tighten it Figure 6 33 4 Grasp the knob on the front of
137. changes available hard disk capacities may vary Minimum capacities are guaranteed Hard Drive IDE 520 MB or IDE 1260 MB Due to rapid technology and market changes available hard disk capacities may vary Minimum capacities are guaranteed 2 7 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration ID 4000 Product Tiers Continued Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Badging Security Basic and Applica Component Badging Utilities Color Printer CI 5000 Plus Color Film Recorder or TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Color Printer CI 5000 or Hi Res Thermal DataBase e dBase IV Flat File Support e SQLBase DataBase Manager 340 MB Hard Disk Drive 14 4 KBPS Fax Modem Remote Diagnostics 250 MB Tape Drive Data Backup Software Import Export Software SQLBase DataBase Manager Dossier Software Functional Card Encoding High Resolution Thermal Printer if thermal output selected 2 S 5 JE sg a 2 8 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installation Software Tools and Equipment The following tools equipment software and manuals should be available during ID 4000 System installation Tools and Equipment e Multimeter e Install Field Service Toolkit e Color calibration card e Grounding strap e Loop back connectors serial and parallel Software e Microsoft Diagnostics included with MS DOS e Bootable diskette e NCR User Diagnostics diskette e Norton Disk Docto
138. ct 1 delete primary partition c Select 1 and enter the volume name d Choose y yes and press Escape 4 Create new partitions on the hard drive according to the following tables Local Systems with BLOB storage Size Partition Logical Logical Logical Drive MB Partitions Sizes MB Drive C Drive D E F etc 90 max size system files database BLOBs All other systems Drive Po Contents titi isCSY Size Partition Logical Logical rg a MB Partitions i Drive C Drive D EF System files database images System files database images 90 250 System files Database images Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement 5 Format the drives and install DOS on the primary DOS partition as follows a Select 1 create dos partition or logical drive b Select 1 create primary DOS partition c Answer Yes d Ifthe drive is 170 MB or smaller skip to step e If the drive is larger than 170 MB enter 90 for the size of the primary DOS partition Then go to step e e Select 2 to set the partition active 6 Create extended DOS partitions as follows a Select 1 create DOS partition or logical DOS drive b Select 2 create extended DOS partition use maximum space available c Use the tables following step 4 to define the size of each logical drive d Follow the on screen instructions to complete the procedure Restoring the Current ID 4000 Files After repartitioning t
139. ction 5 ID 4000 Directories and Files ID 4000 Directory Structure After installation and configuration the ID 4000 directory structure resembles the one diagrammed in Figure 5 1 The contents of each directory is described in Table 5 1 The ID 4000 system uses three different conceptual paths for storing its files System Path C ID4K SYS in Figure 5 1 Contains files associated with the ID 4000 system Application Path C ID4K CUSTOMER APP in Figure 5 1 Contains screen badge and support files for the customer s application Database Path C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIR in Figure 5 1 Contains data storage files The System path and the Application path are always on local drives The Database path is on a local drive for stand alone workstations but it can be shared for networked systems When installing the D 4000 you can choose the default name for the ID 4000 system path C ID4K or use another name 5 3 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files DPALETTE ID4000 ID4K CDP BMAPS LOGOS PORT SIG CLRTABLE 1 i p lt CUSTOMER gt Name of lt CUSTOMER gt directory determined by lock file path specified with Configuration Builder Function of the Application Setup Tool lt APP gt 2 Name of lt APP gt directory matches the APPLICATION name entered with the Application Setup Tool 3 Name of lt DBDIR gt directory determined by database directory name entered with the Applica
140. ction 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Clearing Jams in the Paper Cassette Area 1 Open the paper outlet door and the paper cassette door Figure 6 37 2 Push the bottom plate inward Figure 6 37 to release it 3 Lift the bottom plate and remove it Figure 6 38 4 Remove the jammed paper Figure 6 39 5 Reinstall the bottom plate and close the paper cassette door Figure 6 39 Removing the Jammed Paper 6 67 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Cleaning the Belt The TX 1500 color thermal printer belt should be cleaned as described below if any of the following occurs e 500 sheets of paper have been printed without belt cleaning e The printer is expected to be idle for more than a few days e Repeated jams or paper feed problems have occurred 1 Open the cassette door by pulling the PULL OPEN tab then swing out the paper cassette Figure 6 40 2 Tilt down the front edge of the paper cassette Figure 6 41 and remove any paper remaining in the cassette 3 Insert the belt cleaning plate Figure 6 42 Figure 6 42 Inserting the Cleaning Plate 6 68 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 4 Raise the front of the paper cassette to its normal position swing the cassette back into the unit then close the cassette door 5 Turn on the printer by pressing the POWER or OPERAT
141. ctor on each end without an actual cable The SCSI card BIOS the EPROM located in the lower left corner of the card is only necessary if a SCSI hard drive is connected to the controller In cases where a SCSI hard drive is not included on the system the BIOS should be removed Interrupt The interrupt setting defines the interrupts used by the controller The controller s interrupt setting cannot be used by other devices in the computer Interrupt jumpers are labeled W6 and W7 Interrupt Selection W6 W7 2 27 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration W5 Zero wait state enable W6 W7 Interrupt selection RN2 NOT TERMINATED e O Jn 50 INTERNAL SCSI TTIE nseeeeee mesece asss C C9 R 1 RN3 l C11 asan WA AUILELLLIIILI CTO 1 00 COOUOUU Oe fools tb gy oma 00 8 ae 4 AAOOOOCCOIOOCCONI U5 W6 W7 Jumped as shown W1 Jumped W2 Jumped W3 Jumped W5 Jumped Figure 2 16 Future Domain SCSI Card TMC 850M Configuration 2 28 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Memory Address The memory address setting defines the section of computer memory reserved for exclusive use by the controller s ROM BIOS It cannot be used by other devices in the computer Memory address jumpers are labeled W1 W2 and W3 The default memory address range from CAOOh to CBFFh 8K Chase to DEOO DFFF Memory Address Selection Use the following ta
142. ctories and rewriting pfield and sfield information PRUNE EXE is used as follows prune base image dir tog file pathname drive min free space where base image dir Path to the root directory of the existing image tree Example c id4k newsys database img tog file pathname Complete path and file name of the master TOG INI file to be used Example n id4k newsys database tog in1 drive min free space Minimum amount of free disk space in Kbytes to be reserved on the image drive Example for reserving 5MB 5000 drive min free space is optional and defaults to 0 if omitted However a setting of at least SMB is recommended for most applications Sample PRUNE EXE command prune c id4k usersys db img c id4k usersys db tog in1 10000 PRUNE EXE requires a few minutes to convert the directory tree If the conversion is interrupted for any reason repeat the command to complete it 18
143. d Adjustment 2 Set the R46 luma adjustment Figure 4 38 to make the image plainly visible on the ground glass of the alignment gauge approximately 6 f l or 3mV 3 Press the F1 key 4 Bring up the tennis court by choosing DP GTI from the Gentest menu R27 Vertical Luma Adjust Luma Adjust Centering Adjust fine R47 Focus fine coarse R46 Vertical Height Verti al Adjust R48 Horizontal COS R26 Horizontal COS R38 Width Adjust Horizontal Centering Adjust R7 Horizontal Linearity Lil DPADLOC PCX Figure 4 38 Alignment Adjustments on CI 5000 Monitor Board 4 37 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 5 View the image on the ground glass of the final assembly alignment gauge Figure 4 39 and verify that the image is centered and not tilted Note Be sure the two scribed lines on the alignment gauge are always visible to eliminate parallax problems If the tennis court is significantly off center verify that the mirror in the camera back is securely in place If necessary reposition and secure the mirror If the tennis court is tilted loosen the bracket on the CRT tube Figure 4 40 and turn the yoke to align the image with the face of the CRT Top Toward Digital Palette CRT Image Border Inner Ground Glass Scribe Mark Outer Ground Glass Scribe Mark DPALIGN PCX Figure 4 39 Final Assembly Alignment Gauge Scribe Marks Centering
144. d Adjustment Calibration Sequence For complete system calibration perform the procedures below in the specified order The procedure sequence is also diagrammed in Figure 4 1 The calibration procedures in this chapter can also be performed individually as needed Note These calibration procedures are interdependent If you perform any one of the following calibration procedures also perform or verify all those following it in the order shown below and in Figure 4 1 1 Input unit page 4 5 2 Printer output unit a Printed portrait color balance page 4 12 b Printed portrait brightness page 4 17 3 Color scanner a Scanner calibration page 4 22 b Scanner color adjustment page 4 23 c Scanner sharpness adjustment page 4 23 d Scanner tone adjustment page 4 23 4 CI 5000 color film recorder a ImagePrint calibration page 4 33 b Electrical final assembly alignment page 4 35 c Autoluminance adjustment page 4 41 d cos4 adjustment page 4 44 5 Image position for diecutter page 4 49 4 3 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Input Unit Calibration Calibrate Calibrate Focus captured Book al Sig ji live image camera frozen image Printer Output Calibration Adjust Adjust printed printed portrait color e portrait balance brightness Scanner Calibratio
145. d ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance ImageCard II Printer Setting Print Head Voltage Use this procedure to set the ImageCard II print head voltage when the symptom tables indicate that adjustment is necessary 1 Exit from Windows to the DOS prompt 2 Insert the ImageCard II printer diagnostic diskette into drive A and log onto drive A 3 Type i and press ENTER to display the diagnostic main menu 4 Select 1 Configuration then press the Page Down key until Ribbon Type Parameters appears 5 Highlight the Print Voltage setting under YMC and press ENTER 6 Type anew voltage as recommended in the symptom tables and press ENTER 7 Press ESC to escape from the diagnostics program and answer Y to the prompt Save in EEPROM 8 Remove the diskette from A drive 9 Print a card to verify that setting the voltage has corrected the problem ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets Use this procedure to set the ImageCard II print head offsets when the symptom tables indicate that adjustment is necessary 1 Exit from Windows to the DOS prompt 2 Insert the ImageCard II printer diagnostic diskette into drive A and log onto drive A 3 Type ii and press ENTER to display the diagnostic main menu 4 Select 1 Configuration then press the Page Down key until the Machine Setup Offsets screen appears 5 Use the arrow keys to highlight the offset value to be changed and press EN
146. d blue Positive values for red accentuate magenta at the expense of yellow Beyond 100 blues shift toward magenta and yellows shift toward green Negative values for green middle Hue bar accentuate cyan at the expense of yellow Beyond 100 blues shift toward cyan and yellows shift toward red Positive values for green accentuate yellow at the expense of cyan Beyond 100 reds shift toward yellow and cyans shift toward blue 4 26 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Negative values for blue bottom Hue bar accentuate magenta at the expense of cyan Beyond 100 reds shift toward magenta and yellows shift toward red Positive values for blue accentuate yellow at the expense of cyan Beyond 100 reds shift toward yellow and cyans shift toward blue Description of Sharpness Settings The Sharpness dialog box Figure 4 30 appears when you choose Sharp from the Scanner Control Panel advanced settings buttons Use this dialog box to exaggerate or soften the level of detail in the scanned image by changing the values of Focus and Extent Focus Focus refers to the relative sharpness of the entire image Although the scanner always obtains the exact resolution specified in the Control Panel the focus setting softens or hardens the overall effect The valid range of settings for focus is 0 soft to 3 875 hard The neutral setting is 1 0 A lower setting blurs the overall image slightly a higher
147. d press ENTER 10 Accept DEMO as the database name by pressing ENTER 11 Accept SYSADM as a user name by pressing ENTER 12 Type sysadm as the password and press ENTER Note In steps 13 15 use upper case and lower case characters exactly as indicated Each command ends with a space and a semicolon 13 Type SET dbdir c id4k customer sdata and press ENTER 14 Type CREATE DATABASE SDATA and press ENTER 2 83 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 15 End the SQLTALK session by typing EXIT and pressing ENTER 16 Remove the diskette from drive A then reboot to free memory by simultaneously pressing CONTROL ALT and DELETE 17 Edit SQL INI as follows a Log into the C GUPTA directory by typing cd gupta and pressing ENTER b Open SQL INI with the DOS editor by typing edit sql ini and pressing ENTER c Scroll to the dbwindow section of SQL INI and add the following line dbdir c 1d4k customer sdata d Scroll to the dbwservr section of SQL INI and add the following lines SERVERNAME SERVERI1 DBDIR C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA e Save the changes to SQL INI by pulling down the File menu and choosing Save f Return to the DOS prompt by pulling down the File menu and choosing Exit 18 Reboot by simultaneously pressing CONTROL ALT and DELETE Gupta SQLBase Server Installation on Novell Netware Server Installing on the Server Use this procedure for installing G
148. dentification and Badging Station 1 3 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Features D 4000 for Windows offers the following features Instant capture retrieval updating and verifying of text data and images Microsoft Windows operating environment for reduced operator training time Secure tamper resistant and attractive portrait badges and ID cards Instant individual badge issue or highly efficient batch issue Easy yet flexible customization of hardware configuration databases data entry windows and badge designs with the ID 4000 Application Builder Compatibility with a variety of input and output devices for flexible and expandable configuration Carefully designed system of passwords audit log and optional card history database for system security and detailed records of all activities Text data import and export capability and image export capabilities for compatibility with other systems and applications Stand alone and network configurations available From an installation and service standpoint D 4000 simplifies the process of providing the customer with a customized working system It was specifically designed to let VARs and Polaroid agents to create and configure systems with minimal assistance from Polaroid Much of the system databases screens and badge designs can be created by the customer For more information see Software Configuration Sequence in the Application Setup section o
149. der creates two files for the application 1 the system lock file and 2 the application file An application does not exist until these files are created The system lock file is described in detail earlier in this section The application file contains application specific information such as database and application directory names company name and workstation name Each application set up with the VAR Application Builder must have a unique name and database directory The general steps for creating a new application are as follows 1 Entering an application name 2 Identifying a database directory 3 Providing basic application information 4 Setting up database log in 5 Choosing an application template 6 Setting up the application hardware 7 Choosing hardware options 8 Setting up the application software 9 Setting up the database and badges to the customer s specifications with the Database Screen Designer Badge Designer and the Bar Code Label designer unless the customer has chosen to do it himself with the 3 6 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Customer Application Builder See the ID 4000 Application Builder Guide for specific instructions on using these tools 10 Preparing installation diskettes with the Configuration Builder After you create an application you can edit it by selecting it from the application list Planning the Setup Process Before beginning to set u
150. ds the results back to the client Usually a local area network LAN contains more clients that servers Client computers cannot share their resources or use the resources of other client computers Through client server architecture the user gains access to capabilities not available locally on a desktop computer A client server application has the capabilities present in both the client and the server Servers are usually the most powerful computers on the local area network Certain criteria make some systems better suited to be servers such as input output transfer rate and network throughput the speed at which a server processes network tasks High disk capacity and multiple disk controllers are another criteria A server is usually multitasking so that it can serve multiple clients simultaneously Note When you install SQL Structured Query Language DataBase Software you will be given the option to install both the client and server software from the SQLBase Server NLM diskettes You should choose to install the server only In addition you should install the SQLBase Windows Workstation Client Components from the client diskettes This will give you the advantage of always using the most up to date client software 2 92 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Note The SQL server name needs to be unique to the server you are installing If there is a server with the same name already installed on the
151. e monitor board by adjusting R38 1 Place the probe ground on the pin side of the flyback shield Figure 4 45 2 Attach the probe to E4 green wire from CRT cap on the monitor board Figure 4 45 3 Attach the external input triggering probe to J3 pin 1 brown wire at CRT yoke 4 Set the oscilloscope to AC coupled and to 20 usec at 200mV div 5 Verify that resistor R40 on the monitor board is 10K ohm 4 watt Replace R40 if it is not the correct value R38 HORI ZONTAL DPCOS PCX Figure 4 45 CI 5000 COS Adjustments 4 44 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 6 Adjust R38 Figure 4 45 to obtain 1500mV 1 5V p p Figure 4 46 Note If necessary the setting can be increased to a maximum of 1650mV to achieve a uniform brightness no dark corners across the ID card 7 Remove all probes from the CI 5000 1500 mV DPHORIZ PCX Figure 4 46 1500mV p p Horizontal Setting R38 Taking a Test Picture 1 Select Expose Gentest Image from the main menu by pressing F2 then select More Images by pressing F10 2 Scroll down the Gentest image menu and select DP GTI by pressing F8 3 Enter the serial number of the CI 5000 and press ENTER The serial number is on the right side of the CI 5000 as you face it from the rear 4 When the screen displays Prepare Camera for Exposure pull the dark slide out of the film pack 5 Start the exposure sequence by pressi
152. e 4 9 Camera Lock and Focus Screws 4 9 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Calibrating the Captured Image Perform this procedure to calibrate the ID 4000 portrait camera for the captured frozen image Note If you have not already done so perform the steps in Setting up for calibration on page 4 5 before starting this procedure 1 Start captured image calibration by choosing the Auto Calibrate button from the Calibrate dialog box 2 Wait for the Adjust Iris dialog box Figure 4 10 to appear 3 Choose the Freeze button 4 Wait for another message to appear in the bottom half of the Adjust Iris dialog box If the following message appears go to step 5 Turn the freeze pot right or left and press Freeze to make another test exposure If the following message appears skip to step 7 Actual value is close to the goal Press OK to accept the current setting a 200 __Freeze _ Actual EEN Press Freeze to fire the strobe and make a test exposure Press Cancel to quit IMGCAL05 PCX Figure 4 10 Adjust Iris Dialog Box 4 10 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 10 Using a small screwdriver turn the F Frozen screw on the back of the camera base Figure 4 11 in the direction indicated by the message Do not turn the screw more than 1 20 turn at a time Choose the Freeze button from the Adjust Iris di
153. e ID 4000 and log in or choose the Exit button until the window appears 2 Choose the Administration button to display the Administration window Figure 4 19 To search for an old record or create new record enter user information in the screen below EMPLOYEE VISIT Employee Number a First Name Middle Initial Hire Date Preferred Name Exp Date Department Division Work Location Loo E Work Phone G o a TUES_020 BMP Figure 4 18 Data Entry Window ID 4000 43 00 13 l dministration iS fei cial Nase DB MANAGEMENT Handle database tasks Export Data Transport Batch Administration Screen ADMIN BMP Figure 4 19 Administration Window 4 18 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 3 Choose the System Management button to display the System Management window Figure 4 20 4 Choose the Calibration button to display the Calibrate dialog box Figure 4 21 5 Choose Adjust Image Output Color to display the Color Correction dialog box Figure 4 22 ID 4000 43 00 13 Administration SET LOCKS Set security locks on use of the system Administration Screen SYSMAN BMP Figure 4 20 System Management Window Calibrate _ Adjust Image Output Color _ Calibrate Image Capture N CALDIAG BMP justment Value 5 Red Less No change CO More Color Brightness Polarold D4000
154. e Input and output image device calibration Database Screen Files Database screen files do not usually require redesign during upgrade although some rework of edit masks and field types may be necessary when upgrading from version 1 01 Specific guidelines for these items is provided as part of Installing the Ver 1 03 Software on page 12 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Badge Designs Existing badge designs from version 1 02 can be used with version 1 03 When the version 1 02 badges are the printed with version 1 03 software however fonts may be smaller and clearer than those printed with version 1 02 This applies to both film and thermal output If the customer wants to match the version 1 02 printed badges exactly use the Badge Designer to increase the font sizes in each existing badge design Logos Printed with the TX 2000 On systems that have the TX 2000 V Y300 color thermal printer version 1 03 may produce a stretched elongated image when printing a version 1 02 logo While both versions 1 02 and 1 03 use non square pixel mode previous versions of ID 4000 wrote out logos one pixel at a time In the previous versions the aspect ratio was set within the Logo Editor so that logos were printed in a square mode Since the default was non square pixels version 1 02 printed the logos in a square mode but within a non square frame As a result printing these logos with version 1 03 causes s
155. e new version of AUTOEXEC BAT 10 Skip the new release notes by clicking on No 11 Exit from Windows to display the DOS prompt 12 Remove the diskette from drive A 13 Continue with Setting Up the Database Structure below 2 82 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Setting Up the Database Structure The following procedure establishes the customer s database directory structure To assure that you use the identical structure and syntax in the Configuration Builder when generating customer diskettes record the structure used below on paper 1 At the DOS prompt create the directory ID4K by typing md id4k and pressing ENTER 2 Log into the new directory by typing cd id4k and pressing ENTER 3 Create a new directory named CUSTOMER by typing md CUSTOMER and pressing ENTER Note CUSTOMER denotes the directory name used on the customer s system This name can be any valid directory name but the same name must be used in the Configuration Builder when generating customer diskettes 4 Log into the new directory by typing cd CUSTOMER and pressing ENTER 5 Create anew directory named SDATA by typing md sdata and pressing ENTER 6 Verify that the new directory has been created by logging into it Type cd sdata and press ENTER 7 Log into the C GUPTA directory by typing cd gupta and pressing ENTER 8 Verify that DBXLOCAL is installed by typing dbxlocal and pressing ENTER 9 Type sqlitalk an
156. e steps below to install drives and boards in the CSS Preferred 462 486 ESP M computer after checking the hardware as described above 1 Unplug the computer power cord 2 Remove the computer cover 3 Remove the VL video board from its slot 4 Remove the ground wire from the video board and the mother board 5 Connect the mouse cable to COM2 2 19 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 6 Unpack and set up the following boards then install each in the specified computer slot Setup Board Instructions Slot Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI controller Page 2 27 l Polaroid Support board 2 25 3 Ethernet LAN board if required 2 30 4 BOCA IO AT board 2 30 6 IDE VL Controller none req d 7 Cardinal SNAPPlus Framegrabber board 2 26 8 Slot 1 is nearest the power supply 7 Reinstall the computer cover After configuring and installing the boards proceed to Input and Output Device Setup on page 2 34 2 20 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration AT amp T Globalyst 525 Configuration Use the steps below to install drives and boards in the AT amp T Globalyst 525 This system requires no initial setup prior to drive and board installation 1 Unpack the computer monitor and keyboard from their shipping boxes 2 Remove the computer cover as follows a Ifthe computer cover is locked systems are shipped unlocked use the key provided with the computer to unloc
157. e ties that had to be removed Replacing Computer Expansion Boards The ID 4000 computer contains up to six expansion boards described in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 ID 4000 Expansion Boards Slot see Figure 7 9 Contents Comments Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI Required for SCSI devices For serial port upgrade Figure 7 9 Slot Numbers NCR System 3333 Model 3020 7 13 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Removing an Expansion Board Use the following procedure to replace an expansion board Warning Before performing this procedure read the electrostatic discharge warning on page 7 7 1 Turn off the ID 4000 system and disconnect the power cord from the computer 2 Remove the cabinet from the computer as described on page 7 9 3 Identify the board by using Table 7 1 and Figure 7 9 4 Make a note of any cables connected to the board then disconnect the cables 5 Remove the expansion board retaining screw Figure 7 10 6 Without touching board components grasp the board firmly and use a rocking motion to lift it out of its connector After removing the expansion board install a replacement according to the following section Retaining Screw iie Expansion Board N i yell nl Figure 7 10 Expansion Board Removal 7 14 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Installing an Expansion Board After removing an expansion board as de
158. e two files L2S Note The name of this directory matches the application name specified with the Application Setup Tool 5 7 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Table 5 1 ID 4000 Directories Continued File Listing Contents Page C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIR Database and index files for the 5 1 D 4000 application e g TEST DBF Some databases types may also use subdirectories Customer lock file DLK ENC User access list and passwords IDUA ENC TOG file for automatic numbering TOG INI e Query template file SAVEQRY DAT Note The directory name is specified with the Application Setup Tool On networked systems this directory may reside on a LAN C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIR IM_ Image TIF files 5 11 G C ID4K SYS e ID 4000 DLLs 5 19 e D 4000 VBXsE e Scanner TWAIN driver e Local TOG numbering file C WINDOWS e Microsoft Windows files 5 13 e ID 4000 files associated with Q E database library e g QEX INI or Multilink VB 5 8 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Table 5 1 ID 4000 Directories Continued File Listing Contents C WINDOWS SYSTEM e Microsoft Windows system files e ID 4000 printer drivers e g DPAL DRV e Files associated with Q E database library e g QELIB DLL File Listings by Directory C DPALETTE VERSION 141 64T4X5 FLM TY PE559 FLM DRROMAN FPL 64TPACK FLM TY PE664 FLM GENI FPL WHEREDP BA
159. each area of interest image created 1 means YES 0 means NO AOI Prompt Prompt the user if there are multiple areas of interest Num _ AOI gt 0 1 means YES 0 means NO just assume they want to do AOT AOI Rotate A Rotate scanned image counterclockwise f there are only four possible choices f 0 no rotation 90 90 degrees counterclockwise f 180 180 degrees counterclockwise 270 90 degrees clockwise Num AOI 0 AOI View 1 AOI Prompt 1 AOI Rotate _Angle 180 Scanner_AOI1 Field_Type S Field_Name SFIELD Im1_X1 220 Im1l_ Y1 55 Im1_ Ht 75 Iml_Wd 150 Scanner AOI2 Field_Type P Field _Name PFIELD Im1_X1 225 Im1_Y1 200 Im1_Ht 225 Iml_Wd 150 BTNLIST INI BTNLIST INI is located in the C ID4K directory It defines the structure of the Visual Basic button elements used in ID 4000 The section names indicate the application template to which the buttons apply 5 17 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files BTNLIST INI File Contents SIBS CNT 65 N T N iN D N S19 350 42 23 1 S20 351 42 24 1 S 21 352 40 25 1 S23 355 45 27 1 S24 356 44 ie CO 3 S39 314 17 S40 315 18 3 S41 316 19 S42 317 20 S43 318 21 4 S44 319 22 4 S45 321 23 4 S46 323 25 4 S47 326 26 4 S48 327 27 4 S49 328 28 4 S50 329 29 4 S51 331 31 5 18 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files BTNLIST INI File Contents Continued
160. ed card Pouches not sealing properly Voids and bubbles on finished card Possible Cause Temperature too high Temperature setting at extreme end of high side Temperature too low Carrier improperly inserted into unit Pouch and carrier too thin for compression by rollers Uneven heat distribution by rollers hot spot on rollers Incorrect laminator temperature 6 35 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Reduce laminator temperature See Laminator Temperature Adjustment in the System Configuration section of this manual Lower temperature in proper decrements to reach ideal temperature 265 F See Laminator Temperature Adjustment in System Configuration section of this manual Increase laminator temperature to 265 F See Laminator Temperature Adjustment in System Configuration section of this manual Insert card in exact horizontal position Insert pouch into two foil paper carriers to increase thickness Insert an empty pouch to start rollers at least 2 minutes prior to laminating Set laminator temperature to approx 265 F See Laminator Temperature Adjustment in System Configuration section of this manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Diagnostic Procedures Use the procedures in this section to diagnose ID 4000 components suspected to be faulty or incorrectly set up Setup
161. efault In cases where page locking may be present an Isolation level of 3 should be used Set SQLBase Isolation levels by editing the ISOLEVELS section of ESMS INI The two available settings are ANSI Level 1 RC2 and ANSI Level 3 S 2 108 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Optimizing DOS and Windows Use the steps below to optimize the performance of DOS and Windows 1 Edit WIN INI as follows a Ifthe system has a CI 5000 Plus film recorder edit the CI 5000 EPT section to match the following CI 5000 EPT Exposure 6 CamerabackFilm1 3 b Ifthe system has a TX 2000 V Y 300 color thermal printer add the following line to the end of the PrinterPorts section VY 300 HiRes T X2000 LPT 1 1 5 45 VY 300 PAL TX2000 LPT 1 15 45 VY 300 Square T X2000 LPT 1 15 45 c Add the following lines to the end of the Devices section VY 300 HiRes TX2000 LPT 1 VY 300 PAL T X2000 LPT 1 d Edit the intl section to match the following intl iT LZero 1 2 Verify that CONFIG SYS matches the following and edit the file if necessary DEVICE C DOS SETVER EXE DEVICE C WINDOWS HIMEM SYS DEVICE C WINDOW S EMM386 EXE NOEMS FRAME E000 X A000 C7FF DOS HIGH UMB FILES 30 STACKS 9 256 BUFFERS 30 LASTDRIVE E 2 109 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 3 Verify that AUTOEXEC BAT matches the following and edit the file if necessary C DOS SMARTDRV E
162. eine Up the Serial IMteriace nocere meena 3 12 3 1 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Editing an Existing Application ccecccceeccccsseecceeeesseeseeeeens 3 12 Setting Up the Database and Badges ec eecccceeeseceeeeees 3 12 Preparing Installation Diskettes 0 0 eeccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeens 3 13 Full System and Customer System Options cccceccceeeeeees 3 13 Creating Full System Installation Diskettes ee eeceeeeees 3 13 Creating Customer System Diskettes 00 0 0 ceccccceeccccseeeceeeee ees 3 14 Restrictions on Copying Application Files cceccceeeeeeeees 3 15 Clearing Memory After Testing SQLBase System 3 16 3 2 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Section 3 Application Setup Note The following instructions apply only to VAR Application Builder Systems and the Master Systems used by Polaroid Manufacturing The ID 4000 VAR Application Builder sets up all the elements for a new ID 4000 application template Security Identification and Badging Station Security Verification Station etc or edits the setup of an existing application template Software Configuration Sequence The typical sequence of ID 4000 software configuration is diagrammed in Figure 3 1 Upon receipt of an ID 4000 order a VAR or agent sets up builds the ID 4000 application according to the customer s specifications Setup produces a set of customer
163. el DIP switches as shown in Figure 2 22 2 Verify that only the following LEDs are lighted on the front of the TX 1500 e POWER e READY e FRAME e RGB If necessary set the front panel lights correctly by pressing the corresponding buttons If only the READY light is blinking wait until it is steady before proceeding If the READY PAPER and INK lights are all blinking paper is jammed in the printer See the Troubleshooting and Maintenance section of this manual for jam clearing procedures If the PAPER or INK light is blinking the paper or ink cartridge needs replenishment See the Troubleshooting and Maintenance section of this manual for the procedures Note Synchronization is not necessary when the printer is set for interlaced input Figure 2 22 TX 1500 Rear Panel Switch Settings 2 35 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid TX 2000 Thermal Printer Setup Connect the Polaroid TX 2000 Hitachi VY 300 color thermal printer to parallel port 2 with a standard parallel printer cable 25 pin D sub to 36 pin Centronics cable Connect the 25 pin D sub end to the CPU and the 36 pin Centronics end to the printer The TX 2000 color thermal printer must also be set up to turn on automatically when it is plugged in or when the ID 4000 power strip switch is turned on This setup command is in the TX 2000 driver and it must be sent to the printer only once during initial installation for perm
164. electronics that capture video portraits for incorporation in photo identification badges printed by the ID 4000 Portraits captured with the unit are also stored on the ID 4000 for a variety of uses including reissue and identity verification Polaroid Color Scanner The Polaroid color scanner Figure 1 4 digitizes portraits for incorporation in photo identification badges printed by the D 4000 Portraits captured with the scanner are also stored on the ID 4000 for reissue identity verification and other purposes yu Figure 1 3 ID 4000 Input Unit Figure 1 4 Color Scanner 1 6 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Signature Tablet The signature tablet Figure 1 5 captures applicant signatures for printing on badges and storing in the ID 4000 for verification purposes To use the tablet the applicant signs a pressure sensitive writing area with a non electronic stylus or with a ball point pen on a paper overlay Polaroid Digital Palette Color Film Recorder The Polaroid Digital Palette Film Recorder Figure 1 6 prints full color badge photographs on 3 1 4 x 4 1 4 inch Polaroid Polacolor instant film The number of badges per sheet depends on system configuration Badges printed on this device must be diecut and laminated with the badge finishing equipment described on page 1 12 Figure 1 5 Signature Tablet and Stylus Figure 1 6 Digital Palette Color Film Recorder l 7 Pola
165. er Saver 0 FF0000 0 FFFFFF FFOOFF 0 800000 C0C0C0 0 80 FFFFFF COC0C0 FF0000 COC0CO 808080 0 COCOCO FFFFFF 0 0 FFFFFF Rugby C0C0C0 80FFFF FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 800000 FFFFFF FFFFFF 80 FFFFFF 0 COC0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 800000 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF The Blues 804000 COCOC0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 800000 COC0C0 FFFFFF C0C0C0 COC0C0 0 COC0C0 COC0CO 808080 0 COC0C0 800000 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF Tweed 6A 619E COC0C0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 408080 C0C0C0 FFFFFF 404080 C0C0C0 0 1 0EOEQE0 COC0C0 808080 0 C0OC0C0 8080 0 0 F FFFFF Valentine CO80FF FFFFFF FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 8000FF 400080 FFFFFF C080FF CO80FF 0 COC0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 FFOOFF 0 F FFFFF FFFFFF Wingtips 408080 COC0C0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 808080 FFFFFF FFFFFF 4080 FFFFFF 0 808080 C0C0C0 808080 0 COC0C0 808080 FFFFF F 0 FFFFFF 5 25 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files CONTROL INI File Contents Continued Custom Colors ColorA FFFFFF ColorB FFFFFF ColorC FFFFFF ColorD FFFFFF ColorE FFFFFF ColorF FFFFFF ColorG FFFFFF ColorH FFFFFF ColorI FFFFFF ColorJ FFFFFF ColorK FFFFFF ColorL FFFFFF ColorM FFFFFF ColorN FFFFFF ColorO FFFFFF ColorP FFFFFF Patterns None None Boxes 127 65 65 65 65 65 127 0 Paisley 2 7 7 2 32 80 80 32 Weave 136 84 34 69 136 21 34 81 Waffle 0 0 0 0 128 128 128 240 Tulip 0 0 84 124 124 56 146 124 Spinner 20 12 200 121 158 19 48 40 Scottie 64 192 200 120 120 7200 Critters 0 80 1143205392 50 Gray 170 85 170 85 170 85 170 85 Quilt 1
166. ered or selected choose OK 3 8 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Providing Basic Application Information The Basic Application Information window lets you specify the basic characteristics of the new application This window appears only when you are setting up a new application It does not appear when you edit an existing application After making the appropriate choices described in more detail below choose OK to continue Database From the drop down Database list select the type of database used by the application Access Control If applicable to the application choose the appropriate access control vendor from the drop down list Connectivity In the Connectivity section specify LAN or Local setup From the LAN choices select the appropriate network option You can create multiple workstations that share a single lock file Choose Local to create a stand along workstation Note Once you save hardware information for a stand alone system you cannot change it to a LAN system Portrait Style Choose a portrait style outline configuration from those listed e Vertical default e Square e Horizontal e None black horizontal shape Output Formats Check the appropriate box in the list of badge types Each option corresponds to badge output supported by the currently listed hardware devices Storage Options In the Images section choose from the list to specify how images
167. ervice Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Section 8 Third Party Software This section contains brief operating instructions for some non Polaroid applications provided with the ID 4000 For more complete information refer to the manuals provided with the applications For installation and configuration instructions see System Configuration section of this manual Crystal Reports Crystal Reports is a report writing utility provided with ID 4000 for selecting formatting viewing and printing data from ID 4000 databases The instructions below cover startup and basic functions For more information refer to the manual provided with Crystal Reports Starting Crystal Reports from Windows 1 Double click the Crystal Reports icon in the Windows Program Manager 2 Choose New from the File Menu then choose Report from the drop down menu to display the New Report window 3 In the Create New section of the window click on the type of report to be created 4 Inthe From section click on the data source Then click on OK 5 For ID 4000 systems using Dbase databases choose Data File browse through the C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDATA directory and choose the table DBF file containing the desired data Note In actual systems the directories CUSTOMER and DBDATA have customized names 8 3 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software For ID 4000 systems using SQLbase databases choose From SQL Table c
168. es 0 640 0 330 0 300 0 600 0 150 0 060 CCIR601 The following is the colorimetry for the CCIR601 1 color space Gamma function segments gamma k k0 endpoint Gamma0 0 4545 1 0 0 0 1 0 Illuminant is C Illuminant 0 3101 0 3162 Phosphor chromaticities xr yr xg yg xb yb Chromaticities 0 670 0 330 0 210 0 710 0 140 0 080 5 24 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files CI5000 INI CI5000 INI is located in the C ID4K directory It stores the results of output calibration CI5000 INI File Contents Digital Palette Calibration RedGamma 5 GreenGamma 5 BlueGamma 5 Brightness 5 BrightnessStep 10 CalCardWidth 5310 CalCardHeight 4050 WindowsDeviceName Digital Palette CONTROL INI CONTROL INI File Contents current color schemes Windows Default color schemes Arizona 804000 FFFFFF FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 808040 COCOCO FFFFFF 4080FF COCO0C0 0 COC0C0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 808000 FFF FFF 0 FFFFFF Black Leather Jacket 0 COCOCO FFFFFF 0 COC0C0 0 800040 808080 FFFFFF 808080 808080 0 1 OEQEOEO COCO0C0 808080 0 808080 0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF Bordeaux 400080 COCOCO FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 800080 COCOCO FFFFFF FF0080 COC0C0 0 COCOC0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 800080 FF FFFF 0 FFFFFF Cinnamon 404080 COCOCO FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 80 COCOCO FFFFFF 80 COC0C0 0 COCOC0 COC0C0 808080 0 808080 80 FFFFFF 0 FFFFF F Designer 7C7C3F COC0C0 FFFFFF 0 FFFFFF 0 808000 C0OC0C0 FFFFFF COC0C0 C0C0C0 0 COC
169. et too low 6 30 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Decrease the card registration offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Increase or decrease the print head offset value under Overlay See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Decrease the print head offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Decrease the head prep offset value under Overlay See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Increase the card registration offset See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets page 6 71 Decrease the head prep offset See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets page 6 71 Increase the card registration offset value Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ImageCard II Color PVC Printer Problems Continued Problem Possible Cause Print head not parallel to card surface Printing uneven side to side Overlay material sticks to Insufficient card strip offset trailing edge of card Intermec 3000A Bar Code Label Printer Problems Problem Possible Cause No power indicator light No power at AC outlet Incorrect voltage setting Faulty line cord Fuse burned out Empty Pause indicator on Label supply exhausted Labels loaded incorrectly 6 31 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Seat the
170. f necessary Check for power at encoder end of line cord replace cord if necessary Check fuse and replace if necessary Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Magtek MT 80 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Problems Continued Problem Ready LED does not light unit does not encode stripes Ready LED does not light unit does not encode stripes continued Error light flashes during encoding and unit beeps twice Modem Problems Problem Modem does not power up Modem disconnects shortly after it dials another modem and connects Possible Cause Cable not connected Incorrect cable Incorrect ESMS INI assignment or switch settings Wrong magnetic stripe media Possible Cause Power transformer not plugged in or power switch off Poor telephone line Faulty modem 6 33 Corrective Action Check cable connections and tighten if necessary Verify that cable is Magtek null modem replace if necessary Verify that ESMS INI device assignment in MT 80 section matches COM port and that encoder switch is set according to Section 2 of this manual Use correct media Corrective Action Verify that the power transformer is plugged into AC power and the modem power switch is on Retry the call Replace modem Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Modem Problems Continued Problem Modem dials but does not connect No Dialtone message
171. f this manual Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Hardware Components ID 4000 Computer Display Keyboard and Mouse The ID 4000 computer display and keyboard Figure 1 2 are the core hardware components of the ID 4000 System The computer controls the station coordinates operation of all other components For stand alone stations the computer also stores the D 4000 software and the text and image data necessary for badging and verification operations Network stations may store this data remotely The display presents information prompts and other information for guiding the operator through data and image capture processes badge printing and other ID 4000 functions It also displays images such as portraits and badges for viewing by the operator Appropriate input and output devices are required for full functionality However the computer display keyboard and mouse can be used alone for verification purposes Figure 1 2 D 4000 Computer Display and Mouse 1 5 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Input and Output Devices ID 4000 input and output devices are optional components that capture images print badges and dossiers encode magnetic stripes or transfer data Note Additional devices not described here may become available in the future ID 4000 Input Unit The ID 4000 Input Unit Figure 1 3 is a video camera electronic flash support stand and related
172. for the network connection choose Novell Netware 3 26 and above You will be asked to enter some of the Windows disks then Windows will be enabled for Netware support 2 99 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration In the NET CFG file add the following parameters at the beginning of the file for performance enhancements SHOW DOTS ON PREFERRED SERVER NetWare server to which you wish to login IPX RETRY COUNT 1500 SPX CONNECTIONS 30 SPX ABORT TIMEOUT 1000 SPX VERIFY TIMEOUT 1000 SPX LISTEN TIMEOUT 1000 UNIX TCP IP Client Side Software Setup The current brand and version of software used to communicate with the UNIX server is FTP PC TCP 3 0 for Windows and DOS PC TCP 1s TCP IP for the PC The subsections below describe two methods for connecting to a UNIX server One is only a connection to the UNIX server Packet drivers the other is a connection to the UNIX server with a simultaneous connection to a Novell Netware server ODI Definitions Host Address Four numbers each in the range of 1 255 separated by a period which uniquely identifies the computer to the server e g 137 252 25 249 Host Name A name given to your computer which is unique within your domain e g id4k ws 1 Domain Name The name of the local network associated with a subnet mask e g polaroid com Example The entry in the host s file using the above definitions would be Address 137 252 25 249 Host D
173. gonID SYSADM Description Servers CursorCacheSize 6 LockTimeOut 300 InputMessageSize 0 YieldProc 1 NoRecovery 0 XDB Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMXDB04 dll DatabaseManager Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBM04 dll Informix5 Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMINF504 dll Description Database Databases HostName LogonID 5 38 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files ODBC INI File Contents Continue QEDBF Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEDBF03 dll Description QELib dBase Driver Database Locking RECORD FileOpenCache Charset ANSI CreateType QEGUP Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEGUP03 dll Description SQLBase System Database ServerName Servers LogonID QEOR7 Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEOR703 dll Description Oracle 7 Database System ServerName Servers LogonID QETXT Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QETXTO03 dll Description Database ScanRows 1 TableType Fixed Delimiter UndefinedTable GUESS ExtraExtensions FileOpenCache FirstLineNames 1 Charset ANSI dBASEFile Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMDBF04 dll Description Multilink dBase Driver Database Locking LockCompatibility FileOpenCache CacheSize Charset ANSI IntlSort 0 CreateType Oracle7 Driver C WINDOWS SY STEM QMOR704 dll Description Q E ML Oracle Driver ServerName Servers LogonID LockTimeOut AtraySize QEINF Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QEINF03 dll Description Informix5 Data
174. h the ID 4000 Figure 1 10 Laser Printer 1 9 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Bar Code Label Printer The bar code label printer Figure 1 11 produces an adhesive backed label with an industry standard bar code The code usually contains an identification number or other data from the applicant database and selected during system setup After printing the bar code label can be applied to the front or back of the badge for reading by automated access control systems and other devices Magnetic Stripe Encoder Several different magnetic stripe encoders similar to the one shown in Figure 1 12 are available with the ID 4000 These devices embed data in an iron oxide stripe in the badge laminating material After embedding the magnetic code can be read by standard magnetic stripe readers for automated access control and other uses Figure 1 12 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Tape Drive The tape drive Figure 1 13 available for the ID 4000 is used with the optional backup and restore utility see Optional Software Modules on page 1 15 for storing backup files on magnetic tape cartridges It can also be used with the optional import and export software for exchanging data with other ID 4000 stations and compatible systems Fax Modem The fax modem Figure 1 14 provided as an option with the ID 4000 system is used with the optional remote di
175. haracter at the end of the file this needs to be removed it is a bug 2 97 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration NOTE 2 Do not install the NetWare windows update you existing one might be a later driver 4 In the winclient dll section uncomment the line comdll sqlspxw Example of winclient dll contents after modifications winclient dll This section is for the Windows client workstations Here you will specify the COMmunication DLL s that the Windows application s intend to use Use sqldbw for the LOCAL single user database engine dbwindow exe sqlwsv for the LOCAL multi tasking database engine dbwservr exe sqinbiow to access a REMOTE database using NetBios sqlspxw from a Netware 3 11 client to access a REMOTE database using SPX communications sqltifsw to access a REMOTE database server using TCP IP communications from FTP Software sqltipcw to access a REMOTE database server using PC NFS communications or sqltinvw to access a REMOTE database server using TCP IP communications from Novell Uncomment the COMmunication DLL s that the application s will use comdll sqldbw comdll sqlwsv comdll sqilnbiow comdll sqlspxw comdll sqltinvw scomdll sqltifsw comdll sqltipcw 4 In the in the dbnserver and dbn5srvr sections set the database directory path dbdir vol3 sqlbase vol3 refers to the volume on the server in ID4k can t use volume
176. he dbnserver and dbnSsrvr sections dbdir vol3 sqlbase ser vername ser ver 3 Also note the following e SQLBase wants serverX where X must be within the range 1 8 e You can only have up to 8 active databases on the same backbone at any one time e The name in the local copy of SQL INI must be the same as in the network version of SQL INI This information may be obtained from the system administrator 2 86 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Client Software Installation for Oracle on SCO UNIX Server The client software pieces necessary for communicating with oracle on the UNIX Server are e Communications software PC TCP SQL Net TCP IP e Four diskettes for Oracle Client Software e SQL Net TCP IP Version 1 1 Windows Install V3 0 9 5 1 1 disk Required Support Files V7 0 15 0 0D 2 disks e SQL Net TCP IP V1 1 7 8 1 disk 1 Install the Oracle Installer the program from which all other Oracle products are installed onto the client system as follows a Insert the Oracle Windows Install Disk and run A ORAINST EXE from the Windows Program Manager b Choose English and Click Select in the Language dialog box c Enter ID 4000 and Click OK in the Customer Name dialog box d Click OK to accept C ORAWIN in the Set Oracle Home dialog box e Click Yes to allow Install to modify AUTOEXEC BAT f Click OK in the Notification dialog box about rebooting g Exit from Windows rebo
177. he gt gt button on the Setup Screen Some choices display additional dialog boxes for specifying hardware setup details For example choosing Signature Scanner displays a dialog box for specifying the serial port to which the scanner is connected The Hardware Identification Number references a matching button ID in the template being used The system will identify duplicate choices by checking the hardware ID number Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup If you choose a hardware item that is not part of the Template button set the item is ignored Incompatible choices such as a camera stand no strobe and a strobe camera unit on the same application will cause an error As part of choosing hardware you also can enable the hardware key requirement To do so check the Hardware Key box When this box 1s checked the system verifies the presence of an Aegis System Activator key when it starts Choosing Application Software To display the list of available software options click on the Software button Setting Up the Serial Interface To set up the serial interface select the appropriate port baud rate and setup from the drop down lists Editing an Existing Application The Old Application button on the Application Setup main screen lets you modify an existing application The process is similar to creating a new application You can work with any one of 10 previously saved applications to add enhancemen
178. he drive as described above restore the current ID 4000 files according to the appropriate procedure below Warning If you are copying files from a local workstation to a network exit Windows and run XCOPY from the DOS prompt Copying from Windows will NOT copy all the files Restoring from a Tape Drive When restoring the ID 4000 files from a tape drive install Fastback on the c partition Then use the appropriate procedure from Table to restore the files Note Be sure to set the following Restore options in Fastback before restoring Create all paths on Existing files Overwrite always Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Table 1 Restoring Files from a Tape Drive Number of Partitions Fastback Restoration Steps 1 Go to restore menu options 2 Select Retrieve History Files on Tape 3 Select the most recent backup 4 Restore all files excluding DOS and Fastback to the c drive select no for replacing hidden files 1 Go to restore menu options 2 Select Retrieve History Files on Tape and start retrieve 3 Select the most recent backup 4 Restore all files excluding DOS and Fastback to the c drive select no for replacing hidden files 5 Restore the SDATA directory containing the database and images associated with the application to the d drive D ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA IMG 1 Go to restore menu options 2 Select Retrieve History Files on Tape 3 Select the most recent bac
179. he picture Environmental Conditions Because all electrical equipment especially computers generates a steady amount of potentially damaging heat it is important that air circulate freely around the equipment all the time Ideally the ID 4000 should be in an air conditioned space The equipment should never be in direct sunlight In addition the workspace should be dry have normal humidity and be free of dust Dust and humidity are harmful to computers and other electronic equipment To avoid interference with the ID 4000 connect any other electronic systems other computers radios etc to a different power circuit Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Computer Configuration NCR 3333 Configuration Use the steps below to install drives and boards in the NCR System 3333 This system requires no initial setup prior to drive and board installation 1 Unpack the computer monitor and keyboard from their shipping boxes 2 Remove the computer cover by turning the system keylock to its unlocked position removing the three retaining screws Figure 2 2 and sliding the cover back and then upward Cabinet Retaining Screws Cabinet Retaining Screws Figure 2 2 Removing the NCR 3333 Cover 3 Unpack and set up the following boards and install each in the specified computer slot NCR 3333 Systems All Except Verification Station Setup Slot Board Instructions Figure 2 3 Future Domain TM
180. hlights and shadows of a particular image as viewed on a particular monitor or in printed output Gamma factors begin at 0 With the color scanner a setting of 0 65 closely approximates the eye s natural tone discrimination A practical range for adjustment is 0 2 to 2 0 The neutral setting 1s 1 0 4 29 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Adjusting the Scanned Field Use the steps below to adjust the scanned field the area captured by the scanner 1 Create a new directory and copy all CFG files from the directory C WINDOWS TWAIN into the new directory Warning Do not omit step 2 If necessary you can copy these files back to C WINDOWS TWAIN to restore the current settings 2 Start the ID 4000 application create a new record and choose the Capture button to display the scanner control panel Figure 4 32 Note If choosing the Capture button does not display the scanner control panel or a dialog box allowing you to choose the scanner control panel you must create another record in an applicant category configured for scanning images 3 Choose the More button to display the Advanced Settings buttons Figure 4 33 Polaroid C5S 500i Scanner Control Panel Resolution FRAME Position Size Horiz Vert MEMORY Required 225 kbytes Available 16320 kbytes ID4SV006 BMP Figure 4 32 Scanner Control Panel SCANMORE BMP Figure 4 33 Advanced Settings Buttons
181. hoose OK Then choose GUPTA SQLbase and choose OK Then enter the following Server Server Database SData UserID Sysadm Password Sysadm Note The Server and Database entries depend on the system s configuration and may be different from the entries shown 6 In the Choose Database File dialog box displaying the desired database file choose OK to display the blank Crystal Report Designer The Crystal Report Designer has Page Header Details and Page Footer sections for creating a report To continue creating a report proceed to the next section Creating a New Report After opening the Crystal Report Designer as described in the previous section use the steps below to create a new report 1 From the Insert Database Field dialog box select the fields to be included in the report Hold down the Shift key while clicking to select a range Hold down the Control key while clicking to select multiple fields not adjacent to each other 2 With the cursor on one of the selected fields press the mouse button and drag the selected fields to the Details section of the Crystal Report Designer Then release the mouse button to place the fields If you place multiple fields they appear next to each other in the same order as the Insert Database Field dialog box A box marks the position of each field Characters in the box indicate the field type text numeric currency date or Boolean The number of characters in the box ind
182. icates the number of characters allowed for the field in the source database Field titles appear automatically in the Page Header section Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software 3 Create a report title by selecting Insert Text Field typing an appropriate title and choosing Accept Then position the field where you want it to appear in the Page Header section You can also insert database fields or special fields from the Insert menu in that section 4 Preview the report by choosing Print Preview from the File menu You can make adjustments to the report in the Print Preview window or close the window and continue to work in the Report Designer 5 To change field locations and format insert subtotals delete fields create a formula add graphics change sort order or grouping or limit the report to specific records see Editing Report Designer Fields in the next section before continuing 6 Print the report by selecting Print from the File menu Editing Report Designer Fields Use the following techniques to edit fields in the Report Designer after you place them Moving a Field To move a field click on the field box and drag the box to its new location You can also use the arrow keys after the box 1s selected You can select multiple fields prior to moving them by holding down the Shift key while clicking on the fields to be selected Deleting a Field To delete a field click on the field b
183. ication Notes servername server sqlspx The server name must be unique You can choose SERVER through SERVER8 dbname demo sqlspx The database name must be unique You can change demo to a title of your choice cache 2000 Use default value 2000 dbdir db sqlbase Use volume name where SQL application is located For example dbdir Network volume name sqlbase b Modify the dbn5srvr This is dependent on what type of user package that was purchased with SQL use the section that defines the amount of license purchased with the system Modifications to dbnSservr dbn20servr or dbn50servr Note Go to the NetWare section that applies to the license you purchased with your software This is written on the server diskettes This example is for the file structure for a 5 user license The structure is the same for 5 user 20 user and 50 user licenses Notes on how to modify the structure are written below the file structure File Structure dbnSsrvr This section is for the SQLBase NLM database server 5 user version This is a NetWare Loadable Module NLM and is loaded on the NetWare file server You can specify which communication protocol s the server can use as well as which protocol s a database can use servername server sqlspx dbname demo sqlspx cache 2000 dbdir db sqlbase 2 95 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Modification notes servername server sq
184. id ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 9 Type your user name and password for the UNIX server Click on the Save As Default Check box then choose OK 10 Under Current Connections highlight the currently mounted drive 11 Click Settings then click Interdrive Options to open the dialog box 12 Make sure that Hide Dotfiles is the only box checked then click OK 13 Click Done then click OK Modifying STARTUP NCF for NetWare Edit STARTUP NCFE as described below to improve access times for a workstation connected to the file server Adding the lines indicated assures that packets are expedited when transferred from client to server STARTUP NCE can be accessed through the INSTALL Netware Loadable Module NLM It can be found under SYSTEM OPTIONS once inside the install menu Warning Be sure to select Edit STARTUP NCE Selecting Create instead of Edit deletes any existing lines in the file The file may already have entries listed In this case add these lines to the bottom of the file Set Maximum Physical Receive Packet Size 1536 Set Minimum Packet Receive Buffers 350 Setting Up Stand Alone Database with Gupta SQLBase Server Use this procedure to set up a stand alone database with Gupta SQLBase Server for Windows Note Use only the disks labeled Version 5 1 4 DOS Windows SQLBase Single User Multi Tasking Engine 3 disks The package 1s marked 0222655104 SQLBase Multi Tasking Engine Ve
185. igh Coercivity e Elcom A80ER RS Elcom A4ER RS Note MT 80 and A80ER RS require a null modem cable A4ER RS requires a regular pass through serial cable The magnetic stripe encoder connects to any serial port on the D 4000 computer as shown in Figure 2 43 Magnetic 9 to 25 Pin Cable Stripe Encoder Figure 2 43 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Cabling The cable pin outs for the magnetic stripe encoder cable are as follows Pin No Pin No Designation CPU Encoder l A N Ld Ee _ 6 cTs 5 4 CA 2 57 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Intermec 3000A Barcode Labeler Cabling The Intermec 3000A bar code labeler connects to any serial port on the D 4000 computer as shown in Figure 2 44 i Intermec 9 to 25 Pin Cable Figure 2 44 Bar Code Labeler Cabling The cable pin outs for the Intermec 3000A bar code labeler cable are as follows Pin No Pin No a EA Lataa DataCard Black and White PVC Printer Cabling Connect the DataCard black and white PVC printer to any parallel port as shown in Figure 2 45 DataCard CPU l 25 to 25 Pin Cable Figure 2 45 DataCard Black and White PVC Printer Cabling 2 58 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Cable pin outs for the PVC printer s 25 pin female D subminiature connector are as follows je Pe oa No Designation Direction No Designation Direction out out
186. ile Contents Commands VirtualHDIrq off 386enh SY STEM INI EmmExclude C000 C7FF 386enh SY STEM INI EmmExclude C000 CBFF 386enh SY STEM INI EmmExclude A000 EFFF 386enh SY STEM INI EmmExclude 386enh SY STEM INI EmmPageFrame 386enh SY STEM INI Mouse 386enh SY STEM INI commdrv30 true 386enh SY STEM INI Programs com exe bat pif windows WIN INI FILE ports WIN INI FILES 40 CONFIG SYS BUFFERS 20 CONFIG SYS DEVICEHIGH CONFIG SYS DEVICE CONFIG SYS 5 37 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files MSD INI File Contents Continued LOADHIGH MOUSE AUTOEXEC BAT MOUSE AUTOEXEC BAT SET TEMP C WINDOWS TEMP AUTOEXEC BAT SET TMP C WINDOWS TEMP AUTOEXEC BAT ODBC INI ODBC INI File Contents ODBC Data Sources TextFile Q E ML TextFile XDB Q E ML XDB DatabaseManager Q E ML DatabaseManager Informix5 Q E ML Informix QEDBF Q E dBASFEFile dbf QEGUP Q E SQLBase QEOR7 Q E Oracle7 QETXT Q E TextFile dBASEFile Q E ML dBASFFile dbf Oracle7 Q E ML Oracle7 QEINF Q E Informix SQLBase Q E ML SQLBase TextFile Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMTXT04 dll Description Database ScanRows 1 TableType Fixed Delimiter UndefinedTable GUESS ExtraExtensions FileOpenCache CacheSize FirstLineNames 1 IntlSort 1 Charset ANSI SQLBase Driver C WINDOWS SYSTEM QMGUP04 dll ServerName SERVER1 Database SQLDB Lo
187. ine to the dbwindow section using lower case characters only dbdir c id4k customer sdata 2 104 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Note customer is the same directory name used in the D 4000 Configuration Builder when the customer diskettes were created b In the dbwservr section change the ser vername line to the following using upper and lower case letters as indicated ser vername SERVERI1 c In the dbwservr section change the dbdir line to the following using upper and lower case letters as indicated Note that customer is the same directory name used in the ID 4000 Configuration Builder when the customer diskettes were created dbdir C D4K customer SDATA d Delete C SQLBASE 20 Save SQL INI exit from the editor then reboot the system 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet Board Configuration Use the following configuration procedure if you have installed a 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet board as described on page 2 30 1 Power up the computer to display the DOS prompt 2 Insert the 3Com diskette provided with the board into A drive and log onto A drive 3 Type menu and press ENTER then type y and press ENTER to accept the terms of the license agreement and display a menu 4 Highlight NetWare DOS ODI Client and press ENTER 5 Highlight Configuration Diagnostic Troubleshooting and press ENTER 6 Highlight Configuration and Diagnostic Program and press ENTER 7 Highlight Co
188. ing Menu Type Use the following keys to switch to a different Fastback Plus menu type Key Combination Menu Type CTRL e Express CTRL s Short CTRL L Long You can also use the mouse to select the desired menu type from the Options menu Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Online Help Fastback Plus has extensive online help Display it by choosing Help from the Help menu History File Names For convenience in maintaining history files Fastback Plus uses the following parameters to name them e Drive e Backup date e Position of backup in backup schedule e Type of backup Figure 8 1 shows a typical history filename Backup type Position schedule Figure 8 1 Typical Fastback Plus History Filename Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software 8 12 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Appendix Contents Operation and Menu Diagrams ecccccsecccccseeceeeeeseeeaeeeeees A 3 SOL Base Reserved WOAS sa ccstccasesvavscasasbesssequdan cates aAA A 10 TX 2000 Terminology Controls and Indicators A 12 PassWord OVT rid era a E A 14 ID 4000 Serial Number Registration Form cceeeeeee A 15 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix Appendix Operation and Menu Diagrams On the following pages are operation and menu diagrams to aid in operating and navigating within the D 4000 applications
189. ining a group of statements in the INI file It usually indicates a specific aspect of the Windows and ID 4000 environment The brackets around the section name are required and the opening bracket must be in the leftmost column of the line keyname Defines the name of the statement Can contain any alphanumeric character but not punctuation In most cases the keyname must be followed by an equal sign value Defines the setting for the keyname Can contain any integer string or quoted string using alphanumeric characters A keyname without a value means use the default value 5 16 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files ADJ UST INI ADJUST INI is located in the C D4K directory ADJUST INI File Contents ADJUST IMAGE DefaultPicture portrait bmp AdjustmentValue 3 AddDevice HP LaserJet IIIS Transparency 0 FontName Times New Roman True Type FontSize 200 AOL INI AOL INI is located in the C ID4K directory It defines multiple area of interest scanning for the CS 5001 scanner and is used only when multiple area of interest scanning is enabled in ESMS INI Coordinates of the areas scanned are specified in pixels and are relative to the overall area of interest defined in ESMS INI AOLINI File Contents Scanner AOI Num Num AOI Number of Areas of Interest to Capture 0 means don t do AOI capture each image as usual AOL View Show the User the view of
190. ion o mjw fef Figure 2 30 Magtek MT 80 Default Switch Settin gs 4800 Baud 1 Stop Bit Odd Parity Laminator Setup After turning the laminator on and waiting a few minutes for it to reach operating temperature check the thermometer Figure 2 31 If it is not 275 F turn the temperature potentiometer in the appropriate direction with a small screwdriver Wait a few minutes for the temperature to stabilize then recheck and adjust again if necessary if Figure 2 31 Laminator Temperature Adjustment 2 42 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Intermec 3000A Barcode Labeler Setup Connect the Intermec bar code label printer to serial port or 2 The factory settings are 9600 baud stop bit 7 data bits and even parity If necessary other values can be set via the switch Figure 2 32 on the rear of the printer and following tables Baud Rate Sw 1 Sw 2 Sw 3 110 on o 150 on o 300 on n e 1200 2400 4800 9600 ot off off Media Type Continuous on _ Resolution Sw 11 0 010 in 0 005 in Self Strip Adapter Use with rk off on _ off off F Bits Sw 6 2 on 2 Par it Even p y OMAN me Figure 2 32 Intermec Bar Code Label Printer Switch 2 43 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Sony 610 Black and White Thermal Printer Setup 1 Unpack the printer and s
191. ion and settings 6 38 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Microsoft Diagnostics MSD If the NCR 3333 diagnostics described in the previous section fail to identify a system problem but you suspect that one exists run Microsoft Diagnostics MSD MSD provides diagnostics for the following e Computer e Disk drives e Memory e LPT ports e Video e COM ports e Network e IRQ status e DOS Version e TSR programs e Mouse e Device drivers Use the following steps to run MSD l Turn on the computer and wait for the DOS prompt to appear If you are running Windows or another program close it to display the DOS prompt Type msd and press ENTER then wait until the MSD main menu Figure 6 3 appears Select the item you want to diagnose and view the information displayed When you are finished viewing press ENTER or ESC to return to the main menu Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed to view other items Press F3 to exit from MSD File Utilities Help Computer l Disk Drives A B C Memory 640K 23552K Ext LPT Ports 1 1024K XMS Video i COM Ports 1 Network i No Network IRQ Status OS Version l MS DOS Version 6 20 TSR Programs Mouse i Not Detected 8 20 Device Drivers Other Adapters i Press ALT for menu or press highlighted letter or F3 to quit MSD MSD4 BMP Figure 6 3 MSD Main Menu 6 39 Polaroid ID 4000
192. ipment covers and servicing equipment Tools and Equipment Required e Video Photometer P N 13149 DP Gentest diskette 13437 Oscilloscope 40 MHz Oscilloscope Probe Tektronix 6131 P N CPS 212 Multimeter DVM Final Assembly Alignment Gauge P N 13443 Color Calibration Card P N 1B2195A Centronics Cable P N 1A5556A Calibrating the CI 5000 with ImagePrint Use the procedure below whenever a new color film recorder is installed on the ID 4000 or whenever the image has black borders image does not fill the frame area 1 Exit Windows to display the DOS prompt 2 Log into the DPALETTE directory by typing cd dpalette and pressing ENTER 3 Start ImagePrint by typing imprnt and pressing ENTER 4 Choose Film Type from the Configure menu then choose uvfastp1 from the Film Type menu 5 Select Camera Adjust from the Configure menu 4 33 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 6 Select Print Calibration Image wait for image exposure on the film recorder then time and peel the calibration image Figure 4 36 Return to the Camera Adjust menu and select Calibrate Camera Orient the print with the long tick marks to the left Figure 4 36 and count the number of tick marks between the wide end of each white wedge and the point where the wedge runs off the edge of the image area Add 5 to each tick mark count and enter the resulting values for Left Length Top Le
193. ities xr yr xg yg xb yb Chromaticities 0 670 0 330 0 210 0 710 0 140 0 080 ID3000 3x3 The following is for the larger 3x3 target Size 3 3 White 1 1 Gray80 1 3 Gray60 2 1 2 3 Gray40 2 2 Gray20 3 3 Black 3 1 Skin 1 2 DarkSkin 3 2 The following are the CIELAB values Lab 1 1 96 00 0 00 0 00 Lab 2 1 66 67 0 00 0 00 Lab 3_1 20 44 0 00 0 00 Lab 1 2 66 37 13 04 17 02 Lab 2 2 51 61 0 00 0 00 Lab 3 2 38 02 12 19 14 39 Lab 1 3 81 35 0 00 0 00 Lab 2 3 66 67 0 00 0 00 Lab 3 3 35 98 0 00 0 00 Macbeth vertical The following is for the Macbeth chart oriented with the white square in the upper left Size 4 6 White 1 1 Gray80 1 2 Gray60 1 3 Gray40 1 4 Gray20 1 5 Black 1 6 DarkSkin 4 1 Skin 4 2 The following are the CIELAB values of the full Macbeth chart Lab 1 1 96 00 0 00 0 00 Lab 1 2 81 35 0 00 0 00 Lab 1 3 66 67 0 00 0 00 Lab 1 4 51 61 0 00 0 00 Lab 1 5 35 98 0 00 0 00 Lab 1 6 20 44 0 00 0 00 Lab 2 1 29 66 27 38 51 12 Lab 2 2 55 48 41 13 33 65 Lab 2 3 41 22 50 91 25 96 Lab 2 4 81 35 3 96 79 13 Lab 2 5 51 61 48 93 15 78 Lab 2 6 51 61 21 67 26 62 Lab 3 1 61 74 27 57 58 23 Lab 3 2 41 22 17 58 43 13 Lab 3 3 51 61 42 88 14 75 Lab 3 4 30 88 26 04 23 48 Lab_3_ 5 72 43 28 45 59 50 Lab_ 3 6 71 62 12 33 67 07 Lab 4 1 38 02 12 19 14 39 Lab 4 2 66 37 13 04 17 02 Lab 4 3 51 04 0 33 22 15 Lab 4 4 43 21 16 89 21 98 Lab 4 5 56 39 12 58 25 46 La
194. itten by every workstation install 4 Edit the ImageDrives line in the TOG section of TOG INI to include all drives used for storing images Use the following drive list order Number of Number of Hard Drive Hard Drive Partitions Partitions 12 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement 5 Ifthe system uses a TX 2000 V Y 300 color thermal printer use the Badge Designer to open all existing badge designs and verify that bitmaps are not distorted Some badges may require redesign because of changes in pixel proportions 6 Use the following steps to edit WIN INI as necessary a Ifthe system has a CI 5000 Plus film recorder edit the CI 5000 EPT section to match the following CI 5000 EPT Exposure 6 CamerabackFilm1 3 b Ifthe system has a TX 2000 VY 300 color thermal printer add the following line to the end of the PrinterPorts section VY 300 HiRes T X2000 LPT 1 1 5 45 VY 300 PAL TX2000 LPT 1 15 45 VY 300 Square T X2000 LPT1 15 45 c Add the following lines to the end of the Devices section VY 300 HiRes T X2000 LPT 1 VY 300 PAL T X2000 LPT 1 d Edit the intl section to match the following intl iT LZero 1 7 Verify that CONFIG SYS matches the following and edit the file if necessary DEVICE C DOS SETVER EXE DEVICE C WINDOWS HIMEM SYS DEVICE C WINDOW S EMM386 EXE NOEMS FRAME E000 X A000 C7FF WIN C800 EOFF DOS HIGH UMB FILES 30 STACKS 9 256 BUFF
195. iver See Strobe does not flash below Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Input Unit Portrait Camera Problems Continued Problem Possible Cause Screen turns blank Input device changed after immediately after Capture a screen has been designed or Expose button 1s chosen no image captured Strobe does not flash No power to input unit or power switch off Faulty strobe Faulty strobe power cable or connection Faulty input unit fuse 6 6 Corrective Action 1 Open Database Screen Designer 2 Modify the screen associated with the capture problem 3 Click on each portrait field to bring it into the work area 4 Highlight the field type as Portrait and press the TAB key This resets the capture device setting 5 Save the modifications Verify that the input unit is connected to AC power and the power switch is on Verify 5VDC at strobe power connector If present press the manual flash button on strobe If strobe does not flash replace strobe Verify 5VDC at strobe power connector If not present check cable connections and tighten or replace as necessary Check fuse inside input unit base and replace if necessary Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Input Unit Portrait Camera Problems Continued Problem Strobe does not flash Possible Cause Faulty input unit power Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Co
196. k the system lock Figure 2 9 b Remove the three cabinet retaining screws c Slide the cover backward slightly then lift it off System Lock Retaining Screws Figure 2 9 Removing the AT amp T Globalyst Cover 2 21 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 3 Unpack and set up the following boards and install each in the specified computer slot Setup Slot Board Instructions Figure 2 10 BOCA IO AT board Page 2 30 l Cardinal SNAPPlus Framegrabber board 2 26 2 Polaroid Support board 2 25 3 Second BOCA serial port if required 2 30 4 Adaptec SCSI controller used with Nisca printer 2 31 5 Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI controller 2 27 6 Ethernet LAN board 1f required 2 30 7 4 Reinstall the computer cover After configuring and installing the boards proceed to Input and Output Device Setup on page 2 34 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 1 Slot 5 Figure 2 10 AT amp T Globalyst Slot Numbers 2 22 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration IBM ValuePoint Model 6482 Configuration Use the steps below to install drives and boards in the IBM ValuePoint 6482 This system requires no initial setup prior to drive and board installation 1 Unpack the computer monitor and keyboard from their shipping boxes 2 Remove the computer cover as follows a Ifthe computer cover is locked systems are shipped unlocked use the key provided with the computer to unlock the c
197. kage Package packager exe picture PBrush Paintbrush Picture Paintbrush Picture pbrush exe picture Polaroid StartUpDir C ID4K PrinterPorts CI 5000 DPAL EPT 15 45 VY 300 TX2000 LPT1 15 45 VY 300 Square TX2000 LPT1 15 45 VY 300 HiRes TX2000 LPT1 15 45 VY 300 PAL TX2000 LPT2 15 45 Devices CI 5000 DPAL EPT VY 300 TX2000 LPT1 VY 300 Square TX2000 LPT1 VY 300 HiRes TX2000 LPT1 VY 300 PAL TX2000 LPT2 CI 5000 EPT Exposure 6 CameraBackFilm1 3 WINFILE INI WINFILE INI File Contents Settings Window 0 0 640 480 1 dir1 0 0 500 279 1 1 3 0 201 1905 250 A 5 49 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files 5 50 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair and Maintenance Contents Symp On TaD lt n er enn ae een 6 3 System Power Up Problems 2002 scagesssaseeccno ra aa A 6 3 Input Unit Portrait Camera Problems ccccecccceecceeeeeeeeee 6 4 Color Scanner PLODICINS eoin e eeadiae eee 6 9 Badge Printing Quality Problems cc eeccccseeeceeeeeeeeaeeees 6 18 signature Tablet Problems cccccceseeeseasececnaeerenensescnass 6 19 SCSI Communication Problems cccccccccseeceeeeseeceeeeeeeenees 6 20 CI 5000 Color Film Recorder Problems ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 6 21 TX 2000 V Y 300 Color Thermal Printer Pro
198. key to save the values 6 Press the End key again to save the setup and restart the computer Settings Current Current New Z Flex Disk Interf Yes AT Drive Interface Yes At Bus Speed Fast Parallel Port PE Serial Port 1 COM1 Serial Port 2 COM 486 Internal Cache Second Level Cache BIOS Cacheable Parallel Bidirect Boot from Flex Disk gt gt gt gt gt NNNNNNNN gt O 0O OO OOO B A a eg ge A Setting Disable F Enable Move up down a selection Move left right a selection ESC Return to the first screen Enter the new setting END Save and return to the first scree Figure 6 2 Software Controlled Registers and Memory Setup NCR 3333 Computer Diagnostics Perform this diagnostic procedure when you suspect a problem with basic setup information memory or hardware setup Note This procedure requires the C 3333 User Diagnostic Diskette Version 1 01 provided with NCR computers 1 Insert the C 3333 User Diagnostic Diskette in the A drive Then power up the computer or reboot if the computer is already on 2 Wait for the message Press lt F1 gt for DISKCOPY or any key to continue 3 P
199. kup 4 Restore all files excluding DOS and Fastback to the c drive Select No for replacing hidden files 5 Restore the database all files in the SDATA directory but not those in the IMG directory to the d drive 6 Restore the IMG directory to the e drive Fastback creates a full path in e for the IMG directory 10 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Restoring from an External Hard Drive If you backed up the ID 4000 files to an external hard drive use the appropriate procedure in Table 2 to restore the files Table 2 Restoring Files from an External Hard Drive Number of Partitions XCOPY Restoration Steps Use XCOPY with the appropriate s e and v switches to copy all files except those in the DOS and Fastback directory from the external hard drive to the c drive 1 Use XCOPY with the appropriate s e and v switches to copy all files except those in the DOS FASTBACK and SDATA directory from the external hard drive to the c drive 2 Use XCOPY to restore the SDATA directory containing the database and images to the d drive 1 Use XCOPY with the appropriate s e and v switches to copy all files except those in the DOS FASTBACK and SDATA directory from the external hard drive to the c drive 2 Use XCOPY to restore the database directory all files in the SDATA directory but not those in the IMG directory to the d drive 3 Use XCOPY to restore the IMG directory to
200. l port conflicts exist and that each port has a unique address If any conflicts exist make a note of them before continuing 7 Press ESC or ENTER to return to the MSD main menu then press F3 to exit from MSD If you noted any conflicts in steps 4 or 6 change port settings as necessary according to the System Configuration section of this manual Then repeat this procedure to verify that the conflicts have been eliminated COM Ports CONZ COM3 Port Address QO3F6H Baud Rate 2400 Parity None Data Bits stop Bits Carrier Detect CD Ring Indicator RI Data Set Ready DSR Clear To Send CTS UART Chip Used 002 PCX Figure 6 6 Serial COM Port Settings SCSI Diagnostics Use one of the procedures below to display a list of all devices on the SCSI chain If the system has a CI 5000 color film recorder 1 Start Windows and display the Windows Program Manager 2 Open the Main program group and select Control Panel 6 41 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 3 Select Printers from the Control Panel then CI 5000 on EPL then Setup then About and SCSI Device List to display a SCSI device list Figure 6 7 4 Verify that the SCSI IDs are correct and make any necessary corrections by changing the settings on the devices The System Configuration section of this manual contains SCSI ID setting instructions for each device 5 Return to the Windows Program Manager by
201. laroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the Computer Power Supply Use the following procedure to replace a faulty computer power supply 1 Turn off the ID 4000 system and disconnect the power cord from the computer 2 Remove the cabinet from the computer as described on page 7 9 3 After noting their locations disconnect all DC power connectors from the main board and the drives 4 Remove the screws securing the power supply to the cabinet base Figure 7 8 5 Remove the screws securing the power supply to the rear of the cabinet 6 Push the power supply slightly toward the front of the cabinet to disengage the grounding spring from the rear of the cabinet 7 Disconnect the power switch assembly from the cabinet as follows a Turn the power switch on b Remove the three screws securing the switch bezel and remove the bezel c Remove the two screws securing the switch to the cabinet d Remove the switch grounding screw from the cabinet front Power Supply Securing Screw Power Supply Securing Screw Figure 7 8 Power Supply Securing Screws 7 12 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement 8 Lift the power supply out of the cabinet 9 To install the replacement power supply reverse the removal procedure Caution To observe FCC regulations be sure to route the power switch cable exactly the same way as the original and replace any cabl
202. le now appears select NO and press ENTER 16 Press ENTER to copy the files 17 Follow the on screen instructions 18 Press ENTER to begin the test 19 Remove the diskette from drive A and press ENTER 20 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation 21 If the D 4000 computer is an IBM ValuePoint 466DX2 Dp edit CONFIG SYS to enable EMM386 EXE Then reboot the system 2 81 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration DOS Windows SQLBase Server Installation This installation procedure is for local standalone SQLBase server databases only Note To use SQL as the database the D 4000 system must be configured for SQLBase database This procedure has two components 1 installing the software and 2 setting up the database structure Installing the Software 1 If Windows is not running start it by typing win at the DOS prompt and pressing ENTER 2 Pull down the Program Manager File menu and select Run 3 Insert SQLBase Server for Windows diskette 1 into drive A 4 Type a sbrsetup in the Run dialog box and click on OK to display the SQLBase DataBase Server for Windows dialog box 5 Choose Install SQLBase for Windows using Defaults 6 Accept C GUPTA DIR by pressing ENTER 7 Follow on screen instructions for inserting the remaining SQLBase Server for Windows diskettes 8 At the next dialog box click on Continue to modify the file 9 Click on OK to save th
203. lect Display from the System Information list 5 Select Other from the list of display types Other is usually at the bottom of the list requiring you to use the Down arrow to reach it 6 Select ET4000 640 x 480 32768 7 Choose Accept Configuration to return to the DOS prompt 8 Start Windows by typing win and pressing ENTER 9 Minimize the Cirrus Logic Utilities window then delete it by pressing the DELETE key and choosing Yes to confirm your action 10 Install the following software as appropriate for the system Installation or Config Software Instructions Cardinal SnapPlus Windows driver Close Up 2 68 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installation or Config Software Instructions 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet configuration 2 105 ID 4000 core software 2 107 When the software installation is complete proceed to System Calibration on page 2 120 and Functional Check on page 2 120 ESMS INI and AOI INI for multiple area of 2 112 interest scanning Installing the CSS 462 IDE IO Device Driver If the IDE IO device driver on the CSS 462 486 ESP M computer becomes accidentally disabled or deleted reinstall it by running VLIDE EXE on the Promise PDC 20230 IDE device driver diskette Software Installation AT amp T Globalyst 1 Power up the system 2 When the setup screens appear verify that the settings match the following recommended values System Setup
204. lled in the computer 1 Shut off the entire ID 4000 system according to the operating instructions 2 Unplug the computer power cable from the back of the computer 3 Disconnect all other cables from the back of the computer 4 Carefully unpack the replacement computer 5 Remove the cabinets from the replacement computer and the computer being replaced as described on page 7 9 6 Move the hard drive and circuit boards from the computer being replaced to the new computer If necessary see Slot Configuration in Section 2 of this manual for the proper location of circuit boards 7 7 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement 10 11 IZ Connect all cables to the rear of the computer according to ID 4000 Cable Connections in Section 2 of this manual Power up the system according to the operating instructions Check the computer CMOS setup as described in Configuring the NCR System 333 CMOS in Section 2 of this manual Note Check the CMOS setup every time a computer or the PCB board 1s replaced Perform the functional check described in Section 2 of this manual and perform any calibration procedures indicated by the performance check Reinstall the computer cabinets Repackage the replaced computer for return shipment 7 8 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Removing and Installing the Computer Cabinet Use the following steps to
205. llowing settings then choose OK to retu rn to the Terminal window Connector COM port connected to encoder Baud Rate 4800 Data Bits 7 Stop Bits l Parity Odd Flow Control Hardware 4 Pass an encoded card through the card encoder and verify that the correct encoded data appears in the Terminal window If the correct data appears the encoder is functioning and communicating normally Exit from Windows Terminal If the data does not appear verify that the port setting in the MT 80 section of ESMS INI is correct Also verify that the encoder s internal switch settings described in Section 2 of this manual match the values in ESMS INI Make any necessary corrections and repeat this test If the ESMS INI settings and the internal encoder switch settings are correct but the encoder does not function replace the encoder 110 300 600 1200 2 O24000 4800 9600 19200 Data Bits Stop Bits Os Os 7 O8 lor O15 02 Parity Flow Control Connector None Xon Xoff None COMI Odd COM2 O Even O Mark Space _ Parity Check _ Carrier Detect Figure 6 11 Communications Dialog Box 6 48 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Modem Diagnostics Front Panel Lights Modem diagnosis may require interpretation of the LEDs on the front of the modem When on modem using error control protocol such as V 42 or MNP When on modem is transmitting or configured t
206. lspx The server name must be unique You can choose SERVERI through SERVER8 dbname demo sqlspx The database name must be unique You can change demo to a title of your choice cache 2000 Use default value 2000 dbdir db sqlbase Use volume name where SQL application is located For example dbdir Network volume name sqlbase Modifications to winclient dll in Windows SECTION Note In the SQL in1 file there is a header defined as Windows The following sections must be modified File structure Windows winclient Use this section to specify Windows client workstation parameters that are independent of the communications protocol s being used clientname WinUser uncomment the following line to increase the default connecttimeout if you are having problems connecting to databases on the NLM server connecttimeout 40 winclient dll This section is for the Windows client workstations Here you will specify the COMmunication DLL s that the Windows application s intend to use Use sqldbw for the LOCAL single user database engine dbwindow exe sqlwsv for the LOCAL multi tasking database engine dbwservr exe sqlnbiow to access a REMOTE database using NetBios sqlspxw from a Netware 3 11 client to access a REMOTE database using SPX communications sqltifsw to access a REMOTE database server using TCP IP communications from FTP Software sqltipcw to access a REMOTE da
207. m the Options menu choose Preferences e Choose Software Compression for Speed f Follow on screen instructions to save the settings and exit from the setup program 2 65 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration g Test the Trakker drive for proper operation Note The Trakker drive does not support ID 4000 import or export for text data or for text and images import export data transport 17 Install or configure the following software as appropriate for the system Installation or Config Software Instruction S Cardinal SnapPlus Windows driver ID 4000 core software ESMS INI and AOI INI for multiple area of 2 112 interest scanning 18 Edit AUTOEXEC BAT as follows a Change the line SET TEMP C WINDOWS TEMP to SET TEMP C DOS b Delete the line C WINDOWS SETRES CLMODE MoO c Delete the extra REM s from the file d Move the line WIN to the end of the file 2 66 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 19 If the system contains a 3C509B C Ethernet card perform the following steps If it does not contain this Enternet card go to step 20 a Reboot the system b Connect the Ethernet cable to the card to allow proper operation of the configuration program c Edit CONFIG SYS to REM out the line containing DWCFGMG SYS a Plug and Play driver d Insert the disk supplied with Ethernet card into drive A and log onto the A drive e Type menu
208. n and Adjustment Adjust Adjust Adjust gt scanner gt scanner gt scanner color sharpness tone Calibrate scanner Color Film Recorder Calibration Electrical Auto ImagePrint Final COS4 J gt luminance gt calibration Assembly Adjustment Adjust t Alignment oisimen Image Position Adjustment Adjust image position for diecutter Figure 4 1 ID 4000 Calibration Sequence Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Calibrating the Input Unit Use the following procedures to calibrate the input unit for ambient lighting conditions and camera focus Perform these procedures under any of the following conditions e Dark or light live or captured frozen portrait e Camera or strobe replacement e Cardinal board replacement e Camera lens replacement e General image quality problems e Ambient lighting change Calibrating the live image and the captured frozen image can be performed by the customer using the procedures in ID 4000 for Windows User Guide Setting Up for Calibration To prepare for portrait camera calibration you must display the camera Calibration dialog box and set up the calibration target as follows 1 Ifthe Data Entry window Figure 4 2 is not on the screen start the ID 4000 and log in or choose the E
209. n do not remove the four screws holding the CRT mount 2 Carefully move the CRT until the tennis court image is aligned with the scribed marks on the alignment gauge Figure 4 42 3 Tighten the screws holding the CRT mount 4 Verify that the image is still aligned with the gauge If necessary repeat steps 1 4 to achieve alignment Top Toward Digital Palette CRT Image Border Inner Ground Glass Scribe Mark Outer Ground Glass Scribe Mark DPALIGN PCX Figure 4 42 Scribe Marks on the Alignment Gauge Autoluminance Adjustment Perform this procedure if autoluminance errors occur or after replacing the CI 5000 logic board or monitor board The objective is to obtain a Gentest reading of 200 with the photometer level at 6 0 f 1 3 0 0 1mV Setup 1 Turn on the CI 5000 and allow it to warm up for at least 15 minutes 2 Cover the CI 5000 during the adjustments to prevent ambient light from affecting the readings 4 4 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Procedure l 2 Rotate the filter wheel to the clear no filter position Bring up the main menu Press F9 to display the test adjust menu Press F2 autoluminant adjustment to access the dark current adjust menu Follow the Gentest procedure setting the dark current to 4 by adjusting VR3 on the logic board Figure 4 43 The dark current level appears on the Gentest menu End dark current adj
210. n DIN cable to the VIDEO IN jack 3 Connect the 4 pin end of the 4 pin 8 pin DIN cable to the S VIDEO OUT jack on the back of the TX 2000 printer 4 Power up the ID 4000 system If Windows starts exit from Windows to the DOS prompt 5 Insert the Cardinal SNAPshot and SNAPtest diskette into drive A and log onto drive A Type snaptest in and press ENTER then press the space bar until S Video Input appears in the lower right corner of the screen 6 Display the TX 2000 main menu Figure 6 24 by pressing the MENU button inside the control cover Figure 6 25 on the front of the TX 2000 PRINT MODE MULTI MODE PRINT AREA OPTION CLEAR COMMENT I F INIT INPUT Figure 6 24 TX 2000 Main Menu INPUT button PICTURE button MENU button SELECT buttons SUB MENU button Figure 6 25 TX 2000 Front Panel Control Cover and Controls 6 59 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 7 Verify that all menu settings match Figure 6 26 To view a sub menu press the MENU button on the front control panel until the arrow points to the desired sub menu Then press the SUB MENU button Main Menu 1 PRINT MODE PRINT MODE gt gt PRINT COUNT 1 MULTI MODE OFF PRINT AREA OFF OPTION VIDEG CLEAR ONE TOUCH PRINT OFF COMMENT PRINT QUALITY NORM I F INIT PRINT RESOL NORM INPUT INPUT VIDEO 2 MULTI MODE gt gt MULTI OFF 3 PRINT AREA gt AREA ADJ TOP BOTTOM
211. n access with this procedure you must have the following files from a default system on a diskette or somewhere on the system s hard drive e APW ENC e IDUA ENC To gain access to the Application Builder 1 Rename the active Application Builder password file C ID4K APW ENC as C ID4K APW OLD 2 Copy the default file APW ENC from the diskette to the C ID4K directory This sets the Application Builder password to POLAROID To gain access to the ID 4000 application 1 Rename the active ID 4000 application template password and user file IDUA ENC as IDUA OLD This file is located in the same directory as the lock file typically c ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA 2 Copy the default file IDUA ENC from the diskette to the directory containing IDUA OLD This sets the username to CSD and the password to POLAROID After regaining access to the system return the existing files to their original state A 14 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix ID 4000 Serial Number Registration Form Please copy this page On the copy write the description and serial number of each component in the system being installed or serviced If the system is unique sketch the configuration on the back of the sheet After completing the installation make a copy of the completed form for your records and mail or fax one copy to Polaroid Corporation Dept Al6 201 Burlington Rd Beford MA 01730 Attention Robert Pentz Fax 617 386 5611 Date Technician
212. n the D 4000 application Do not install the Inforite software packaged with the tablet DataCard B amp W PVC Printer ImageCard I Setup Connect the DataCard black and white PVC printer ImageCard I to parallel port 1 or 2 The DataCard PVC printer has no switches The default configuration will be used from the NOVRAM Cabling is from a standard Centronics parallel port Print control 1s set up for roller cleaning and upon startup the FAULT LED will flash rapidly to tell the operator to insert a cleaning card If necessary use the following tables to interpret the LEDs on the front of the printer Green Center LED Amber Bottom LED Action Action State Indication Required State Indication Required command or printing card steady steady Receiving data None Rollers require Insert cleaning Ready to print Insert also flashing ID card card rapidly If amber LED is checkerboard also flashing card will be rapidly printed checkerboard card will be printed After connecting and configuring the printer install the printer driver and edit ESMS INI as described in DataCard Black and White PVC Printer Software Setup on page 2 118 2 45 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration DataCard Color PVC Printer ImageCard II Setup Setting up the DataCard Color PVC ImageCard II printer requires these three procedures 1 Unpacking connecting and loading the printer 2 Powering up and tes
213. names in app builder so make sure the mapping of the drives do not change Example of dbnserver and dbnSsrvr contents after modifications dbnSsrvr This section is for the SQLBase NLM database server 5 user version This is a NetWare Loadable Module NLM and is loaded on the NetWare file server You can specify which communication protocol s the server can use as well as which protocol s a database can use servername server2 sqlspx 2 98 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration dbname demo2 sqlspx cache 2000 dbdir vol3 sqlbase dbnservr This section is for the SQLBase NLM database server This is a NetWare Loadable Module NLM and is loaded on the NetWare file server You can specify which communication protocol s the server can use as well as which protocol s a database can use 9 servername server2 sqlspx dbname demo2 sqlspx cache 2000 dbdir vol3 sqlbase Novell Netware Client Side Software Setup The certified interface to the protocol is ODI For Connecting to a Novell file server the protocol is IPX SPX The necessary files are IPX SPX NETX EXE or XMSNETX EXE ODI LSL COM IPXODI COM The specific driver included with the LAN card These files are executed in the following order 1 Isl 2 The specific card driver 3 ipxodi 4 netx To set up Windows to be Novell Network Enabled go to the C WINDOWS directory and run SETUP In the setup program
214. nce values shown in the following tables nee Red Green Blue Red Green Blue Red Green Blue Red Green Blue Red Green Blue After printing one or more of the sample sets you choose the most satisfactory portrait from among them The ID 4000 then stores the color correction values necessary to achieve the appearance of the portrait you selected 4 13 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment If necessary you can also change the amount of color added or subtracted for obtaining the sample group to any of six different values In effect this provides you with a maximum of 162 color balance settings 27 x 6 from which to choose Color Adjustment Procedure 1 Ifthe Data Entry window Figure 4 12 is not on the screen start the ID 4000 and log in or choose the Exit button until the window appears 2 Choose the Administration button to display the Administration window Figure 4 13 old record or create new record enter user information in the VISIT Employee Number First Name Middle Initial C Preferred Name TUES_020 BMP Figure 4 12 Data Entry Window ID 4000 43 00 13 Administration Komere DB MANAGEMENT Handle database tasks Export Data Transport Batch Administration Screen ADMIN BMP Figure 4 13 Administration Window 4 14 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 3 Choose
215. nd to display the Output Device Calibration dialog box Figure 4 17 Note Printing the sample color group may require a few minutes Do not choose any buttons until the image prints 11D4000 Output Device Calibration Red Not Cnanged Choose the picture you like the most and press the corresponding button Press Cancel to quit or Back to make a new set of pictures ODCALCOL BMP Figure 4 17 Output Device Calibration Dialog Box 4 16 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 10 If the printed color sample group contains a satisfactory image select it by choosing its position in the Output Device Calibration dialog box This calibrates the system and returns you to the System Management window If none of the images is satisfactory choose the Back button Then print and evaluate a different color sample group No Red Change More Red Less Red by returning to step 8 To return to a sample set printed earlier without printing it again choose the Print Set menu Then choose the desired print set from the menu The number of the print set on the menu corresponds to the number printed on the printed sample sheet If necessary you can change the amount of color added or subtracted for creating the sample set by moving the Adjustment Value slider bar in the Color Correction dialog box before you print another color sample group To calibrate additional printers for portrait colo
216. nector 7 Remove the side rails from the old tape drive and install them on the new replacement drive in the original orientation 8 Reinstall the floppy drive and the cabinet and reconnect the power cord to the computer Figure 7 14 Removing the F loppy Disk Drive 7 20 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Section 8 Third Party Software Contents Crystal Reports 0 0 ecccccsecccccseeceeseeeceeseecesaeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 8 3 Starting Crystal Reports from Window6 ccccceececeeeseeeeeeeeeees 8 3 Creatine a New REDOT sacoms cocaine ented S 8 4 Editing Report Designer Fields ccc cceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 8 5 GS Oi eeu ae T E I T A TT 8 8 Starting Close Up Host nsennneeennseennseensssensssersssensssrssssessserssse 8 8 Staring Close UPC IMOLG aiaa 8 9 Connecting Host and Remote Systems cccecccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 9 Ending a Close Up Session neinei E O a 8 9 Fastback PIUS aisia e ie e a a eT 8 10 Starner astoac k PIU Sic setsce non soed we eee cae teaee Sees 8 10 Closing Fastback Plus 2 0 ccccccseccccceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeceeseeseeeaenees 8 10 Chano ma Menu Py De sacisisnteduuidintsSasSncdedes upetebontetvinededeloatandndelie 8 10 Onine woo eee enon nearer Rtn ere Peano ee enn errr eee re ae 8 11 PUTS CO eye le UN niles 5a Sect aca cecea anaes aero acca 8 11 8 1 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Polaroid ID 4000 S
217. ner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem Picture fails to eject from scanner motor runs until timeout and computer displays the message The picture is stuck in the scanner Scanner fails to reverse and eject the picture picture falls into lower compartment message Scanner did not grab the picture Reinsert the picture and try again appears on the computer Scanner motor continues to run after image has been ejected system times out The picture is stuck in the scanner appears on the computer screen Possible Cause Picture jammed in scanner Dirt or debris jamming drive roll Dirt or debris blocking upper photointerrupter Incorrect head or foot settings in SprintScan software Loose or broken drive belt or faulty upper photointerrupter Faulty lower interrupter connection to main controller board Faulty lower photointerrupter Dirt or debris blocking lower photointerrupter Faulty lower photointerrupter 6 13 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Remove picture Remove dirt or debris Clear photointerrupter See Adjusting the Scanning Field in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Reconnect lower photointerrupter Return scanner f
218. nfigure Adapter and press ENTER 2 105 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 8 Set the following values as shown I O Base Address 300h Interrupt 10 Boot Prom Disabled Transceiver AS appropriate Network Driver Optimization DOS Client Maximum Modem Speed 9600 Baud 6 Choose OK highlight Exit and press ENTER Then follow on screen instructions to return to the DOS prompt 7 Log into the root directory by typing cd and pressing ENTER 8 Use a text editor to move the Network section of AUTOEXEC BAT to a new file named STARTNET BAT also in the root directory 9 In place of the Network section in AUTOEXEC BAT insert the following line call startnet 10 Save AUTOEXEC BAT and reboot the system Bar Code F ont Installation If the system being installed prints bar codes on badges or labels use the following steps to install the PrintBar bar code fonts and font utility 1 Insert the bar code font diskette into the A drive and run A SETUP EXE from the Windows Program Manager 2 Accept the suggested path for the fonts C PBW by choosing OK 3 When a message indicates that installation is complete choose OK 4 Minimize the PrintBar group 5 Choose the Main applications group choose Control Panel then choose Fonts to display the Fonts dialog box 6 Choose the Add button to display the Add Fonts dialog box then choose the C PBW directory the bar code font directory from the
219. ng ENTER The LED blinks during exposure 6 Verify that the CI 5000 operates properly and produces an acceptable image If it does not see the troubleshooting section of this manual After taking corrective action repeat this procedure to verify proper operation 4 45 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Adjusting Skew on the TX 1500 Printer The Polaroid color thermal printer is very sensitive to transportation This sensitivity combined with extensive use may cause the printer to develop skew Skew occurs during the printing process and is visible mostly in the data area of the ID card If the letters and numbers are not sharp skew adjustment is probably required Print skew appears in the form of yellow and or cyan color areas near any black characters or lines as shown in Figure 4 47 There are typically two types of skewing called A and B for reference Figures 4 48 and 4 49 Print Start Print End Figure 4 47 Thermal Printer Skew Yellow Figure 4 48 Case A Skew Yellow Figure 4 49 Case B Skew 4 46 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment To adjust the skew proceed as follows I 2 Place the printer on a horizontal flat surface Completely turn off the ID 4000 system then turn on only the color thermal printer to prevent other system components from affecting skew Press the Print key on the printer to make a test p
220. ngle 0 Scanner AOI Field Type S Field Name SFIELD Iml X1 71 Iml_ Y1 242 Im1_ Ht 50 Iml Wd 100 Scanner AOI2 Field _Type P Field Name PFIELD1 Im X1 30 Iml_ Y1 239 Iml Ht 81 Iml_ Wd 64 Scanner AOI3 Field _Type P Field Name PFIELD2 Im X1 30 Iml_Y1 100 Im1 Ht 192 Iml Wd 128 Multiple Area of Interest Scanning Restrictions D 4000 multiple area of interest scanning has the following restrictions Only one scan definition is supported All images scanned will follow the directions for multiple images It is not possible to have different scanning requirements for different screens An error will occur if the area designated cannot be cut from the scanned image The routine will return an empty image The error occurs when trying to store an empty image field The coordinates of the scan must also be valid or an empty image will be returned and an error will occur when trying to store the image 2 117 Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Specifying Film Type for the CI 5000 Plus The default film type setting for the CI 5000 Plus color film recorder is Polaroid Polacolor EID Ultraviolet instant film To obtain accurate colors with a different film type use the following procedure to change the film recorder setup 1 Display the Windows Program Manager 2 Open the Main program group open the Control Panel and double click on Pri
221. ngth Right Length and Bottom Length Adding 5 causes the film recorder to overscan the image slightly compensating for small variations in the film Note Ifthe resulting value exceeds 40 enter 40 instead of the value The image in Figure 4 36 for example would result in the following entries Left Length 37 Top Length 33 Right Length 36 Bottom Length 38 Orient neti NN longest langen sill toward left gt Figure 4 36 Typical ImagePrint Calibration Image 4 34 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 9 Accept the calibration settings by pressing F10 then save the configuration file to make the settings permanent Note If you make another print after calibrating it will not reflect the new settings The calibration image uses the absolute or unadjusted camera back settings If this procedure fails to correct a black border problem proceed to electrical final assembly alignment of the CRT as described in the next section Electrical F inal Assembly Alignment of the CRT Use this procedure whenever a black border cannot be eliminated with the ImagePrint utility as described in the previous section Also use this procedure if images printed by the CI 5000 film recorder are tilted or have a distorted aspect ratio Setup 1 Turn off all power to the system Warning Be sure the system is completely turned off to avoid damage to the system 2 Disconnect the power and
222. nicians can operate it by telephone from the repair facility for diagnosis and for editing or updating system files Remote operation requires the ID 4000 remote diagnostics software and the optional modem If you are at the customer s site see Starting Close Up Host in the Third Party Software section of this manual for setting up the customer s system for remote diagnostics If necessary you can also provide these instructions to the customer by telephone if you want to perform diagnostics from the repair facility If you are at a repair facility also see Starting Close Up Remote and Connecting Host and Remote Systems in the Third Party Software section of this manual for starting and using remote diagnostics from the repair facility 6 50 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Repair and Maintenance Procedures Resetting the CI 5000 Film Recorder If the CI 5000 color film recorder is not working properly it should be initialized by resetting Reset the CI 5000 in either of two ways e Turn off the D 4000 system as described in the User Guide exit from the ID 4000 application and Windows before turning off power to the components then restart the system e Momentarily press the reset button on the back of the CI 5000 If the CI 5000 fails to operate normally after resetting refer to the CI 5000 symptom table on page 6 21 for possible causes TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer L
223. nit base 6 4 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Adjust display controls brightness contrast etc to obtain image Refer to Section 2 to verify board settings Replace Cardinal board Corrective Action Check 5V connections and tighten if necessary Check input unit and support board cable connections tighten if necessary Adjust L potentiometer to obtain image Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Input Unit Portrait Camera Problems Continued Problem No video image on screen black video continued Possible Cause Faulty lens or support board No power to camera Faulty camera No power to input unit base Improperly set Live image potentiometer on input unit base Missing CARDINAL DLL file Wrong video display driver blue video in SIBS Faulty strobe 6 5 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Verify that an aperture exists by looking into the lens If 5V connections are secure and an aperture exists verify lens opening signal by performing the support board strobe and lens diagnostics on page 6 45 Verify power to camera green power LED should be on If no power check cable connections and tighten if necessary Replace camera Check cables and tighten connections if necessary Adjust L potentiometer to obtain image Copy CARDINAL DLL to C ID4K SYS directory Install correct display dr
224. nly by VAR Application Builder systems and internal Polaroid Application Builder systems The lock file is used by the customer s Database Screen Designer and Badge Designer tools for storing database and badge format data When the ID 4000 is started the lock file also controls the functions and software features available to the user A lock file has four sections Header Controls the database record limit defines the system and identifies the customer the database type the connectivity in effect the log in passwords for the SQL database and the card formats HW Section Defines the hardware supported by each workstation A single lock file defines all the customer s workstations up to a maximum of 50 The HW section defines the application template SIBS SVS etc for each workstation the hardware key number for each workstation if hardware keys are used and the hardware connected to each workstation The link between the hardware and the lock file data is made by the workstation ID in the AUTOEXEC BAT file of each workstation SW Section Defines the global software purchased by the customer Each ID 4000 software module is sold only once no matter how many workstations the customer purchases The HW section of the lock file in combination with the SW section determines whether a workstation can use the software module For example a customer might buy the bar code label software and two bar code label printers In this case
225. nnections printed Wrong video settings Printing not possible Improperly loaded paper PAPER light flashing Paper supply exhausted Paper upside down Incorrect paper type Paper cassette not pushed all the way into the printer Folded or creased paper 6 26 Corrective Action Check all data cables make sure they are properly secured and in their proper connections Make sure that all cables are properly connected refer to the System Configuration section Make sure the settings on front panel are set accordingly The following lights should be ON POWER READY FRAME RGB Reload paper with full white face down Reload the thermal paper processor Turn paper over so that marked side faces up Load the correct paper C1500P Open paper cassette door push cassette inward until it stops then close the cassette door Load new paper Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer Problems Continued Problem Cannot print INK light flashing READY light flashing READY INK and PRINT lights all flashing Abnormal ID card colors Single black lines separating into green magenta and yellow lines Lines and bars printing instead of ID card image Possible Cause Thermal printer problem or uninitialized Ink cartridge door open Ink cartridge exhausted No ink cartridge installed Ink cartridge exhausted or cartridge paper cut or torn Printer not ready
226. nput value of each color along the horizontal axis darker to lighter and the output value along the vertical axis also darker to lighter A 45 degree straight line in the middle of the graph indicates completely neutral values what goes in is what comes out When a curve flattens out along the top of the graph detail is lost in the highlight areas Conversely detail is lost in the shadow areas when a curve flattens out along the bottom of the graph This effect is called clipping Tonescale Tables The basis for each tonescale setting is a complex tonescale table The Export and Import buttons allow custom tonescale tables to be created and installed For more information on this subject see the Appendix of the instructions provided with the scanner Polaroid CS 500i Scanner Tonescale gt Balance J Contrast IDSV007 BMP Figure 4 31 Tonescale Dialog Box 4 28 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Edit Boxes and Checkboxes The numbers in the Balance Contrast and Gamma edit boxes are linked mathematically The tonescale graph shows the combined effect of these values To adjust tonescale type a number in the appropriate edit box The Balance Contrast and or Gamma checkboxes must be checked If a checkbox is not checked its edit box is disabled and its value reverts to a neutral setting Balance You can enter any number from 255 to 255 in the red green or blue edit b
227. nters to display the Printers dialog box Figure 2 53 Default Printer No Default Printer Installed Printers EJ Use Print Manager Figure 2 53 Printers Dialog Box 3 Click on CI 5000 in the Installed Printers list to highlight it then click on the Setup button to display the CI 5000 Spooler dialog box 4 Wait for the CI 5000 setup dialog box Figure 2 54 to appear Cl 5000 on EPT Camera Back Pack Film Film Type Type 669 v4 Resolution 1028 E Orientation C Preview Only Figure 2 54 CI 5000 Setup Dialog Box 5 Choose a film type from the Film Type box then choose the OK button to close the setup dialog box 6 Choose the Close button from the Printers dialog box and close the Control Panel 7 Start the ID 4000 application template by displaying the Log In dialog box and logging in 8 Adjust the color balance of printed portraits according to the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual 2 118 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 9 Adjust the brightness of printed portraits according to the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual DataCard Black and White PVC Printer Software Setup On systems using the DataCard black and white PVC printer see page 2 45 for hardware setup instructions install the ID 4000 software regardless of the DataCard option Then install the Fargo printer driver by using the Printers icon in the Windows Co
228. ntrol Panel After installing the printer driver modify the file C ID4K ESMS INI as follows 1 Change the line starting with DEV06 DATA in the CARD FORMAT section to the following DEV06 DAT A 700 2000 2779 4564 0 0 2779 4564 2 Change the line starting with DEV06 in the DEVICE INFO section to the following DEV06 Color ID Card idcard Laser Digital N DataCard ImageCard II Printer Driver Installation After setting up and connecting the DataCard ImageCard II color PVC printer as described on page 2 46 use the following steps to install the printer driver 1 Open the Windows control panel open the Printers dialog box and choose the Add button 2 Inthe List of Printers box click on Install Unlisted or Updated Printer Then choose the Install button 3 Insert the printer driver diskette provided with the ImageCard II printer in the A drive 4 Type a and press ENTER If you are prompted for other files insert the appropriate diskette and choose the OK button 5 After the printer driver has been copied to the hard drive highlight the printer name and choose Set as Default Printer 6 Choose the Connect button and connect the Fargo printer to the appropriate port 7 Choose the Close button and close the Windows Control Panel 2 119 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Fargo Printer Driver Installation If the system uses a Fargo printer use the following steps to install the p
229. ny610 2 0 0 0 0 Sony610 1 0 0 Sony860 2 0 0 0 0 Sony860 1 0 0 Die Cut_V CI 5000 2 26 13 26 77 CI 5000 1 0 0 VY 300 HiRes 2 360 330 50 360 VY 300 HiRes 1 205 370 VY 300 Square 2 360 330 50 360 VY 300 Square 1 205 370 VY 300 Pal 2 360 330 50 360 VY 300 Pal 1 205 370 TX1500 2 270 180 50 180 TX1500 1 0 0 Sony610 2 0 0 0 0 Sony610 1 0 164 Sony860 2 0 0 0 0 Sony860 1 0 0 Flip Die Cut_H CI 5000 4 9 VY 300 620 395 TX1500 99 511 Sony610 799 259 Sony860 980 1479 Flip Die Cut V CI 5000 9 4 VY 300 395 620 TX1500 511 99 Sony610 259 799 Sony860 1479 980 5 34 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files ESMS INI File Contents Continued DEVICE INFO THE format of DEVICE INFO is DEVxx device_name driver name device_type device_technology f2ndCardRotate device_width device_height DEV00 CI 5000 DPAL Film Digital Y 5800 6000 278 DEV01 VY 300 HiRes TX2000 THERMAL Digital N 5800 6000 DEV02 TX1500 NULL Thermal ANALOG N 5800 6000 183 DEV03 Sony610 NULL Thermal ANALOG N 5800 6000 183 DEV04 Sony860 NULL Thermal ANALOG N 5800 6000 183 DEV05 HP LaserJet 4 4M hppcl5e LASER digital N 5800 6000 300 DEV06 DataCard ImageCard II v2 0 dcci2020 Laser Digital N DEV07 WINFAX WINFAX LASER digital N 5800 6000 300 DEV08 DataCard Image Card 1 1 IMAGCARD Laser Digital N 5800 6000 DEV09 NISCA NULL PVC BRUTAL N 5800 6000 DEV 10 Col
230. o bring it into the work area 4 Highlight the field type as Portrait and press the TAB key This resets the capture device setting 5 Save the modifications See Adjusting Scanner Color Sharpness and Tone in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Check connections and tighten if necessary Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem One or more colors missing from scanned image Continued Rollers or white reference chip visible in scanned image Scanned image out of focus Smearing effect in scanned image Possible Cause Misaligned lens assembly or faulty CCD carrier board CCD driver board or main controller board Incorrect scanning field settings Guide rollers jammed forward Misaligned lens Incorrect sharpness settings Dust or condensation on lens or mirrors or focusing lens out of adjustment Picture too slippery to be gripped by feed mechanism Dirt or debris jamming drive roll guide rollers or picture Loose CCD driver board cable connections 6 16 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Set horizontal and vertical alignment values to 0 See Adjusting the Scanning Field in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Verify that guide rollers pivot freely Return scanner for diagno
231. o transmit data at its highest configured rate If modem 1s configured for V 32 bis and connects at 14 400 bps for example HS is on When off modem 1s operating at speed lower than its configured rate Carrier When on modem has established connection with the other modem Detect CD indicates status of CD signal on pin 8 of the RS 232 interface Off When on modem is connected to telephone line and data or fax call Hook is in progress Receive When on modem is sending data to computer RD indicates status Data of RXD signal on pin 3 of RS 232 interface Send When on computer is sending data to the modem SD indicates Data status of TXD signal on pin 2 of RS 232 interface Terminal When on computer is connected and ready to communicate with the Ready modem If the amp D command is set for Ignore TR is always on If the incorrect COM port is selected TR does not light The amp D command DTR action must be set for standard EIA RS 232 operation amp D2 for the TR LED to function this way TR indicates the status of DTR signal on pin 20 of the RS 232 interface Modem When on modem is ready to communicate with the computer MR indicates status of DSR signal on pin 6 of the RS 232 interface 6 49 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Setting Up Remote Diagnostics If the ID 4000 system has the optional remote diagnostics feature authorized ID 4000 tech
232. oading Paper and Ink Replacement Paper and Ink Cartridges Use only TX 2000 paper and ink cartridges specified by the printer instructions Always use matching paper and ink cartridge types Mixing them causes paper jams Paper and Ink Storage Do not store paper or ink cartridges where they will be subject to high heat or humidity Avoid exposing the paper to direct sunlight and do not store paper with the image surfaces touching each other If the printer will not be used for an extended period remove the ink cartridge described in the next section and store it in the original shipping bag or other container 6 51 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Loading Paper Load paper into the TX 2000 color thermal printer as follows when the flashing Paper light indicates that the paper cassette is empty 1 Open the cassette door and remove the paper cassette Figure 6 12 2 Fan the paper a few times to remove static electricity then place the paper into the cassette with the printed side up Figure 6 13 Notes Do not use wet bent or folded sheets To avoid paper jams do not place more than 50 sheets in the cassette at once Do not touch the paper s image surface the side without printing 3 Fully reinsert the paper cassette and close the cassette door VYREMC PCX VYLP PCX Figure 6 13 Inserting Paper 6 52 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting
233. of interest as shown h w in Figure 2 52 These dimensions are relative to the overall area of interest specified in ESMS INI and are measured in pixels 2 115 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Scanner_AOl2 im1_X1 Overall area of interest Scanner AOI2 defined in ESMS INI Scanner_AOl1 Scanner_AOl2 Im1_Y1 Ht g Im1 Scanner_AOl1 Scanner_AOl1 Im1_Ht Im1_X1 Im1 Note All AOI INI dimensions must be in pixels Figure 2 52 Individual Area of Interest Variables in AOI INI For proper operation of the Badge Designer choose dimensions of portrait areas to match the image ratio image height divided by image width set in the Application Builder setup tool This image ratio must be one of the following values 2 3 horizontal 1 1 square or 3 2 vertical Note The dimensions defining an individual area depend on resolution Changing the value in the 4Resolution line of ESMS INI requires corresponding changes to the position and size dimensions of the individual areas of interest c Repeat step b as needed to edit additional Scanner AOIn sections for the remaining areas of interest within the overall area of interest 2 116 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual d Verify that the completed AOI INI file resembles the following sample which defines three areas of interest a signature area and two portrait areas Scanner AOI Num Num_AOI 3 AOL View 0 AOI Rotate A
234. omain Name id4k_ ws_1 polaroid co m Alias id4k ws 1 Comment Comment 2 100 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Setup Procedure 1 Insert the PC TCP install disk 1 into A drive and run A SETUP from the Windows Program Manager 2 Choose Continue to accept the information on the screen 3 Choose Express and then Continue 4 Enter the serial number enter the authentication key then choose Continue Note Each system must have unique serial and key numbers 5 Keep the default directory and click Continue 6 Fora Packet driver installation select 3Com Etherlink II 3c509 and click Continue For ODI driver installation select ODI 3Com 3c509 and click Continue 7 Enter the host address and click Continue 8 Enter the host name enter the domain name then click Continue 9 Choose Yes to install program unpdate files 10 Choose Restart System 11 Edit PCTCP INI Gin the C PCTCP directory to add the following line to the section pctcp kernel host table c pctcp hosts 12 Copy the latest hosts file to the C PCTCP directory This file should be available from your UNIX Network administrator 13 Reboot the system For Packet Drivers the batch file for connecting to the net 1s C PCTCP 3CS09PD C PCTCP ETHDRV C PCTCP IDRIVE Used only for mounting UNIX file systems See Using PC TCP to Mount UNIX Drives below 2 101 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section
235. ome distortion To correct this problem change the default of the TX 2000 V Y300 to SquarePixel with the following steps 1 Open the Windows Control Panel and choose Printers 2 Make sure TX 2000 VY300 is chosen then go into Setup and choose Advanced 3 Change Video Type to PAL then choose OK Note that the dialog box that appears when you choose OK has the resolution set to 576x5765 square Required Tools and Equipment Upgrading an ID 4000 system requires the following tools and equipment e Adobe PhotoShop only if logos require redesign e Version 1 03 customer diskettes e External hard drive or tape drive and FastBack for backing up existing system e DOS 6 00 6 2 and or 6 22 upgrade diskettes depending on DOS version currently installed on the system Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement Preparing for the Site Visit Before visiting the upgrade site contact the customer and recommend that they perform a full system backup of all workstations servers and consoles Also confirm that the system is functioning properly If it is not obtain the necessary software equipment and information necessary to correct the problem before performing the upgrade Documenting and Backing Up the Current System Upon arrival at the upgrade site perform the following documentation and backup steps 1 Test the system for full functionality and correct any problems 2 Document all current data
236. or diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Clear lower photointerrupter Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem Scanner loses calibration when turned off Bits missing from scanned image bizarre coloring thresholding or contouring of image Dark or bright vertical stripe or stripes on scanned image Narrow horizontal lines on scanned image caused by faulty scan lines alternating with normal scan lines Narrow vertical corduroy stripes on scanned image Possible Cause Intermittent backup battery contact Dead backup battery or faulty battery backup circuitry on main controller board Poor data cable connection between CCD driver board and main controller board Creased or scratched picture surface may not be visible until scanned Uniformity out of calibration Dirt or debris blocking optical path Faulty or out of adjustment lamp controller board faulty brightness correction circuitry or one faulty channel in data buffer No uniformity correction because scanner loses calibration when turned off 6 14 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check battery contacts clean and reset then recalibrate and verify that calibration 1s retained when scanner turned off Return scanner for diagnosis and repair o
237. or ID Card IDCARD PVC Digital N 5800 6000 DEV11 VY 300 Square TX2000 THERMAL Digital N 5800 6000 DEV12 VY 300 Pal TX2000 THERMAL Digital N 5800 6000 ADJUST IMAGE Devicel CI 5000 Device2 V Y 300 HiRes Device3 HP LaserJet ISi Device4 V Y 300 Square Device5 V Y 300 Pal DefaultPicture adjust bmp AdjustmentValue 3 Transparency 0 FontName Times New Roman True Type FontSize 200 Test No COLOR TABLES Libraries used to color correct objects on the card other than portraits CI 5000 CI5K CLR VY 300 HiRes VY300 CLR VY 300 Square V Y300 CLR VY 300 PAL VY300 CLR HP LaserJet IISi DEFAULT CLR HP LaserJet 4 4M DEFAULT CLR HP LaserJet II DEFAULT CLR DataCard ImageCard II v2 0 DEFAULT CLR Monitor DEFAULT CLR TX1500 DEFAULT CLR Sony610 DEFAULT CLR Sony860 DEFAULT CLR WinFax Default clr DataCard Image Card 1 1 Default clr NISCA Default clr Color ID Card Default clr 5 35 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files ESMS INI File Contents Continued DIE_CUT CI 5000 24 VY 300 HiRes 24 VY 300 Square 24 VY 300 PAL 24 HP LaserJet H1Si 9 HP LaserJet I 9 HP LaserJet 4 4M 9 DataCard ImageCard II v2 0 24 Monitor 24 GHOST OFFSET For light intensity offset should be between 0 and 96 The bigger the number the more gost offset will be CI 5000 32 VY 300 HiRes 0 VY 300 Square 0 VY 300 PAL 0 HP LaserJet HISi 32 HP L
238. ot and restart Windows 2 Install the support files as follows a Insert disk 1 of the Required Support files into drive A b Double Click on the Oracle Installer c Click Install with Required Support Files highlighted d Insert disk 2 of the Required Support files when requested and follow on screen instructions to complete installation of the support files Note After installing Required Support files do not exit from the Oracle Installer 3 Install Oracle TCP IP as follows Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration a Insert the SQL Net TCP IP diskette into Drive A b From within the Oracle Installer click From c Click Install with SQL Net TCP IP highlighted d Choose FTP PC TCP 2 2 via Winsock and Click Select in the Vendors dialog box e Click OK to acknowledge installation of JSB files in the JSB files dialog box f Click OK to allow Install to add TCP_ VENDOR to ORACLE INI in the Vendor strings dialog box g Click OK to agree that the services file is located at C PCTCP SERVICES in the Services file dialog box h Click OK to accept sample file containing ORASRV port number for the services file int TCP SERVICES FILE dialog box 1 Click File Exit to exit from the Oracle Installer 4 Test the Oracle connection as follows a From the Windows Program Manager run C ORAWIN BIN NETTEST EXE b Click Oracle Connect c Enter the following parameters then click
239. oup appears click YES 11 When the message ODBC was installed appears click OK 12 When the message Would you like to view Read Me file appears click NO to complete the installation Installing FastBack PLUS 6 0 1 Ifthe ID 4000 computer is an IBM ValuePoint 466DX2 Dp edit CONFIG SYS to disable rem out EMM386 EXE Then exit from Windows and reboot 2 Exit from Windows to display the C prompt 3 Insert FastBack PLUS disk 1 into drive A then log onto the A drive 4 Type install and press ENTER then press ENTER again to begin installation 5 Select the default installation directory by pressing ENTER 6 Select the default express menus by pressing ENTER 2 80 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 7 When the message Set up a user name appears select Yes by pressing ENTER 8 Type ID4000 and press ENTER 9 Continue to the next screen by pressing ENTER 10 When the message Is a QIC Tape Drive installed appears select NO and press ENTER 11 When the message Do You Have Any SCSI Tape Drives Attached appears select YES and press ENTER 12 When the message Would you like to schedule automated backups appears select NO and press ENTER 13 When the message Load Scheduler appears select NO and press ENTER 14 When prompted to modify the files select YES and press ENTER 15 When the message Do you want to view the READ ME fi
240. out out in out in in in Acknowledge out out out out Auto Feed in 6 DataBits in 15 Eror out Eo 8 DataBit7 in a _ 9 DataBits in fins 18 Gnd TX 2000 VY 300 Color Thermal Printer Cabling Connect the Polaroid TX 2000 Hitachi VY 300 color thermal printer to parallel port 1 or 2 with a standard parallel cable 25 pin D sub to 36 pin Centronics as shown in Figure 2 46 TX 2000 25 to 36 Pin Cable VY 300 Printer Figure 2 46 TX 2000 VY 300 Color Thermal Printer Cabling The pin outs for the 25 pin female D subminiature to 36 pin male Centronics are as follows Pin Pin Pin No Designation Direction No Designation Direction No Designation Direction in 6 DataBits in 8 DataBit7 in a a E 9 DataBits in en 2 59 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Cabling Options with Cardinal and Support Boards When the ID 4000 computer has both the Cardinal board and the support board configure cabling according to the appropriate diagram in Figure 2 47 25 to 25 Pin Cable 25 Pin M to Support Bd Cable 50 Pin Centronix Input Unit CPU Cl 5000 8 Pin Mini Din Cardinal Board Video In Cardinal and Support Boards with Cl 5000 25 to 25 Pin Cable 8 Pin Mini Din Support Bd Cable 2 4 BNC Input Unit Cardinal Board TX 1500 8 Pin Mini Din Video Out _ Cardinal Board Video In Cardinal and Support Board
241. out of the bay 7 Install the new drive by reversing the removal process 8 Reinstall the cabinet reconnect the power cord and start the ID 4000 system 9 Format the hard drive install DOS and Windows and install all other appropriate software as described in Software Installation in Section 2 of this manual Bay Securing Screw 7 ae Screw Nearest Drive Rear 3 5 Drive Bay Figure 7 6 Rear Drive Bay Securing Screws 7 10 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the 3 4 Inch Diskette Drive Use this procedure to replace the ID 4000 32 inch diskette drive located in the front 3 2 inch drive bay Warning Before performing this procedure read the electrostatic discharge warning on page 7 7 1 Turn off the ID 4000 system and disconnect the power cord from the computer 2 Remove the cabinet from the computer as described on page 7 9 3 Remove all harnesses from the installed drive 4 Remove the two screws securing the drive bay Figure 7 7 5 Slide the bay toward the back of the cabinet and lift it with the drive from the cabinet 6 Remove the four screws securing the drive to the bay then lift the drive out of the bay 7 Install the new drive by reversing the removal process 8 Reinstall the cabinet reconnect the power cord and start the ID 4000 system Bay Securing Screws Front 3 5 Drive Bay Figure 7 7 Front Drive Bay Securing Screws Po
242. over lock Figure 2 9 b Press the cover release latch and slide the cover forward to remove it Cover Release Latch Cover Lock Figure 2 11 Removing the IBM ValuePoint 6482 Cover 2 23 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 3 Unpack and set up the following boards and install each in the specified computer slot Setup Slot Board Instructions Figure 2 12 Cardinal SNAPPlus Framegrabber board Page 2 26 l Polaroid Support board 2 25 2 BOCA IO AT board 2 30 3 Ethernet LAN board 1f required 2 30 4 Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI controller 2 27 5 4 Disable on board VGA by moving the jumper on system board J32 Figure 2 12 to the disable position 5 Reinstall the computer cover After configuring and installing the boards proceed to Input and Output Device Setup on page 2 34 Enable Disable Figure 2 12 IBM ValuePoint 6482 Slot Numbers and VGA Jumper 2 24 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Drive and Board Configuration Support Board Configuration The Polaroid support board Figure 2 13 has a 10 position dip switch which should be set to address 0x338 Figure 2 14 When setting the switches invert the board so you can read the switch numbers For this switch OFF 1 and ON 0 The settings shown in Figure 2 14 produce the binary value of 11 0011 1000 or 338 hex which is the board I O address Use only these settings If you change
243. ovided with scanner Reconnect upper photointerrupter Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual See Adjusting the Scanning Field in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Return scanner for thermostat replacement Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem Motor runs but picture feed is erratic jerky or not operating Flashing green LED after calibration scan Flashing green LED at Startup Faintly flickering green LED at startup Motor runs for about 4 seconds at startup normal is less than 1 second Possible Cause Dirt or debris jamming drive roll or guide roller pivot arms Loose or broken drive roll belt loose motor pulley setscrew defective motor or motor control circuit Error occurred during calibration Scanner loses calibration when turned off Scanner not connected to computer Computer off Dirt or debris blocking lower photointerrupter Faulty lower photointerrupter Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check drive roll shaft and clutches and clean if possible Return scanner for drive roll shaft or clutch cleaning or replacment or refer to the scanner service manual Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual See S
244. ox type the name of the new badge 6 In the Badge Description edit box type a description Click on the Select button 2 122 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 7 From the Output Media dialog box select the size or output format media and orientation Click OK 8 Go to the Object buttons on the left side of the screen and select Badge Color Choose gray from the chart and click OK 9 Select BitMap from the object buttons Select Browse and choose LOGO2 BMP Click OK then click OK again Move the logo Resize the logo using the right mouse button 10 Select the Portrait button Click OK Move and resize the portrait 11 Select the Text button and enter some text Select Font and change the typeface Click OK then click OK again Move and resize the text 12 Select the Signature button and click OK Move and resize the signature 13 Select the Database Field button Choose a Field choose Justification left center right choose Transparent and change font Click OK then click OK again Repeat these steps for each field to appear on the card 14 Save and close the file Select Save from the File drop down menu Select Exit from the File drop down menu Select YES 15 To open the Program Manager if it is minimized double click on the Program Manager icon After completing this test proceed to the log in and data entry test below Log In and Data Entry Test 1 Double Click on
245. ox and then choose Delete Field You can select multiple fields for deletion by holding down the Shift key while clicking on the fields to be selected Changing the Width ofa Field To change the width of a field click on the field box Then drag the right or left handle a black square to resize the box You can also hold down the Shift key and press the appropriate arrow keys to resize the field 8 5 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Changing Field Font and Format To change the format of a field font alignment currency date format etc place the cursor in the field and click the right mouse button to display a menu Select Change Font to select a different font for the field Select Change Format to display the Format dialog box for changing other attributes Inserting a Subtotal To insert a subtotal in a field place the cursor in the field and click the right mouse button to display a menu Select Insert Subtotal to display the Insert Subtotal dialog box Select the field and the condition that triggers a new subtotal whenever the field s value changes Also select the sort direction Ascending or Descending Crystal Reports then creates a new section to hold the subtotal Inserting a Grand Total To insert a subtotal in a field place the cursor in the field and click the right mouse button to display a menu Select Insert Grand Total to create a new section holding the grand total Cre
246. oxes under Balance but a practical range for balance settings is 100 to 100 The neutral setting is 0 If one color s setting is significantly higher than the others that color predominates in the scan Lowering the blue balance dramatically for example can eliminate blue from the scan and emphasize blue s complementary color yellow By itself the Balance setting shifts a color s curve higher or lower on the graph indicating more or less brightness Input and output retain the same relationship they are simply brighter or darker A high or low balance setting can cause clipping but adjusting contrast can counter this effect Contrast Contrast is the degree of difference between adjacent values When you increase contrast you accentuate tonal transitions as an image s color values shift from dark to light When you decrease contrast you make that transition more gradual Lowering all three contrast settings results in a flatter and less detailed image Changing Contrast alters the steepness of a color s curve You can enter any number in the Contrast edit boxes for each color but the useful range is 0 3 to 3 0 The neutral setting 1s 1 0 Gamma Gamma is the exponential factor in the tonescale equation It is a numerical value that determines the curve of the tonescale graph line The usual purpose of gamma is replicating the eye s natural tone discrimination It is used to balance the perceived contrast between the hig
247. p an application write down the names to be used for the application and the database directory If you are creating more than one application this will help you avoid overwriting existing ones Also obtain and write down the following information for use during the setup process e Template type e Number of workstations e Networking information e Badge type e Portrait size e Image and signature storage options e Hardware key requirements e Devices to be installed e Port settings and protocols for devices to be installed e Purchased software options to be included in the application Naming the Application and Database Directory You must enter a name and description for each new application If you specify the name of an existing application you are warned that files will be overwritten Application Name The application name can be up to eight characters long This application name is used for the application initialization file the screen file and the badge file The system also creates a directory for this data giving it the same name as the application Unless directed otherwise use SMPAPP as the application name If the directory you are creating does not exist the message C DIRECTORY does not exist Create it appears Choose Yes to create the directory or choose No to begin again with a different application name 3 7 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Application Description
248. r Manuals e D 4000 Service Manual e MS DOS 6 Operating Manual e D 4000 for Windows User Guide e ID 4000 for Windows Application Builder Guide Recommended but not required 2 9 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Site Preparation and Layout Physical Layout Sufficient space must be available to allow the layout shown in Figure 2 1 Be sure the operator has sufficient workspace The installation technician should call ahead to verify space availability before proceeding to the site Note Particularly important is the camera to subject distance in Figure 2 1 Also the CI 5000 film recorder 1 and the monitor 2 must be at least 16 inches apart to prevent electromagnetic interference Backdrop C Applicant 5 ft for 16mm lens standard Portrait Camera Operato Figure 2 1 Typical Polaroid ID 4000 Layout 2 10 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Lighting Conditions For the best results Polaroid recommends using 5500 Kelvin fluorescent lamps which provide an even distribution of light At a minimum the system should be in consistent indirect light that 1s neither too bright nor too dark It is important to keep the system away from direct sunlight and windows where the light varies according to the time of day and weather The applicant should sit with his or her back against a backdrop This will minimize shadows behind the applicant in t
249. r refer to the scanner service manual Check cable connections and tighten if necessary Obtain an undamaged picture Calibrate the color scanner see the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Check all mirrors polarizers and lenses and clean as necessary Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual See Scanner loses calibration when turned off above Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem No scanned image appears on screen after scan Screen turns blank immediately after Capture or Expose button 1s chosen no image captured One or more colors missing from scanned image Possible Cause Poor data cable connection between CCD driver board and main controller board Guide rollers jammed forward and blocking optical path Missing optical component or gross misalignment Input device changed after a screen has been designed Incorrect tonescale settings Faulty sensor cable connection on CCD driver board or CCD sensor board 6 15 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check cable connections and tighten if necessary Verify that rollers pivot freely Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual 1 Open Database Screen Designer 2 Modify the screen associated with the capture problem 3 Click on each portrait field t
250. r restart this procedure at step 4 for each printer Adjusting the Brightness of Printed Portraits If portrait brightness appears normal on the ID 4000 display but seems incorrect on printed badges follow the procedure below This procedure changes the brightness information transmitted to the printer whenever a portrait 1s printed The following procedure applies to all ID 4000 output devices used for printing portraits You select the device to be adjusted during the procedure Corrections you make with this procedure do not affect the non portrait areas of the printed badges To correct the brightness of the entire badge including the portrait see the section of this chapter applying to the output device being used Overview of Brightness Adjustment Using the following procedure you print nine portrait samples illustrating a range of brightness values After printing the samples you choose the most satisfactory one The ID 4000 then stores the brightness values necessary to achieve the appearance of the sample you selected If necessary you can also change the brightness increase or decrease between adjacent sample images to any of six different values In effect this provides you with a maximum of 54 brightness settings 9 x 6 from which to choose Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Brightness Adjustment Procedure 1 Ifthe Data Entry window Figure 4 18 is not on the screen start th
251. r Calibration RedGamma 5 GreenGamma 5 BlueGamma 5 Brightness 6 BrightnessStep 10 CalCardWidth 6030 CalCardHeight 4680 WindowsDeviceName Polaroid TX 2000 TOG INI The ID 4000 has two TOG INI files One is in the C ID4K CUSTOMER directory and the second is in the C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIR directory Tog files hold image TOG numbers card history unique keys and generated numbers The local TOG file in the C ID4K CUSTOMER directory assures that generated numbers are unique A TOG is always taken from the shared TOG file in the C ID4K CUSTOMER DBDIR directory If it is not used for some reason it is stored in the local TOG file in the C ID4K CUSTOMER directory until the same TOG 1s requested again TOG INI File Contents TOG ImageTog 0 CHkey 0 TWIN INI TWIN INI is located in the C ID4K directory TWIN INI File Contents PRINTERPORTS VY 300 TX2000 LPT1 15 45 VY 300 Square TX2000 LPT1 15 45 VY 300 HiRes TX2000 LPT1 15 45 VY 300 PAL TX2000 LPT2 15 45 5 44 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files TWIN INI File Contents Continued DEVICES VY 300 TX2000 LPT1 VY 300 Square TX2000 LPT1 VY 300 HiRes TX2000 LPT1 VY 300 PAL TX2000 LPT2 TX1500 INI TX1500 INI Contents TX1500 Printer Calibration RedGamma 5 GreenGamma 5 BlueGamma 5 Brightness 8 BrightnessStep 10 CalCardWidth 6030 CalCardHeight 4680 WindowsDeviceName Polaroid TX 1500 UNINST INI UNINST
252. r and to the SCSI devices before you unplug a SCSI cable 2 55 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration SCSI Board Configuration 1 Remove the terminating resistors on the SCSI board 2 If you have a single SCSI device on a multiple device cable make sure the device is plugged into the end of the 50 pin SCSI cable Note The red stripe on the cable indicates pin 1 Be sure to connect it to pin 1 of the SCSI device and the SCSI board SCSI connectors are not usually keyed and can be connected incorrectly SCSI Cabling with 850m Controller Board SCSI cabling options for ID 4000 systems using the 850m controller board and the CI 5000 Plus color film recorder are shown in Figure 2 41 Options for the 850m controller board and the TX 1500 or TX 2000 V Y 300 color thermal printer are shown in Figure 2 42 50 Pin Terminator Cl 5000 E 25 to 50 Pin Cable SCSI ID 2 50 Pin Terminator i aope A V aeo L SCSI ID 4 SCSI ID 2 Figure 2 41 SCSI Cabling 850m Controller Board and CI 5000 Film Recorder 25 Pin Terminator CPU k 25 Pin Terminator CPU CS 500i ig 25 to 25 Pin Cable SCSI ID 4 Figure 2 42 SCSI Cabling 850m Controller Board and Color Thermal Printers 2 56 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Magnetic Stripe Encoder Cabling The following magnetic stripe encoders are available for the ID 4000 e Magtek MT 80 Low Coercivity e Magtek MT 80 H
253. r through the VAR or agent With the configured lock file the installation diskettes and the ID 4000 hardware the VAR or agent installs the D 4000 system at the customer s site If the databases screens and badges were not set up by the VAR or agent when the application was created the customer can design and set them up with the Application Builder provided with the system When this has been completed the ID 4000 is ready for entering data capturing image and issuing badges The flexibility of the ID 4000 system allows Polaroid to create customer diskettes internally or to make the customer diskettes based on information in the lock file Systems may also be configured by the Polaroid sales organization within the sales region and systems distributed outside the U S may be configured by subsidiaries or a central organization In any of these circumstances the customer s databases screens and badges can be created by the same organization that configures the system or by the customer No matter who performs configuration a central Polaroid group must reconfigure the lock file use the lock file information to verify correct configuration and equipment and archive a copy of the lock file 3 4 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Lock File Description The lock file is central to the ID 4000 system D 4000 applications are inoperable without a valid lock file The file 1s encrypted to make it readable o
254. rallel DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL Com Xi 4 Serial 3 COM Card LAN Board 3c509 Computer Boards External Devices Polaroid CI 5000 Plus Film Recorder Digital Palette or Polaroid TX 1500 Color Thermal Printer AT amp T Paradyne External 14 4 FAX Modem Universal Input Assembly Hardware Key Polaroid CS 5001 Color Scanner Inforite Signature Tablet TX 2000 Hitachi VY 300 Color Thermal Printer Sony B amp W Thermal Printer DataCard B amp W PVC Printer HP Laserjet IV Laser Printer ID 4000 Software Standard software ID 4000 application Close Up 6 0 e FastBack Plus 6 0 included with Connor tape drive 2 6 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Other software e Crystal Reports Pro 3 0 e SQLBase for Windows 5 1 4 e Bear Rock PrintBar Bar Code Fonts for Windows ID 4000 Product Tiers Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Badging Security Basic and Applica Component Badging Utilities tion Universal Input Unit CCD Color Video Camera with Perfect Portrait Flash Lighting System System Control Unit 80486 PC 8MB RAM VGA Color Monitor Keyboard 1 2 MB Floppy Disk Drive 2 Serial Ports 1 Parallel Port SCSI Controller Board Video Capture Processing Boards Hardware Key Calibration Target Software and Documentation ID 4000 Application Builder D 4000 Security ID and Badging 3 0 ID 4000 User Documentation MS Windows 3 1 and DOS 6 0 Hard Drive IDE 120 MB Due to rapid technology and market
255. re 2 8 Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI controller Page 2 26 l Polaroid Support board Page 2 25 2 Cardinal SNAPPlus Framegrabber board Page 2 25 3 2 Reinstall the power supply 3 Reinstall the computer cover 4 Connect the external Colorado Trakker tape drive if used to the computer parallel port After configuring and installing the boards and the tape drive proceed to Input and Output Device Setup on page 2 34 Figure 2 8 HP Vectra Slot Numbers 2 18 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration CSS Preferred 462 486 ESP M Configuration Configuring the CSS Preferred 462 486 ESP M requires the following two procedures e Initial hardware check e Installing drives and boards Initial Hardware Check Perform this procedure to verify that you have the correct CSS Preferred 462 486 ESP M hardware before you install any drives or boards 1 Unpack the computer monitor and keyboard from their shipping boxes 2 Connect the power cords and cables according to instructions provided with the computer Do not change the system from its out of the box configuration 3 Turn on the monitor and the computer 4 Verify that the system operates properly 5 Run Microsoft Diagnostics type c dos msd and press ENTER to verify that the system has the proper board revision number and model number 462 model 486 ESP M BIOS dated 08 08 93 6 Turn off the system Installing Drives and Boards Use th
256. rectory Warning Do not omit step 2 If necessary you can copy these files back to C WINDOWS TWAIN to restore the current settings 4 23 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 3 Start the ID 4000 application create a new record and choose the Capture button to display the scanner control panel Figure 4 26 Note If choosing the Capture button does not display the scanner control panel or a dialog box allowing you to choose the scanner control panel you must create another record in an applicant category configured for scanning images 4 Choose the More button to display the Advanced Settings buttons Figure 4 27 5 Choose the Color Sharp and Tone buttons as needed make the necessary adjustments and choose the OK button after each to return to the Scanner Control Panel If necessary see the descriptions of the color settings page 4 25 sharpness settings page 4 27 or tone settings page 4 28 6 To verify the effect of the new settings choose the Preview and Scan buttons as needed to scan an image If necessary repeat step 5 to make additional adjustments Polaroid CS 500i Scanner Control Panel Image Type Color JE Resolution 4125 DPI FRAME Position Size Horiz Vert MEMORY Required 225 kbytes Available 16320 kbytes ID4SV006 BMP Figure 4 26 Scanner Control Panel Figure 4 27 Advanced Settings Buttons on Scanner Control Panel SCA
257. red for each workstation SET FBP_USER ID 4000 Configured for each workstation call STARTNET BAT Configured for each workstation WIN 3 STARTNET BAT STARTNET BAT is located in the root directory of C drive C STARTNET BAT File Contents ECHO OFF C CD NWCLIENT if not exist Isl com goto nonetware if not exist 3c5x9 com goto nonetware if not exist ipxodi com goto nonetware if not exist netx exe goto nonetware LH LSL COM LH 3C5X9 COM LH IPXODI COM LH NETX EXE F LOGIN LOGIN fileservername username goto donenetware nonetware echo Netware client software missing No Netware started donenetware CD 5 15 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files CONFIG SYS CONFIG SYS is located in the root directory of C drive C CONFIG SYS File Contents DEVICE C DOS SETVER EXE DEVICE C DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE C DOS EMM386 EXE NOEMS FRAME E000 X A000 C7FF WIN C800 EOFF DOS HIGH UMB FILES 30 STACKS 9 256 BUFFERS 30 LASTDRIVE E Initialization INI Files INI File Description and Syntax Initialization INI files are text files that the ID 4000 and Windows use to initialize and interact with the operating environment Each file contains lines of Windows and ID 4000 settings grouped according to function INI files use the following syntax section keyname value A line with a keyname and its value is called a statement INI Item Definition section Label def
258. remove and reinstall the NCR 3333 computer cabinet when necessary 1 Switch off the computer and any peripherals connected to it 2 Make a note of the cable positions and then disconnect all the cables from the back of the PC 3 Turn the system keylock to its unlocked position 4 Remove the three cabinet retaining screws at the rear of the cabinet Figure 7 5 5 Pull the cabinet top back slightly then lift it clear from the cabinet base To reinstall the cabinet reverse the removal procedure Cabinet Retaining Screws Cabinet Retaining Screws Figure 7 5 Computer Cabinet Removal 7 9 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the Hard Drive Use this procedure to replace the ID 4000 hard drive usually located in the rear 3 4 inch drive bay The exact location of the connectors located on the rear of the drive may vary according to the type of drive Warning Before performing this procedure read the electrostatic discharge warning on page 7 7 1 Turn off the ID 4000 system and disconnect the power cord from the computer 2 Remove the cabinet from the computer as described on page 7 9 3 Remove all harnesses from the installed drive 4 Remove the screws that secure the drive bay Figure 7 6 5 Slide the bay to the front of the cabinet and lift it and the drive from the cabinet 6 Remove the four screws securing the drive to the bay and lift the drive
259. ress the space bar to continue without copying the diskette 4 When a system configuration appears press the space bar to display the current configuration Then press the space bar again to display the main menu 6 37 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 4 Select the desired tests Note Display additional tests for selection by pressing the Page Down key You can return to the first list by pressing Page Up Display descriptions of the available tests by pressing Fl 5 Run the selected tests once by pressing F7 or run the tests continuously by pressing F8 If you run the tests continuously you can stop them any time by pressing F4 6 Watch the test results indicated as Passed or Failed If any tests fail refer to the appropriate subject in this section Note You can also view the results of testing in the file ERROR LOG recorded on the floppy diskette in drive A To display print or delete entries in ERROR LOG choose Utilities F6 from the Diagnostics Main Menu and select Error Log Maintenance 7 After completing the diagnostics return to the main menu and press F10 to exit from the diagnostic program 8 Remove the diskette from the drive and reboot the system If the system passes all the diagnostic tests but an operational problem still exists use the Microsoft Diagnostics program MSD described in the following section to further diagnose system configurat
260. rint Figure 4 50 and measure skew values X and Y Figures 4 48 and 4 49 Note Ifboth X and Y are less than 0 2mm skew is within specification In this case make a second print to verify the measurements If the second print is also within specification discontinue this procedure no skew adjustment is required Turn the printer off and turn it upside down Unscrew the two phillips head screws and remove the protective cover from the thermal head exposing the adjustment screws Figure 4 51 Figure 4 50 TX 1500 Test Print Position Holder Front Side Cassette Loading li Direction z Holder Roller Figure 4 51 TX 1500 Thermal Head Adjustments 4 47 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 5 Verify that the roller hold spring the main guide and the guide holder are free from any deforming or improper fixing and the roller 1s overriding to the guide edges 6 For Case A Figure 4 48 Turn screws A and B Figure 4 51 counter clockwise the same amount Turn the printer back to its normal position and make two test prints to verify the effect of the adjustment For Case B Figure 4 49 Turn screws A and B Figure 4 51 clockwise the same amount Turn the printer back to its normal position and make two test prints to verify the effect of the adjustment 7 Repeat step 6 until X and Y skew values are less than 0 2mm 8 Apply a quick drying glue
261. rinter driver after connecting the printer as described in the instructions provided with the printer 1 Open the Windows control panel open the Printers dialog box and choose the Add button 2 Inthe List of Printers box click on Install Unlisted or Updated Printer Then choose the Install button 3 Insert the printer driver diskette provided with the Fargo printer in the A drive 4 Type a and press ENTER If you are prompted for other files insert the appropriate diskette and choose the OK button 5 After the printer driver has been copied to the hard drive highlight the printer name and choose Set as Default Printer 6 Choose the Connect button and connect the Fargo printer to the appropriate port 7 Choose the Close button and close the Windows Control Panel 8 Make a backup copy of ESMS INI located in C D4K then edit the existing ESMS INI as follows a Using a text editor replace Fargo Persona with Color ID Card throughout the file b Replace Persona with IDCard throughout the file c Save the new ESMS INI file 9 Using the Badge Designer design a badge for the Fargo printer 10 Use the D 4000 application to print the badge and verify correct printer operation System Calibration When you have completed the installation of ID 4000 software and third party software perform a complete system calibration as described in Calibration Sequence in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this man
262. rn the printer for diagnosis and repair Toward paper discharge slot Opening assette door Cross sectional view l VYFIN PCX Figure 6 20 Removing Paper from Discharge Slot VYINPA PCX Figure 6 21 Installing the Paper Cassette 6 56 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance TX 2000 Color Thermal Printer Verifying Settings If the TX 2000 V Y 300 color thermal printer produces black sheets or exhibits other printing problems check the printer settings in the following order 1 On off condition 2 Front panel control settings 3 Default menu settings Procedures for checking these settings are given below Checking Printer On Off Condition The TX 2000 printer is on powered only when the OPERATE button LED is lighted Figure 6 22 Note A lighted READY LED does not indicate that the printer is on If the OPERATE button LED 1s off press it once to turn the printer on Power Off Power On Power cable connected Operate LED O d Operate LED indicates power on condition Ready LED remains ON when power is off Figure 6 22 TX 2000 Power On Indicator 6 57 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Verifying Front Panel Control Settings For normal printing with the TX 2000 only the following front panel LEDs should be
263. rocessor e Mouse e SCSI e Video adapter No image on display at powerup Possible Cause Loose connection s Incorrect cable connections Incorrect system setup Failed device Incorrect jumper or switch settings Poor SIMM seating on board Failed main PCB SCSI communication problem Display power cord disconnected or power switch off 6 3 Corrective Action Check all connections and reseat if necessary Verify all cable connections Run setup diagnostics page 6 36 and correct as necessary Refer to appropriate symptom table or diagnostic procedure in this section Verify all jumper or switch settings and correct as necessary Check connections to SIMMS Replace main PCB board See SCSI Communication Problems on page 6 20 1 Check verify that cord is plugged in 2 Turn display power switch on if necessary Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual System Power Up Problems Continued Problem No image on display at powerup continued Possible Cause Incorrectly set display controls Incorrect Cardinal board setup Faulty Cardinal board Input Unit Portrait Camera Problems Problem No video image on screen black video Possible Cause Loose 5V connection to lens usually accompanied by 5 second delay between freeze command and strobe flash Faulty connection between Support board and input unit Improperly set Live image potentiometer on input u
264. roid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Polaroid Color Thermal Printer The color thermal printer Figure 1 7 prints full color badge photographs on 4 x 5 inch thermal paper The number of badges per sheet depends on system configuration Polaroid model TX 1500 or TX 2000 printer can be used with the D 4000 Note The Hitachi model VY 300A in the U S and the Hitachi model V Y 300E in Europe are equivalent to the Polaroid model TX 2000 color thermal printer Badges printed on this device must be diecut and laminated with the badge finishing equipment described on page 1 12 Black and White Thermal Printer Several black and white thermal printers similar to the one shown in Figure 1 8 are offered as options with the ID 4000 The printer produces low cost high quality black and white temporary or visitor badges with portraits and other images Figure 1 7 Typical Color Thermal Printer Figure 1 8 Black and White Thermal Printer 1 8 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Black and White PVC Printer The black and white PVC printer Figure 1 9 prints a black and white portrait other identification images and text directly on a vinyl PVC card The card requires no diecutting or laminating Laser Printer The laser printer Figure 1 10 prints black and white text and graphics for dossiers and reports It can also be used for printing from other Windows applications provided wit
265. rrective Action Verify AC power input to Continued supply Faulty cable connections between input unit and computer preventing firing signal from reaching strobe No strobe firing signal generated by system power supply and 5VDC output Replace power supply if necessary Press the manual flash button on strobe to verify that it flashes Then check the cable connections on the back of the input unit and the support board in the computer tighten or repair the connections as needed Verify strobe firing signal by performing the support board strobe and lens diagnostics on page 6 45 Live portrait too dark or too light Live image out of calibration See Calibrating the Live Image in the Calibration section of this manual Frozen portrait too dark Frozen image out of calibration Strobe not flashing See Calibrating the Captured Image in the Calibration section of this manual See Strobe does not flash on page 6 6 Frozen portrait too light Frozen image out of calibration 6 7 See Calibrating the Captured Image in the Calibration section of this manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Input Unit Portrait Camera Problems Continued Problem Autocentering does not frame subject consistently Autocentering cuts off top or sides of portrait Autocentering leaves insufficient space above subject s head Autocentering leaves too much space above subject s he
266. rrows Figure 4 54 as needed to adjust the image outlined by the red border with rounded corners The function of each arrow appears when the mouse pointer is positioned on it The current position and dimensions of the image area appear in the Position box Note Each click of an arrow changes the position or size of the image area by 0 007 inches as indicated in the Step field in the lower right of the window If necessary you can change this increment by editing the value following STEP in ESMS INI Calculate the appropriate value for STEP by multiplying the desired increment in inches by 1440 For example set the increment at 0 002 inch by using STEP 3 The factory setting is STEP 10 approximately 0 007 inches Ifthe system prints two images on a sheet choose the Side 2 button and repeat step 5 to adjust the position and size of the second image When the images are positioned and sized as desired pull down the File menu and choose Save Return to the ID 4000 application Hold the ALT key press the TAB key until I D 4000 appears release the ALT key Print a badge and check the alignment of the images with the diecutter openings Return to the Diecut Adjustment window Hold ALT press TAB until Diecut Area Adjustment window appears release ALT If alignment of the images printed in step 9 is satisfactory go to step 11 If further adjustment is necessary repeat steps 2 10 Pull down the File
267. rsion 5 1 4 DOS Windows system 3 5 diskettes 1 Insert disk 1 of 3 into drive A then run A SBRSETUP EXE from the Windows Program Manager 2 Choose Defaults by clicking on top box 3 Accept C GUPTA DIR 2 103 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 4 Follow on screen instructions for inserting disks 2 and 3 5 Click Continue to modify AUTOEXEC BAT then click OK to acknowledge the message 6 Click NO to proceed without reading the message 7 Remove disk 3 from drive A and exit from Windows 8 Create the directory C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA where CUSTOMER is the same directory name used in the ID 4000 Configuration Builder when the customer diskettes were created 9 Log into the directory C GUPTA 10 Type dbxlocal l pd Type sqltalk 12 Accept DEMO as the db name press ENTER 13 Accept SYSADM as the user name press ENTER 14 Type sysadm as the password Note Type the following commands exactly as given using upper and lower case as indicated and ending each command with a space and a semicolon 15 Type SET dbdir c id4k customer sdata where customer is the same directory name used in the ID 4000 Configuration Builder when the customer diskettes were created 16 Type CREATE DATABASE sdata 17 End the SQLTALK session by typing EXIT 18 Reboot system to free memory 19 Edit SQL INI in the C GUPTA directory as follows a Add the following l
268. s camera or support board may be faulty Also see No video image on screen on page 6 4 for a list of possible causes 5 Type a snaptest out and press ENTER to display a Cardinal board generated color bar pattern If color bars do not appear or their colors are distorted replace the Cardinal board Support Board Strobe and Lens Diagnostics Use the following steps to diagnose the support board strobe and lens operation with the DEBUG program 1 Verify that all input unit camera lens and support board cables and connections are correct and tight 2 Exit to DOS 3 Type c dos debug and press ENTER to start DEBUG 6 45 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 4 Type o 338 and press ENTER to generate the open lens signal Verify that the lens opens If it does go to step 5 If the lens does not open go to step 6 Then replace the support board and repeat this procedure to verify proper operation 5 Type o 338 ff and press ENTER to close the lens and fire the strobe If the lens closes and the strobe fires the support board 1s OK In this case go to step 6 If the lens does not close or the strobe does not fire go to step 6 Then replace the support board and repeat this procedure to verify proper operation 6 Exit from DEBUG by typing q and pressing ENTER Signature Tablet Diagnostics Signature tablet diagnosis may require interpretation of the LED indicator
269. s 1s satisfactory choose the Back button Then print a sample set with different brightness change increments by moving the Adjustment Value slider bar in the Brightness Adjustment dialog box and returning to step 9 To return to a sample set printed earlier without printing it again choose the Print Set menu Then choose the desired print set from the menu The number of the print set on the menu corresponds to the number printed on the printed sample sheet To calibrate additional printers restart this procedure at step 4 for each printer 4 21 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Calibrating the Color Scanner This procedure initiates a self calibration sequence that automatically checks and corrects brightness and uniformity Use the following steps to calibrate the color scanner whenever the scanned portrait displays vertical stripes or an on screen message indicates that the scanner requires calibration Note Calibration should not be required frequently If it becomes necessary to calibrate each time the color scanner is powered up the calibration storage battery should be replaced 1 Place the 4x6 inch white calibration card provided with the scanner unprinted side up in the scanner tray 2 Use a small screwdriver or other pointed object to press and hold the calibration button Figure 4 25 until the scanner lamp turns on then release the button 3 Wait for the scanner to p
270. s and tighten or reconnect Check logic board test points TP12 GND TP13 S5VDC TP14 12VDC TP15 12VDC and run diagnostics to identify logic board failure If necessary see the CI 5000 service manual or return CI 5000 for logic board replacement Check SCSI ID switch and set to 2 if necessary Check SCSI chain cables and reconfigure if necessary Verify that SCSI chain is terminated at both ends hard drive and CI 5000 Check cables and tighten if necessary Replace fuse Return CI 5000 for SCSI board replacement or see the CI 5000 service manual Remove dark slide Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual CI 5000 Color Film Recorder Problems Continued Problem Distorted image on film Repeating spots on image Missing corners or orange red marks on image Broad streaks on image Muddy image dull colors Dark corner on ID card Printed ID images do not align with openings in diecutter Possible Cause Electromagnetic interference from monitor or other equipment Film pulled too quickly from camera back Dirty developer rollers Yellow or white tab pulled at angle from camera Dirty developer rollers Hesitation while pulling yellow tab Insufficient development time Low COS4 Position or size of image out of adjustment 6 23 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Move monitor and all other likely EMI sources at least 12 inches a
271. s on the tablet Red steady Tablet problem Red flashing Tablet problem Red and green flashing Power up and initialization in progress In case of problems with the signature tablet use the following steps for diagnosis 1 Verify the cable connection to the COM1 port of the computer 2 Verify the power cable connection to the serial port connector 3 Verify a 12VDC supply voltage and replace the power supply if necessary 4 Use a text editor to verify correct port assignments and tablet parameters in INFORITE INI Make corrections as needed 5 Use Microsoft Diagnostics MSD to verify COM1 functionality See Microsoft Diagnostics on page 6 39 6 46 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 6 Ifsteps 1 through 5 do not indicate any problems replace the tablet or the COM 1 port Magtek Magnetic Stripe Encoder Test Use this procedure to verify that the Magtek MT 80 magnetic stripe encoder is functioning normally 1 From the Windows Program Manager open the Accessories group and choose the Terminal icon to display the Terminal window Figure 6 10 Terminal Untitled File Edit Settings Phone Transfers Help Figure 6 10 Terminal Window 6 47 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance 2 Pull down the Settings menu and choose Communications to display the Communications dialog box Figure 6 11 3 Choose the fo
272. s with TX 1500 z to 25 Pin Cable 25 Pin to 36 Pin Input Unit Lenton TX 2000 8 Pin Mini Din Cardinal Board Video In Cardinal and Support Boards with TX 2000 25 Pin M to 8 Pin Mini Din 8 Pin Mini Din to4 BNC FF 1 1500 Cardinal Board Video Out L_ Cardinal and Support Boards with TX 1500 Standalone 25 Pin Male to 36 Pin Centronix re Does not use Cardinal Board ene Cardinal and Support Boards with TX 2000 Standalone BNC to BNC Fingerprint Unit 25 to 25 Pin Cable Support Bd Cable 8 Pin Din to 4 BNC Input Unit CPU Tx 1500 8 Pin Mini Din Cardinal Board Video In Cardinal and Support Boards on DMV I O System Figure 2 47 Cabling Options for Cardinal and Support Boards 2 60 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Software Installation and Setup Software Elements ID 4000 software installation includes the following items e DOS 6 XX e Cardinal board driver for Windows e ID 4000 application software ID 4000 Application Builder and the ID 4000 application e Close Up e Third party database application dBase SQLbase etc e FastBack e Crystal Reports Software Installation Overview Installing ID 4000 software consists of the following general steps Configure the computer CMOS if necessary Format the hard disk 1f necessary Install DOS if necessary Install Windows if necessary Install the mouse driver Install the Cardinal display driver
273. screens and badges but cannot change their hardware specifications or create additional applications Creating Full System Installation Diskettes 1 Start the Configuration Builder 2 In the Copy To dialog box select the floppy drive being used to create the diskettes 3 Ifthe application is for a LAN click on the arrow button in the upper right corner of the screen to specify the station name 4 Choose Full System 5 Ifyou want the system be capable of creating additional applications check the Enable Proliferation box 6 If you want to print diskette labels and your system is set up for printing them check the Print Labels box 7 Type the lock file path and choose OK 8 Follow instructions on the screen for inserting diskettes in the drive and labeling them 3 13 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Creating Customer System Diskettes 1 Start the D 4000 Setup Tool in the Polaroid program group 2 Choose New System 3 Set the following according to the customer s bill of materials a Database type b Drive list This is a list of the drives that ID 4000 will use to store images If images will be stored on both the C and D drives enter cd c Image formats d Connectivity e Portrait style f Output device s g Storage options 4 Choose OK 5 Ifthe system uses a database other than SQLBase go to step 6 If the system uses SQLBase a Login dialog box appears When
274. scribed in the previous section use the steps below to install a replaclement 1 Remove the replacement board from its packaging being careful not to touch the components or the connector 2 Ifnecessary configure the new board according to the appropriate instructions in Computer Configuration in Section 2 of this manual 3 Align the expansion board edge connector with the matching connector on the main board Then carefully press the board downward until it 1s fully inserted into the connector If the board is full length make sure the front edge of the board engages the board guide 4 Reconnect any cables that should be attached to the board 5 Install the expansion board retaining screw 6 Reinstall the computer cabinet Replacing the Computer Main and Cache Boards Warning Before performing this procedure read the electrostatic discharge warning on page 7 7 1 Turn off the ID 4000 system and disconnect the power cord from the computer 2 Remove the cabinet from the computer as described on page 7 9 3 Remove all expansion boards as described on page 7 14 4 Ifacache upgrade board is installed remove any drives that are installed in the front 5 25 inch drive bay Then remove the retaining screw and the cache upgrade board 5 Disconnect all cables from the planar main board Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement 6 Remove all the fixing screws from the planar board Figure 7
275. se 6 Double click on the HP Disk Creation icon and choose Create Diskettes 7 Choose DOS Mouse Plug and Play and Advanced Power Management 8 Follow the on screen instructions to create the diskettes 9 Close Windows and turn off the computer and monitor 2 14 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 10 Unplug the computer power cord and unlock the keylock on the back of the computer Figure 2 4 11 Remove the computer cover Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Removing the HP Vectra Cover Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual 11 Remove the power supply Figure 2 6 to allow access for moving jumpers and installing boards Figure 2 6 Removing the HP Vectra Power Supply 2 16 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 12 Disable the on board VGA adapter by moving the JP8 jumper on the mother board from pins 2 3 to pins 1 2 Figure 2 7 After disabling the on board VGA adapter go to drive and board hardware installation instructions below Figure 2 7 Disabling VGA on the Mother Board Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installing Drives and Boards Use the steps below to install drives and boards in the HP Vectra computer after configuring the computer as described above 1 Unpack and set up the following boards then install each in the specified computer slot Setup Slot Board Instructions Figu
276. se instructions enter the following dbnserver servername server3 splspx dbdir vol3 sqlbase dbnSsrvr servername server3 sqlspx dbdir vol3 sqlbase SQLBase wants serverX where X must be within the range 1 8 A maximum of eight active databases are allowed on the same backbone at any time The name in the local copy of SQL INI must be the same as in the network version of SQL INI 9 On the server console or from RCONSOLE do the following a Make sure CLIB and MATHLIB are already loaded load clib load mathlib 2 85 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration b Add the volume directory to the search path search add vol3 sqlbase c Load DIRECTFS DFD DLL SPXDLL and DBNSSRVR load directfs load dfd load dll load spxdll load dbnSsrvr Installing Client Components on the Workstation The client software pieces necessary for communicating with SQLBase on the Novell Netware Server are e Communications software IPX SPX and ODI e SQLBase client diskettes two disks SQLBase 5 1 4 DOS SQLBase Windows Workstation Client Components 1 Run A SETUP from within the Windows Program Manager 2 Choose Custom and choose Just the Client Software 3 Follow on screen instructions for inserting disk 2 4 Edit SQL INI as follows a Delete the EOF character from the end of the file b In the winclient dll section uncomment the line comdll sqlspxw c Verify that these lines are in t
277. se Screen Designer allows other types to be chosen Note This restriction applies only to the field used for joining the fields Any field type may be returned in a join 16 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement d Verify that the existing screen files contain only the valid field and control type combinations specified below and edit them as necessary Allowable Maximum Size Allowable Field Type Control Type characters Data Type Page NA Portrait Edit box 9 for files haracter None Variable for BLOBs Signature Edit box 9 for files Character None Variable for BLOBs NA NA Generated Edit box 7 Numeric N A Number 11 Restore the following files from the floppy disk to their appropriate directory C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA IDUA ENC C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA SAVEQRY DAT C ID4K CUSTOMER SDATA IDLK ENC Note On networked systems these files are in the SDATA directory on the network Calibrating and Testing After installing the version 1 03 software as described above calibrate the system and perform the functional check described in the ID 4000 Service Manual Upgrading to DOS 6 2 After testing the system and correcting any problems upgrade DOS to version 6 2 to complete the ID 4000 version upgrade 17 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Version 1 03 Upgrade Supplement PRUNE EXE Syntax It may be necessary to customize the use PRUNE EXE for restructuring the image dire
278. securing the two centering rings on the yoke of the CRT Figure 4 40 5 Adjust the centering rings to center the image horizontally and vertically then secure the rings with hot melt adhesive 4 39 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 6 Make the following adjustments on the monitor board Figure 4 41 a Adjust R7 to fine tune horizontal centering b Adjust R27 to fine tune vertical centering c Adjust R48 to obtain correct vertical height d Adjust R14 to obtain correct horizontal width e Adjust L11 to obtain correct horizontal linearity 7 Ifthe image is centered and aligned in relation to the gauge scribe marks alignment 1s complete If the image is centered but tilted image lines are not parallel to scribe marks perform the CRT mechanical adjustment procedure below R27 Vertical Luma Adjust Luma Adjust Centering Adjust fine R47 foak fine coarse R46 Vertical Height Verti al Adjust R48 Horizontal COS R26 Horizontal COS R38 Width Adjust Horizontal Centering Adjust R7 Horizontal Linearity Lil DPADLOC PCX Figure 4 41 Adjustments on the CI 5000 Monitor Board 4 40 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment CRT Mechanical Adjustment Mechanically reposition the CRT as follows only if the centering ring adjustment above fails to align the tennis court image with the scribed alignment gauge lines 1 Loose
279. selecting Hang Up then pressing ENTER twice Exit from Close Up by selecting Exit Close Up from the File menu On the Host computer a session ends automatically when the Remote computer operator hangs up Close Up Host continues to run in the background and reconnects whenever the Remote operator calls To close Close Up Host display the DOS prompt Then type chost remove and press Enter 8 9 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Fastback Plus Fastback Plus makes backup copies of files on the D 4000 hard drive If the original files are damaged or accidentally deleted Fastback Plus can copy restore the backup files to the hard drive Starting Fastback Plus Use these steps to start Fastback Plus for backing up or restoring files 1 Display the DOS prompt by exiting from Windows 2 Log into the Fastback Plus directory by typing cd fastback and pressing ENTER 3 Type FB and press ENTER to start Fastback Plus and display the Fastback Express window The Express window provides easy access to the following functions e Backup e Restore e Retrieve History e Compare Closing Fastback Plus To close Fastback Plus select Exit from the File menu or hold down the CTRL key and type x To leave Fastback Plus running while using another DOS application select Shell to DOS in the File menu or press the F6 key Return to Fastback Plus by typing exit at the DOS prompt and pressing the ENTER key Chang
280. setting emphasizes lines and details An extremely hard setting may be unflattering for portraits Extent Extent controls the width of the sharpening or smoothing effect of the Focus setting by adjusting the distance over which the sharpening or softening effect takes place The range of valid settings is from 0 to 100 Note The Extent setting has no effect when Focus is set to neutral 1 0 Polaroid CS 500i Scanner Sharpness Soft Hard El Focus ef T Extent el J Less Greater IDSV008 BMP Figure 4 30 Sharpness Dialog Box 4 27 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment The ideal setting depends on the image and the resolution of the display and printed output On the monitor where displayable details are relatively large a high Extent setting may cause the portrait to appear blotchy However a high Extent setting may make better use of a printer s ability to reproduce fine detail Description of Tone Settings The Tonescale dialog box Figure 4 31 appears when you choose Tone from the Scanner Control Panel advanced settings buttons Use this dialog box to shift the overall color balance to adjust the contrast between highlights and shadows or to correct the brightness of the source image Tonescale Graph The tonescale graph displays three curves red green and blue If all three overlap perfectly only the blue curve is visible The tonescale graph plots the i
281. sis and repair or see scanner service manual Reset focus to 1 in Sharpness dialog box See Adjusting Scanner Color Sharpness and Tone in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or see scanner service manual Use document carrier provided with scanner Check drive roll guide rolls and document path clear if necessary Check all cable connections on CCD driver board and tighten as needed Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Color Scanner Problems Continued Problem Smearing effect in scanned image Continued Washed out image with no detail Wide vertical shadow near edge of image after scanning white card Wide yellow vertical stripes on scanned image Possible Cause Loose drive roll pulley or belt or worn guide roll clutches Incorrect tonescale settings White reference chip dirty or blocked by debris White reference chip missing or scanner out of alignment No uniformity correction because scanner loses calibration when turned off Incorrect lamp voltage setting Guide rollers remain forward during scan Misaligned lens assembly Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Return scanner for diagnosis and repair or refer to the scanner service manual Adjust settings in Tonescale dialog box See Adjusting Scanner Color Sharpness and Tone in the Calibration and Adjustment section of
282. snineas cate ncaa see 5 15 COINF IGS YS sccsasstineotidanctoebsosion etdhehabavbincenotttenstanhintenattuesebackiodesedteonts 5 16 Initialization CUNT Files orrn a eed ect ee ea eae 5 16 INI File Description and Syntax ecccccecccccseeccceseeceeseeseeeseeeeens 5 16 PL UES PIN eneee e a E NN 5 17 eO Ot E E ae E E E A E E A E ere 5 17 BEINGS CIN G ea E tees 5 18 CARDINAL IN reiini aA 5 21 CTD OOO TN enigmes n a i eaaa oi 5 25 COIN TERR OLIN on a a amended 5 25 Eae A T Bmnere mere eon te teres re tome te mre rey nr rene na ae rs ae Renee sere rt 5 26 DOW TING TING osc ostebbag eit aa a oi 5 27 PoMS IN a A 5 27 5 1 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Initialization INI Files Continued BIOS CSI Meee xsctotecosassctt scare sods accacasetoseustetoaeeactae taetmetnetaoiees 5 36 WAGE IN cose eect E E 5 37 ASSL O a RO 5 37 MOU E eee ee O 5 37 TEE Ca E eee cen EEA 5 37 DRI SN tc tan coh ere E 5 38 OB CIN FUN O 5 40 PROGMANLINI ccccscsscscssesessesesesscscsecsesvsusscsucsesvsuesesveseaveusseaveseavenen 5 4 TIN skp sates ep papi as tape aus neat ceandec es iueat A 5 4 EX TINIE EE E EEEE 5 41 SYSTEM INI eiis E EEEE ESE 5 42 ERM E a E 5 44 TOC IN Me e A E AEE 5 44 TWING INI AOOO 5 44 E O es A A 5 45 MTA Se cess r A A A 5 45 DIE ONT PETAENT EETA T 5 46 E A E S 5 46 WINFICE IND cesctstcacadcdeinacichsuce oE eE A EESO SEES 5 49 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Se
283. software is provided with the ID 4000 Standard Software Modules Text record maintenance Applicant text records name address identification number department etc can be conveniently created retrieved edited or deleted Database search features Individual or multiple applicant records can be retrieved according to a value or range of values in one or more fields Portrait capture Applicant portraits can be captured and stored along with text records requires appropriate hardware options Signature capture Applicant signatures can be captured and stored with text records requires appropriate hardware options 1 13 Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Portrait display After capture and storage applicant portraits can be retrieved and viewed on the ID 4000 display for verification purposes Badge preview The full color badge including all text and images can be previewed on the display for verification or for inspection before printing Customer Application Builder The ID 4000 Customer Application Builder modules allow users to customize ID 4000 database fields data entry windows badge and dossier designs and bar code labels See Customer Application Builder on page 1 16 and ID 4000 Application Builder Guide for a more detailed description of the available modules and capabilities User password maintenance Users can change their own passwords for maintaining high access security levels Ba
284. ssage Insert disk with display driver 5 Insert the Ver 2 01 Cardinal Windows Drivers diskette into drive A then click on OK 6 Select ET4000 640x480 32768 col 7 Click OK then click OK a second time 8 Remove the Cardinal diskette from drive A and insert Microsoft Windows diskette requested by the on screen message 9 Follow instructions on the screen reinsert the Cardinal diskette when directed to do so and click on OK 10 Click on Restart Windows then wait for Windows to start again 11 Remove the Cardinal diskette from drive A Installing Close Up 5 0 1 Copy the Close Up diskette serial number onto a piece of paper for later reference 2 Verify that the modem is connected to serial port 2 and the power switch is on 3 Exit from Windows to display the C prompt 4 Ifthe system uses network drivers verify that they are loaded Load the drivers if necessary 5 Insert the Close Up Host and Remote diskette in drive A 6 Log onto the A drive by typing a and pressing ENTER 2 78 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 7 Type cinstall and press ENTER then select Continue by pressing ENTER again 8 Press ENTER as needed to accept the following defaults e Color e DOS amp WINDOWS e Host amp Remote e C CloseUp Dir 9 Follow the on screen directions to enter the following data Prompt Entry Your Name ID 4000 for Windows Organization Polaroid Corporation
285. stomer diskettes 8 Open Windows Setup in the Main program group and change the video mode to VGA 9 Install or configure the following software as appropriate for the system Installation or Config Software Instructions Cardinal SnapPlus Windows driver Crystal Reports FastBack PLUS SQL LAN database software 3Com 3c509 Combo Ethernet configuration ID 4000 core software ESMS INI and AOI INI for multiple area of 2 112 interest scanning 2 73 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Installation or Config Software Instructions Time and date format 2 108 Formatting the Hard Disk and Installing DOS Use this procedure to format the hard disk under any of the following conditions e New hard drive is being installed e System is being installed for the first time e Hard drive has existing partitions If the hard drive is preformatted use the procedure below If the hard disk is unformatted use the procedure Formatting an Unformatted Hard Disk on page 2 75 instead Reformatting a Preformatted Hard Disk Use the following steps to reformat a hard disk that has been formatted previously 1 Insert the DOS diskette labeled Disk 1 Setup in drive A 2 Reboot by simultaneously pressing CONTROL ALT and DELETE 3 Wait for the message Welcome to Setup Then press F3 twice to exit to the A prompt 4 Using FDISK EXE delete all partitions and logical drives from the hard drive
286. system you will not be able to load the new server For example if there is an existing server called SERVER the next server should use the next valid server name which would be SERVER2 There are a total of eight servers available These are SERVERI through SERVERS If the system has multiple servers the database names need to be unique in order to load the server SQL Server Installation on a Network Drive Note It has been discovered that the SQL INI file shipping with this product had a control character inadvertently placed at the end that will cause problems if you are installing any additional GUPTA products As a final step in the installation use a Windows editor on your client machine and remove the CtrlZ a black box n in Notepad or an arrow lt in Brief from the end of the newly installed SQL INI This should eliminate any of the problems that can be caused by this control character If you fail to perform this step and then install one of our ISQLNetwork Router products you will not be able to connect as the router information is appended to the file after Ctrl Z and the client software will not be able to read the information Use only version 5 1 4 diskettes 1 At the DOS prompt type a dossetup Press ENTER and then press the space bar to continue 2 Install all options except OS 2 and client software The dialog box settings should be as follows Initialize a Demo DataBase YES Install DOS Client Softw
287. t Gross Reference Ch ae i Card History Report an ta gt Batch Delete DIASIBS2 PCX Figure A 3 Administration Sequences A 6 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix POLAROID APPLICATION BUILDER OVERVEW Login App Builder Application Builder Application Builder Add New Delete Old Application Application Screen File ABOVER PCX Figure A 4 Application Builder Overview A 7 Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix l DATABASE OPTIONS 4 ACCESS CONTROL DIAAG PCX Figure A 5 Application Builder Menu Diagram Polaroid D 4000 Service Manual Appendix 19 CONNECTIVITY y y y 22 28 26 NOVELL TOKEN X25 ETHERNET RING 6 APPLICATION STRUCTURE 20 STORAGE COMPRESSION OPTIONS y y V V 29 30 3 32 35 Max Max CUSTOMISED POLAROID PCX EFFICIENCY COMPATIBLE JPEG SIGNATURES 5 DATABASE DIRECTORY DIAAG2 PCX Figure A 5 Application Builder Menu Diagram Continued Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual SQLBase Reserved Words The following words are reserved in SQLBase databases Do not use them as field names with SQLBase ID 4000 applications because they are likely to cause errors and unexpected results Appendix Although it is not recommended you can use a reserved word as an identifier if it is enclosed in double quotes EARBEG ABS ACOS ASIN ATAN ATAN2 CHAR CHOOSE CODE COS CTERM DATE DATETOCHAR DATEVALUE DAY DECIMAL DE
288. t field and choose Select Records from the Print menu Answer the questions in the Select Records dialog box and then click OK If your selection is based on more than one field repeat the process for the another field in this case Hire Date and continue until you complete the selection specifications 8 7 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Close Up Close Up consists of two programs 1 Host and 2 Remote These programs allow two computers to communicate with each other as long as each one has a modem connected to a telephone line The computer running Close Up Remote views and controls the computer running Close Up Host The Host computer is also running the application programs to be controlled by the Remote computer This section explains the steps for starting and connecting Close Up Host with Close Up Remote Note If you load a Microsoft mouse driver before running either Remote or Host you can use the mouse with Close Up If you use the mouse the left button is equivalent to the ENTER key and the right mouse button is equivalent to the ESC key Starting Close Up Host Use these steps to start Close Up Host on the computer to be controlled by the operator of the remote computer 1 Make sure the computer s modem is on and connected to a telephone line 2 Ifthe host computer is on a network load the network drivers 3 Display the DOS prompt by exiting from Windows 4 Type chos
289. t Managed Managed Hard Disks Managed ystem Video Bios at CO000 C7FFF Shadowed UM UMB UMB UMB M D0000 D1FFF Available M Available o emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at D2000 D3FFF Available emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at emory Space at M Available Available Available Available ea ea ea ea ea ea ea D4000 DS5FFF Available ea ea ea ea ea Internal Caching at C0000 CFFFF Enabled 3 Ifnecessary format the hard disk install DOS page 2 74 and install Windows page 2 76 2 72 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 4 Use Microsoft Diagnostics MSD EXE to verify that the BIOS is version 0 02 dated 12 16 94 and that the flash EEPROM revision level is LDET64AUS If the flash BIOS is not the correct version update the flash ROM with the update diskettes provided with the computer Warning Loss of power during BIOS update will disable the main system board and require it to be replaced If possible connect the computer to an uninterruptible power supply before updating the BIOS 5 Follow on screen instructions to register the software at the first boot up 6 Run QAPlus from Windows in the ValuePoint Tools program group to verify correct system operation 7 Use the Diskette Factory in the ValuePoint Tools program group to make cu
290. t and press ENTER 8 8 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 8 Third Party Software Starting Close Up Remote Use these steps to start Close Up Remote on the computer used to control the host computer 1 Make sure the computer s modem is on and connected to a telephone line 2 Display the DOS prompt by exiting from Windows 3 Type cremote and press ENTER Connecting Host and Remote Systems After the Host and Remote programs are running use these steps to connect the two computers 1 On the Remote computer select the Phone menu then select Dial 2 Type the telephone number of the Host computer s modem and press ENTER The Remote computer dials the Host computer s telephone number then connects When connection is successful the Remote computer displays a welcome message 3 On the Remote computer press Enter to begin the session The Remote computer now controls the Host computer Any commands typed by the Remote computer operator are executed on the Host computer Note The Remote computer operator can run ID 4000 applications on the Host computer but portraits do not appear on the Remote computer To reach the Close Up Remote menus while connected hold the ALT key and type r To reach the Close Up Host menus at the Host computer while connected hold the ALT key and type h Ending a Close Up Session To end a session from the Remote computer hang up by holding the ALT key and typing r selecting Phone
291. t using all color cards MSEMatrix 0 Initial values for capture board at start of calibration InitialRed 50 InitialGreen 50 InitialBlue 50 InitialBrightness 50 InitialContrast 50 InitialSaturation 40 InitialHue 50 LivelInitialRed 50 LivelnitialGreen 50 LivelInitialBlue 50 LivelnitialBrightness 50 LivelInitialContrast 50 LivelnitialSaturation 40 LivelInitialHue 50 Target These are all of the possible targets that are described in this file Add new entries here if you add new target sections Target1 ID3000 Target2 ID3000 3x3 Target3 Macbeth vertical Target4 Macbeth horizontal ColorSpace These are all of the possible color spaces that are described in this file Add new entries here if you add new color spaces ColorSpace1 ID3000 ColorSpace2 CCIR709 ColorSpace3 CCIR601 ID3000 The following is for the ID 3000 standard 8 1 2 x 11 target Size 2 2 White 1 1 Gray80 1 2 Black 2 1 Skin 2 2 5 22 Section 5 Directories and Files Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual CARDINAL INI File Contents Continued The following are the CIELAB values of the standard 8 1 2 x 11 target e Lab 1 1 96 00 0 0 0 0 Lab 2 1 20 44 0 0 0 0 Lab 1 2 81 35 0 0 0 0 Lab 2 2 66 37 13 04 17 02 The following is the colorimetry for the ID3000 color space Gamma function segments gamma k k0 breakpoint Gamma0 0 37 1 4711 0 40975 1 0 Illuminant is C Illuminant 0 3101 0 3162 Phosphor chromatic
292. tabase server using PC NFS communications or sqltinvw to access a REMOTE database server using TCP IP communications from Novell Uncomment 2 96 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration the COMmunication DLL s that the application s will use comdll sqldbw comdll sqlwsv comdll sqinbiow comdll sqlspxw scomdll sqltinvw scomdll sqltifsw comdll sqltipcw Modification notes In the winclient dll section uncomment the line specified or remove the in front of comdll sqlspxw so that it looks like the example below comdll sqldbw comdll sqlwsv comdll sqinbiow comdll sqlspxw scomdll sqltinvw scomdll sqltifsw comdll sqltipcw Bringing the Server up on a Novell Network The server can now be brought up in the Novell environment You must have the Netware volume name where SQL resides You must load the server in NetWare Rconsole or console Type the following statements load Insert netware volume name sqlbase clib nlm load Insert netware volume name sqlbase mathlib nlm load Insert netware volume name sqlbase dfd load Insert netware volume name sqlbase dll load Insert netware volume name sqlbase spxdll load Insert netware volume name sqlbase dbn5srvr Client installation Install client software following the normal install routine for diskettes 1 3 1 In DOS type the following A dossetup 2 Choose install 3 Modify the Sql ini file NOTE 1 The SQL 1ini File contains a c
293. tch record deletion Obsolete or other appropriate records can be retrieved via database search then batch deleted Reporting Creates text reports from ID 4000 databases Audit log The system maintains a log file with the details of each ID 4000 transaction This file 1s available for review or for storage as a standard ASCII text file Error log The error log is a file with the details of each ID 4000 system error This file can be viewed for diagnostic purposes and can be stored as a standard ASCII text file Security lock and key editing Access to ID 4000 functions can be customized for each user through a simple but secure system of locks and keys Locks are assigned to each function separately and keys for those locks are assigned as appropriate to individual users Batch output Badges bar code labels and dossiers can be batch printed and magnetic stripes can be batch encoded if batch operations are preferred for any group of applicants Reference table maintenance Reference tables are created with the ID 4000 Application Builder and provide lists for choosing the entries in ID 4000 data entry fields If necessary these reference tables can be edited or maintained from within the ID 4000 application Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 1 Description Authorizing signature capture Signatures printed on badges as a counterfeiting deterrent can be quickly and easily recaptured without special graphics manipulation requires
294. tem Color Space Initial Settings Adjusting the Appearance of Printed Portraits Perform the two adjustments in this section Adjusting Color Balance of Printed Portraits below and Adjusting the Brightness of Printed Portraits on page 4 17 if the portraits appear normal on the ID 4000 display but the color balance or brightness of printed portraits is unacceptable or varies greatly Note These procedures should not be used to compensate for an input unit portrait camera or color scanner that is out of calibration If portraits appear to have incorrect color balance on the ID 4000 display calibrate the input unit page 4 5 or the color scanner page 4 22 instead of adjusting the printing process Adjusting Color Balance of Printed Portraits If portrait color balance appears normal on the ID 4000 display but seems incorrect on printed badges follow the procedure below This procedure changes the color information transmitted to the printer whenever a portrait 1s printed Corrections you make with this procedure do not affect the non portrait areas of the printed badges The following procedure applies to all ID 4000 output devices used for printing portraits You select the device to be adjusted during the procedure 4 12 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Overview of Color Adjustment Using the following procedure you can print up to 27 portrait samples with the range of color bala
295. tents VERSION Version 1 03 ISOLEVELS SQLBase Isolation Levels ANSI 1 RC2 Allow Locking ANSI 1 RC No Locking ANSI3 S SQLBase RC2 MASK EXTEND 5 27 Support board hardware definition Output device definition Output device parameters Device driver definition Film count Color table definitions Application list Database directory list Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ESMS INI File Contents Continued TWAIN _INIT Section 5 Directories and Files This TWAIN interface support settings PixelType 1 Gray 2 RGB Resolution 125 250 500 Units 0 Inches Dimensions In Inches ONLY Decimals OK to Hundredths Bottom Top Right Left ImageRatio SetToUse 3 1 PixelType 2 1Resolution 125 1 Units 0 1 Left 0 40 1 Top 0 40 1Right 3 47 1 Bottom 2 45 2PixelType 2 2Resolution 125 2Units 0 2Left 0 40 2Top 0 40 2Right 3 20 2Bottom 3 20 3PixelType 2 3Resolution 125 3 Units 0 3Left 0 40 3Top 0 40 3Right 2 45 3Bottom 3 47 4PixelType 2 4Resolution 125 4Units 0 4Left 0 4Top 0 4Right 3 16 4Bottom 3 16 BarCodeBold CI 5000 1 Sony610 1 Nisca 1 Sensitivity describes the closeness of the match between the flood fill color chosen and the logo color found Example 0 means an exact match 190 190 f 1 means close 189 191 5 means 185 195 All RGB colors are equally affected Flood Fill Sensitivity 0 5 28
296. ter power switch Figure 2 36 to ON and verify the following events a Power indicator lights b From left to right one at a time all panel LCDs flash five times and turn off Transport assembly Figure 2 35 moves to far right Print head moves down and back up Cleaning roller assembly initializes Overlay foil advances Transport assembly moves back to home position a mh 2 BO Print ribbon advances Ready LED lights about 30 seconds after ribbon advances p 0 e 2 47 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 3 Press and hold the Ready key for about 3 seconds then release it 4 When the Card LED blinks use the insertion slide to insert a blank card and print a test pattern Figure 2 37 on it 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to print several cards 6 Verify that all test cards have the following e Dimensions shown in Figure 2 37 e Complete print pattern with uniform pattern density e Correct color in each labeled color box e Freedom from streaks lines and blemishes in the printed area Note Ifthe cards do not meet these standards refer to the troubleshooting section of the ImageCard II Maintenance Manual Installing the Printer Driver After completing power up and testing and after setting up all the other input and output devices on the ID 4000 install the ImageCard II printer driver as described on page 2 119 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 01 23455789 abcdefghijkimnoparstuvw
297. the Captured Image ceecccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 Camera Calibration Setup Values cccceccccseeeeceee ees 4 12 Adjusting the Appearance of Printed Portraits 4 12 Adjusting Color Balance of Printed Portraits 4 12 Adjusting the Brightness of Printed Portraits 4 17 Calibrating the Color Scanner e E 4 22 Using Advanced Scanner Settings c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 23 Adjusting Color Sharpness and Tone 00cceee 4 23 Description of Color Settings rieniras 4 25 Description of Sharpness Settings ceccecseecceeeeeeeees 4 27 Description of Tone Settihf Ssnan 4 28 Adjusting the Scanned Field ceccceseeeeeeneeeeens 4 30 Calibrating the CI 5000 Color Film Recorder 4 33 Tools and Equipment Required ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 33 Calibrating the CI 5000 with ImagePrint 4 33 Electrical Final Assembly Alignment of the CRT 4 35 Autoluminance Adjustment cccecccceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeees 4 4 CI 5000 COS Adjustment ccecceceeesseseseeeeseeeeees 4 44 Pak moa aC IP IC LDC ac ctsnsntescaata arene A 4 45 Adjusting Skew on the TX 1500 Printer 4 46 Positioning Printed Images for the Diecutter 4 49 4 1 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Section 4 Calibration an
298. the Graphics Mode box 9 Make sure High is selected in the Graphics Quality box 10 Continue clicking OK until you return to the Printers dialog box 2 49 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 11 Click on Connect and choose the appropriate printer port 12 Click on Close to finish set up and return to the Control Panel then close the Control Panel Hardware Key Installation and Setup The following hardware key installation is required for all ID 4000 systems If the key is not installed the message Illegal Use of Polaroid Software appears when the user attempts to start ID 4000 applications Note Installation requires an initialization software diskette provided with the key 1 Connect the hardware key to LPT1 parallel port 1 If necessary disconnect any device already attached to LPT 1 2 Connect any device normally attached to LPT1 the LaserJet IV for example to the hardware key instead Note The Key is a pass through device 3 Insert the key initialization software diskette into drive A and run the initialization program according to instructions provided with the key Then remove the diskette from the drive 4 Start the ID 4000 application to verify that the key is properly installed 2 50 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Cable Connections Cabling information for some typical D 4000 systems and their components is provided below Beca
299. the SIBS Security Identification and Badging System Icon 2 Select a System and an Application 3 Enter the master system user ID CSD and password Polaroid in the appropriate edit boxes then select OK to display the ID 4000 Data Entry window 4 Ifthe badge you just designed is for a table applicant category other than the one currently selected select the correct one with the radio buttons at the top of the window 5 Enter applicant information in the Data Entry window fields 2 123 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 6 After you have entered the data and selected a badge type choose the Add button from the top of the window to add the data to the database 7 Choose the Print button to display the portrait capture window and start the process of capturing images and printing a badge When the portrait capture window appears proceed to the portrait and signature capture test below Portrait and Signature Capture Test Perform the following portrait and signature capture test after completing the log in and data entry test above The portrait capture window is on the screen 1 Frame the subject by moving the camera then click on OK to capture the portrait 2 Ifthe Signature Capture window appears sign the signature tablet and click OK to capture your signature 3 Select Yes to print a badge 4 Verify that the printed badge has satisfactory quality 2 124 Polaroid ID
300. the board address you must also change the address in the file SUPPORT INI The address must be an even value Note Position 10 is not used but set it to ON Figure 2 13 Support Board Switch Location o jeje wie or uju ujuja ptt etatatsfotzis fs ho Figure 2 14 Support Board Switch Settings 2 25 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Cardinal Snap Plus Board Configuration The Cardinal Snap Plus board requires no jumper changes from the original factory settings shown in Figure 2 15 Software configurable parameters are located in the CARDINAL INI file SWI all switch positions OFF Figure 2 15 Cardinal Board Configuration 2 26 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Future Domain TMC 850M SCSI Card Configuration Remove the three termination resistor packs RN1 RN2 and RN3 Figure 2 16 only if there is an internal SCSI device such as the Archive Viper Tape drive When there is an internal SCSI device be sure to terminate it When connecting to an external SCSI device be sure to use a MAC 25 pin to 50 pin SCSI cable 1B0351A for the CI5000 Plus Digital Palette or a MAC 25 pin to 50 pin SCSI cable for the CS 5001 color scanner Termination on the controller and an internal device is in the form of resistor packs usually three in a row A resistor pack is in the form of a SIPP The termination on an external device has a conne
301. the diskette from drive A and click on OK 2 107 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 10 Set up AUTOEXEC BAT to start Windows at boot up as follows a At the DOS prompt type edit autoexec bat and press ENTER to start the DOS editor b Add the following line to the end of the AUTOEXEC BAT file win c Pull down the File menu and choose Save d Pull down the File menu and choose Exit to return to the DOS prompt 11 Reboot the system to verify that Windows starts properly Setting Date and Time Formats Date and Time fields in the ID 4000 system require leading zeros for proper validation To ensure that proper dates and times are retrieved from the database open the Windows Control Panel International Date and Time setup and verify that the Leading Zeros option box 1s checked Be sure that the time format to be used 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock is established prior to adding data into an ID 4000 database table If the time format is changed existing records will be returned to the screen in the wrong format and an Invalid Date error will occur when trying to update the record When changing from a 24 hour clock to a 12 hour clock the AM and PM settings must be entered to ensure proper setting of the time fields Setting SQLBase Isolation Levels When using the D 4000 with SQLBase choose and set an isolation level ANSI Level 3 is the most stringent Isolation Level ANSI level 1 is the d
302. the new encoder according to Magtek MT 80 Magnetic Stripe Encoder Setup in Section 2 of this manual 3 Disconnect all cables from the encoder being replaced 4 Connect the cables to the new encoder and turn the power on 5 Test the new unit by performing the Magtek Magnetic Stripe Encoder Test in Section 5 of this manual 6 Repack defective unit and return for service or replacement Replacing the Signature Tablet 1 Unpack the new signature tablet and its power supply and save all packing material 2 Disconnect all cables from the tablet being replaced including the power adapter at the 9 pin D subtermination 3 Connect the new tablet and its power supply 4 Repack defective unit and return it for service Polaroid I D 4000 Service Manual Section 7 On Site Parts Replacement Replacing the TX 1500 or TX 2000 Thermal Printer 1 Unpack the new printer and save all packing material 2 Disconnect all cables from printer being replaced 3 Connect cables to the new printer 4 If the new printer is a TX 1500 perform Polaroid TX 1500 Thermal Printer Setup in Section 2 of this manual 5 Install ink and paper according to instructions in Section 5 of this manual 6 Repack the defective unit and return it for service Replacing the Fingerprint Scanner 1 Unpack the new scanner and save all packing material 2 Disconnect the two cables from the unit 3 Connect the new fingerprint scanner and its new power
303. ticks to card or breaks as card exits ribbon winds rapidly without printing Possible Cause Incorrect print head voltage Incorrect print head voltage Insufficient print head offset Dirty card rollers Faulty card surface or material Insufficient head prep offset Insufficient print head offset 6 28 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Clean the belt See page 6 68 Corrective Action Set the print head voltage to 10 See ImageCard II Printer Setting Print Head Voltage on page 6 71 Set the print head voltage to 10 See ImageCard II Printer Setting Print Head Voltage on page 6 71 Increase print head offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 See ImageCard II Printer Cleaning the Card Rollers on page 6 73 Use card stock from a different lot Increase head prep offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets page 6 71 Increase print head offset value See ImageCard II Printer Setting Offsets on page 6 71 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ImageCard II Color PVC Printer Problems Continued Problem Printing ribbon sticks to card and 1s pulled to overlay area Printing ribbon breaks at beginning of yellow panel card ejects unprinted Possible Cause Insufficient head prep offset Insufficient print head offset Ribbon panel length too large
304. ting the printer 3 Installing the printer driver Details of these procedures are given below Unpacking Connecting and Loading the Printer 1 Unpack the printer and open the cover 2 Remove any packing tape from inside the printer 3 Loosen the four shipping screws securing the transport assembly Figure 2 35 Note Do not remove the screws Just loosen them until you feel a slight resistance 1 to 1 turns 4 Remove the card weight from the card input tray 5 Ifthe cards to be printed are not the normal thickness 0 030 in adjust the card choke at the rear of the input hopper according to the Adjustments section of the ImageCard II Maintenance Manual Shipping screws Do NOT remove loosen only Transport assembly Figure 2 35 ImageCard II Shipping Screws 2 46 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 6 Turn the printer power switch to OFF Figure 2 36 and turn off the D 4000 computer 7 Use a standard 25 pin M 50 pin Centronics parallel cable to connect the printer s parallel connector Figure 2 36 to the ID 4000 computer parallel port 8 Follow instructions in the ImageCard II Printer Operator s Guide to load print ribbon overlay foil cleaning tape and blank PVC cards in the printer Parallel connector Power switch Figure 2 36 ImageCard II Power Switch and Parallel Cable Connection Powering Up and Testing 1 Open the printer cover 2 Turn the prin
305. tion Setup Tool This directory can be located on a LAN i Directory holding Microsoft Windows files may contain files associated 4 with Q E database library or Multilink VB WINDOWS 3 Directory holding Microsoft Windows system files may contain ID 4000 SYSTEM printer drivers or files associated with Q E database library Figure 5 1 ID 4000 Directory Structure 5 4 Polaroid 1D 4000 Service Manual ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Table 5 1 ID 4000 Directories File Listing Contents Page C DPALETTE CI 5000 Plus film recorder files 5 9 e g IMGPRNT EXE C ID4000 Installation library files for creating 5 10 additional master or VAR systems e g SID4K DIR Note These files are on master and VAR systems only C ID4K ID 4000 executables e g 5 10 SIBS EXE International text files e g ESMSINT TXT ID 4000 help files e g ID4DSD HLP D 4000 initialization INI files Scanner configuration CFG files Setup Tool hardware list HW LST Color lookup tables e g THERMAL DAT Color definition files e g THERMAL DEF Error and audit log files e g ERROR LOG Empty user password file IDUA ENC Tools password file APW ENC Empty query templates file SAVEQRY DAT Master and VAR systems only 5 5 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 5 Directories and Files Table 5 1 ID 4000 Directories Continued File Listing Contents C ID4K CDP C ID4K CDP
306. tlet and repair if necessary Check for power at CI 5000 end of line cord replace cord if necessary Check fuse and replace if necessary Check for power at switch return CI 5000 for switch replacement if necessary Check power supply voltage on J3 J4 JS pin 1 12V pin 2 12V pin 3 GND pin 4 5V If necessary see the CI 5000 service manual or return CI 5000 for power supply replacement Check logic board connectors and tighten or reconnect Check logic board test points TP12 GND TP13 5VDC TP14 12VDC TP15 12VDC If necessary see the CI 5000 service manual or return CI 5000 for logic board replacement Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual CI 5000 Color Film Recorder Problems Continued Problem LED blinks continuously but CI 5000 does not perform self diagnostics CI 5000 does not perform self diagnostics when power switch turned on CI 5000 performs self diagnostics when turned on but system does not recognize it and will not boot No image on film black image area Possible Cause Loose or disconnected logic board connectors Faulty logic board Incorrect SCSI ID setting Incorrect SCSI cable connections or termination Loose SCSI connections Faulty F1 fuse on CI 5000 SCSI board Faulty CI 5000 SCSI board Dark slide not pulled from camera back 6 22 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Check logic board connector
307. to screws A and B after the final adjustment Note If you lose your place in the adjustment you can start again from a known reference To do so fully tighten screws A B C and D screws by turning them clockwise Next loosen each screw counterclockwise 4 turn or 270 degrees to create a uniform opening between the main guide and the plate drum Then make a test print measure its skew and go back to step 6 9 Replace the thermal head cover and tighten the two screws 4 48 Calibration and Adjustment Section 4 z D gt am oO Nn D of N y O aa z O ax Positioning Printed Images for the Diecutter Use this procedure to adjust the size or position of the printed badges to align them with the diecutter openings 4 52 from the ID 4000 program group igure F us 1con e Choose the Diecut Tools to display the Diecu l igure 4 53 indow F tment w j t Area Ad 2 Ifthe printer and badge format used by the system are not displayed at the pull down the File menu choose Card then choose the 9 bottom of the window correct printer and badge format ion by choosing Orientation from tat 1en 3 Ifnecessary choose another badge or the File menu then choosing Horizontal or Vertical 4 Ifthe system prints two badges on each sheet or prints the front and back of the badge on the same sheet click on the Side 1 button
308. ts correct errors or complete a partially defined application You can also use Old Application as a shortcut to clone an existing application and then modify it for a customer with similar requirements Warning If you change the name or database directory information for the existing application be sure you are not overwriting another application that uses the same directory Setting Up the Database and Badges In some cases it may be necessary for you to set up the customer s database data entry screens badges and dossiers Refer to D 4000 Application Builder Guide for specific instructions 3 12 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 3 Application Setup Preparing Installation Diskettes After you have set up the application including database tables screens and badges you use the ID 4000 Configuration Builder to create a set of diskettes that can be used to install the complete customized D 4000 system or to update an existing system Full System and Customer System Options With the Configuration Builder you can create a full ID 4000 system capable of creating additional applications by defining hardware software and templates and producing installation diskettes Full systems are normally created only for Polaroid internal VAR and sales personnel use The Configuration Builder also allows you to create customer systems or installation disks intended for customer use These systems can create and edit databases
309. u and select the Add Table Screen 7 Enter the Table and Screen Names as follows a Enter DBTAB for the Table Name and press Tab to go to the next field b Enter DBSCR for the Screen name and click on OK 2 121 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 8 Enter the following information into the database Field Name S Box Sec primary Koy See ote blow Tia flawname fox Ta fiene fox JOK See note 2 below scab ff OK Note 1 For the SSN Field Name click on Validation click mask type and choose the one that corresponds to a social security number type Note 2 Choose the Capture Type dialog box and select one of the three capture methods Click OK in the database 9 Inthe Audit Log dialog box click on LNAME and OK 10 In Database click on AutoFields Pull down the File menu and select Save All When saving is complete select Exit from the File menu After completing the database screen designer test proceed to the badge designer test below Badge Designer Test 1 From the Application Builder window select the System and Application for which you designed the database table 2 From the Application Builder Main Screen select Badge Designer 3 From the File drop down menu select New Badge to open the Screen and Badge Selection dialog box 4 In the Choose Screen box select the screen you just designed in Database Screen Designer 5 In the Enter New Badge Format edit b
310. ual After completing the calibration perform the functional check as described below 2 120 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Functional Check After installing the software and calibrating the ID 4000 system perform the following operations to verify that the system 1s operating correctly If any function fails or performs unsatisfactorily refer to the Troubleshooting Repair and Maintenance section of this manual The functional check has the following components e Database Screen Designer test e Badge Designer test e Log In and Data Entry test e Portrait and Signature Capture test If necesary refer to the ID 4000 Application Builder Guide or D 4000 for Windows User Guide for more detailed instructions Database Screen Designer Test 1 Double click on the ID 4000 application group in Windows Program Manager 2 Double click on the Application Builder icon 3 Enter the password POLAROID unless the customer has changed it and click on OK If the password has changed ask the local System Administrator for it 4 Select a System and Application If no application 1s available add an application with the Application Manager 5 Click on Database Screen Designer If you have added an application but it has no tables choose New Screen File If you are using an existing application click on Open Screen File The Database Screen Designer window is now open 6 Pull down the File men
311. ull the calibration card in and eject it 4 Verify that the green LED light is steady indicating successful calibration Note A flashing LED indicates that calibration was not successful and that the scanner requires depot repair 5 Remove the calibration card from the scanner and store it where it will not become marked or damaged Calibration Button Figure 4 25 Scanner Calibration Button 4 22 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment Using Advanced Scanner Settings Color scanner advanced settings allow you to adjust the default color sharpness or tone settings for the scanned image They also allow you to adjust the area field captured by the scanner Adjusting Color Sharpness and Tone Using the Scanner Control Panel accessible through the ID 4000 software you can adjust the default color tone and sharpness settings used by the color scanner This procedure changes the values stored in C WINDOWS TWAIN CSSOOI CFG Use this procedure whenever the color balance sharpness or tone of scanned images is consistently unacceptable Use the steps below to optimize the scanner settings for typical images scanned by the customer You can also use it to create a custom configuration file for a particular type of image 1 Calibrate the color scanner as described on page 4 22 2 Create a new directory and copy all CFG files from the directory C WINDOWS TWAIN into the new di
312. up screens appear verify that the settings match the following recommended values System Information Processor 80486DX2 16000 KB Processor Speed 66 MHz Flash EEPROM Revision LDET64AUS Math Coprocessor Installed Level Video Video Controller S3 Inc Vision 864 Refresh Rate 800x600 56 Hz Video Memory 1024 KB Refresh Rate 1024x768 43 Hz Interlaced Video Display Type User Defined _ Refresh Rate 1280x1024 45 Hz Interlaced Horizontal Frequency 31 5 36 9 KHz Refresh Rate 1600x1200 Not Supported Refresh Rate 640x480 60 Hz Securit Disabled Diskette Drive Access Enabled Adminstrator Password Disabled Hard Disk Access Enabled 2 71 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration Keyboard and Mouse Keyboard Speed Normal Keyboardless Oper Mode Disabled Keyboard Numlock State Installed Input Output Ports Serial Port A 3 F8 IRQ4 COMI Parallel Port 3BC IRQ7 LPT1 Serial Port B 2F8 IRQ4 COM2 Parallel Port Mode PC AT Compatible Cache Internal Cache 8 KB Enabled JExternal Cache 128 KB Enabled Mass Storage Devices Diskette Drive 0 1 44 MB 3 5 Primary IDE Mode High Performance Diskette Drive 1 Not installed Secodary IDE Mode High Performance Hard Disk 0 539 MB DE fo Startup Options First Startup Device Diskette Drive 0 Unattended Start Mode Disabled Second Startup Device HardDiskO _ o oo oo 30 Minutes Video Display No
313. upta SQLBase Server from floppy diskettes to a Novell Netware server 3 1x Note Use only version 5 1 4 Netware diskettes These instructions are specifically for a Netware 5 user 3 diskettes using the file server ELVIS and installing on volume VOL3 as the drive J in the directory SQLBASE using SERVER3 Make the appropriate changes for the installation you are performing 1 Ifyou are in Windows exit to DOS Do not attempt to use a Windows DOS session 2 84 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration 2 Log in as supervisor on the Novell Netware file server ELVIS for these instructions 3 Verify that the volume you are installing on is mapped and you know the drive letter to which it 1s mapped For these instructions the volume is VOL3 and it is mapped to drive letter J 4 Insert the first Netware diskette in drive A log onto drive A and run DOSSETUP EXE 5 Follow the on screen instructions to install only the server side component and the DEMO database on drive J and in the directory SQLBASE 6 Follow the on screen instructions for inserting the remaining diskettes in drive A which completes installation of the server software 7 Make a backup of SQL INI by copying it to SQLOLD INI 8 Edit SQL INI as follows a Delete the end of file character b In the Netware section enter the location of the files and the server name with the appropriate protocol For the example used in the
314. use of ID 4000 component flexibility cable configurations can vary from those shown here System Cabling The system cabling diagrams on the following pages represent three typical D 4000 configurations ID 4000 systems using computers other than the NCR 3333 may have boards and connectors arranged differently from those shown in the diagrams CPU Input and Output Devices ID Card Printer Cable Diagram e NCR 3333 computer monitor CI S5000S color film Figure 2 Page 2 52 keyboard mouse recorder 32 Input unit TX 1500 color thermal Figure 2 Page 2 53 Signature tablet printer 39 Modem TX 2000 V Y 300 Figure ied Page 2 54 HP LaserJet printer color thermal printer 40 2 51 Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual SRON ict YOLINOW OC Colo O00 oooooooucoo pogi ooooooooooo NOOO ggogoago0gy DOOD OOOOOOO0O0 QuVOgAda aSNOW need PMA S000 ID Figure 2 38 Cabling Diagram ID 4000 with CI 5000S Film Recorder 2 52 Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Pap ine he hate ee i PAN Se ROOK ORE RI RD Add EEEE YON Ps UEH PRPHA FEA Tp q MA u Dand UGLINOWN pzs DOC 0g OOO OOOO0000000 ASNOW Figure 2 39 Cabling Diagram ID 4000 with TX 1500 Thermal Printer 2 53 Section 2 System Configuration Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual ee S se OOO OOOOUU000000 OOOO OOOOOOOO000 OOOO OOOOOOO0000 OODO OODOOOo
315. ustment by pressing F1 The program defaults to AUTOLUMA Install the photometer turn it on and set it to 0 20 f l Be sure the film recorder is covered to prevent ambient light from affecting the readings DPAL PCX Figure 4 43 Autoluminance Adjustment on the Logic Board 4 42 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 8 Turn luma adjust pot R46 on the monitor board Figure 4 44 to achieve a brightness of 6 0 f 1 3 0mV on the photometer 9 Adjust VRI on the logic board Figure 4 43 until the Gentest Autoluma on the screen reads 200 10 Press ESC to return to the previous menu then exit from the Gentest program R27 Vertical Luma Adjust Luma Adjust Centering Adjust fine R47 coarse R46 Vertical Height Vertigal Adj ust R48 Horizontal COS R26 Horizontal cos R38 Width Adjust A X Horizontal Centering Adjust R7 Horizontal Linearity Lil DPADLOC PCX Figure 4 44 Autoluminance Adjustments on CI 5000 Monitor Board 4 43 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment CI 5000 COS4 Adjustment The COS4 adjustment procedure assures uniform brightness at the four corners and the center of the CRT It should be performed after electrical final assembly alignment of the film recorder CRT or whenever the monitor board or logic board 1s replaced The objective of this procedure is to obtain 1500mV at E4 green wire at CRT cap on th
316. way from CI 5000 Pull yellow tab at moderate speed Clean developer rollers Pull tabs straight out of camera back Clean developer rollers Pull yellow tab smoothly without stopping Wait for recommended interval before peeling negative from positive Adjust CI 5000 COS4 see Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Adjust according to Positioning Printed Images for the Diecutter in the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual TX 2000 VY 300 Color Thermal Printer Problems Problem Printer does not power up PAPER LED flashing PAPER LED flashing even with paper properly loaded INK LED flashing READY LED flashing READY PAPER INK LEDs flashing simultaneously Possible Cause Power cord not connected to AC power Front Control Selector switch off Paper compartment empty Paper installed upside down Incorrect paper type installed Printer waiting to start printing Ink cartridge cover open Print cartridge not installed or exhausted Torn ink paper in cartridge Printer initializing Jammed paper 6 24 Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Corrective Action Connect power cord Turn Front Control Selector switch rear of printer on Load paper Turn paper over Marked side should face upward Install correct paper type Start printing Close cartridge cover Install new print
317. xit button until the window appears Employee Number First Name Middle Initial C Hire Date TUES_020 BMP Figure 4 2 Data Entry Window 4 5 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 2 Choose the Administration button to display the Administration window Figure 4 3 3 Choose System Management button to display the System Management window Figure 4 4 4 Choose the Calibration button to display the Calibrate dialog box Figure 4 5 ID 4000 43 00 13 Administration Komere Bele DB MANAGEMENT Handle database tasks Export Data Transport Batch Administration Screen ADMIN BMP Figure 4 3 Administration Window ID 4000 43 00 13 Administration Sia CSC IK SET LOCKS Set security locks on use of the system Administration Screen SYSMAN BMP Figure 4 4 System Management Window Calibrate Adjust Image Output Color _ Calibrate Image Capture IMGCALO1 PCX Figure 4 5 Calibrate Dialog Box 4 6 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 4 Calibration and Adjustment 5 Choose Calibrate Image Capture to display the camera Calibrate dialog box Figure 4 6 6 Ifthe Live Settings box is not checked click on it to display a live image on the ID 4000 display 7 Position the blue backdrop A supplied with the D 4000 exactly 5 feet 1 5 meters from the camera lens B Make sure the backdrop is perpendicular
318. xyz Figure 2 37 Test Card 2 48 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 2 System Configuration AT amp T Paradyne 14 4 FAX Modem Setup Connect the external AT amp T Paradyne 14 4 fax modem to serial port 2 with a 9 pin F 25 pin M serial cable The fax modem uses the following third party software e Close Up for communications e WinFAX Pro fax Installation procedures for Close Up 1s on page 2 78 To install WinFAX follow the instructions provided with the software LaserJet IV Printer Setup Cable Connection Connect the HP LaserJet IV laser printer to any parallel port with a standard 25 pin M 50 pin Centronics parallel cable Printer Driver Installation and Setup Note This procedure requires a diskette containing the Windows driver for the LaserJet IV printer The diskette 1s provided with the printer 1 Start Windows and open Control Panel in the Main program group 2 Double click the Printers icon to open the Printers dialog box 3 Click the Add button then click the Install button 4 Insert the diskette containing the LaserJet IV driver into drive A Click OK 5 Highlight HP LaserJet 4 4M in the List of Printers and click OK 6 Follow the on screen instructions to finish installing the driver Remove the diskette from A drive 7 Click on the Setup button in the Printers dialog box and select 300 dpi from the Printer Resolution box 8 Click on the Options button and select Raster in
319. ystem including the CS 500 see SCSI Diagnostics on page 6 41 Polaroid C5 500i Information SCSI ID 4 ROM Yersion 70i Code Yersion 2 00 Total Scans 469 Scan Status g Calibration Status Internal Error 10 Internal Modes Status Word 30 Miscellaneous Control Word 86 TKIL Error Code IDSV010A BMP Figure 6 9 Typical Scanner Internal Information Codes 6 44 Polaroid ID 4000 Service Manual Section 6 Troubleshooting Repair Maintenance Input Unit and Cardinal Board Diagnostics This procedure produces a live video capture of the current environment allowing you to verify proper operation of the input unit including the portrait camera and lens and the Cardinal video board Note This procedure requires Snapshot Snaptest diskette Version 2 15 or later provided with the Cardinal board 1 Start the computer to display the DOS prompt or exit from Windows to display it 2 Insert the Snapshot Snaptest diskette in the A drive 3 Type a snaptest in and press ENTER to view a live image on the ID 4000 display 4 To verify proper operation of the input unit and the Cardinal board repeat step 3 as many times as needed while observing their operation If the live video image is satisfactory go to step 5 If the video image does not appear or is unsatisfactory cable connections may be loose the live image may require calibration see the Calibration and Adjustment section of this manual or the len

ID-4000 for Windows Repair Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents